JP7807672B2 - Pinball game machine - Google Patents

Description

This relates to a pinball gaming machine equipped with a play area from which game balls are shot.

Among various conventional pinball gaming machines, so-called Type 1 pachinko gaming machines display multiple fluctuating symbols in a display area such as an LCD display located approximately in the center of the gaming board (hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "symbol fluctuations" or "variable display"). These gaming machines are known for transitioning to a special game known as a jackpot, in which more prize balls can be awarded than in regular gameplay, if a specific combination of symbols is formed when multiple rows of symbols are stopped. The fluctuating symbols displayed in the display area do not simply display multiple symbols fluctuatingly; they are also designed to heighten player anticipation, such as by extending the fluctuating display time longer than usual when one more symbol is needed to achieve a jackpot, as in a so-called reach screen. Player anticipation is also heightened by using characters in the images of symbols to give the fluctuating display a story, and by preview effects that premonitively hint at the high likelihood of transitioning to the special game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-230714 JP 2017-70532 A

However, depending on the relationship between the various presentation elements and various operability designed for each machine, it may be possible to achieve a synergistic effect in the presentation, or it may be possible to reduce the effectiveness of the presentation, so careful design is required when combining each element.

The present invention was developed in consideration of the above-mentioned issues, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can achieve both improved presentation effects and improved operability.

In order to solve the above problem, one embodiment of the pinball gaming machine of the present invention comprises a gaming board on which a gaming area is formed, a start winning hole provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area and in which the entry of a gaming ball triggers a lottery, a large winning hole that allows or facilitates the entry of gaming balls when opened, a winning/losing determination means that determines whether or not the game will transition to a special game that is more advantageous to the player than normal game when the ball enters the start winning hole, a symbol display device that displays a variable symbol to indicate the result of the winning/losing determination, and a variation pattern determination means that selects one of a plurality of predetermined variation patterns for the pattern variation display process. a hold control means for storing as hold the lottery values corresponding to the new ball entering the start winning port up to a predetermined number when a new ball enters the start winning port and a pattern change corresponding to a ball entering the previous start winning port is displayed; a special game control means for enabling the execution of a special game accompanied by the opening of the large winning port when the result of the hit/miss determination by the hit/miss determination means is a predetermined result; a performance display device for displaying performance content; a performance determination means for determining the performance content to be displayed on the performance display device; and a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device. When a new ball enters the starting winning slot, advance information relating to a lottery value corresponding to the ball is transmitted to an effect determination means, and based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the likelihood of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information, and the device has a first mode and a second mode as modes related to the frequency of execution of the specific effect, and the mode setting to be set to either the first mode or the second mode can be executed according to the operation of the player, and the predetermined effect content can be changed by the first operation by the player, Volume adjustment can be performed by a second operation by the player, and mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player. If the first operation is continued, it is considered to be a continuous input of the first operation, but if the second operation is continued, it is not considered to be a continuous input of the second operation, and if the third operation is continued, it is not considered to be a continuous input of the third operation. If the second operation is continued before power is turned on and the second operation continues after power is turned on, the volume will not change after power is turned on, and if the third operation is continued before power is turned on and the third operation continues after power is turned on, the mode will not change after power is turned on.

In addition, any combination of the above components, or mutual substitution of the components or expressions of the present invention among methods, devices, systems, computer programs, recording media storing computer programs, data structures, etc., are also valid aspects of the present invention.

The pinball gaming machine of the present invention can provide a gaming machine that achieves both improved presentation effects and improved operability.

A diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko game machine. A diagram showing the basic structure of the back side of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the functional blocks of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a main board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pass/fail determination table. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of the range setting of the winning/losing lottery value for each setting value. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically illustrating a symbol determination table. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern table. This is a diagram schematically showing a pre-pass/fail judgment table referenced in the pre-pass/fail judgment. A diagram showing a schematic diagram of a pre-win/lose determination table corresponding to the game settings. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sub-board. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a schematic overview of a mobile link system. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating a hardware configuration of a main board and a sub-board. 1 is a block diagram showing a schematic hardware configuration of a performance control device. 10 is a flowchart showing the control start process of the main board in a pachinko gaming machine. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting change process of S124 in FIG. 15. 16 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in FIG. 15. 16 is a flowchart showing the main process of S120 in FIG. 15 in detail. 10 is a flowchart showing details of an interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the control start process of a sub-board in a pachinko gaming machine. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of S518 in FIG. 20 in detail. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a command is received from the main board. 10 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for effect display control. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a sub CPU receives a command from a control CPU. 10 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process when a timer interrupt for controlling various devices occurs. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying a special symbol change. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying a changing decorative pattern. 10 is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. This is a flowchart showing the process of small win gameplay. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a screen of a performance display device. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of contraction of a frame image in a screen transformation effect. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating an example of frame image shaking in a screen transformation effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a schematic layer structure of a display screen in a screen transformation display. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the process of the movable device effect that is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. FIG. 2 is a diagram schematically illustrating a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of a frame buffer area. FIG. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating a process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. A figure showing an example of a screen for the third special effect pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the process of using the buffer area in the third special effect pattern. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a guide screen for custom functions. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a change screen for a pre-read chance mode. A figure showing an example of a screen for changing the goal-goal pre-reading mode. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the relationship between whether a stage background image is displayed and whether the effect settings can be changed. This is a diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in the first embodiment that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the processing image between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board. This is a diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in a second aspect that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing details of the operation unit device in FIG. 46. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the general electrical configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. This is a diagram showing the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in a third aspect that adopts the specifications of an enclosed pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating details of an operation unit device.

(Prerequisite technology)
The pachinko machine of this embodiment contains multiple games equivalent to conventional Type 1 pachinko machines. The first and second games are played first, with the second game being given priority so that they are not played simultaneously. To achieve both of these playability features, the machine is equipped with multiple start slots, multiple special symbol display devices, and multiple hold lamps. The machine is designed so that the payout from a jackpot in the second game is generally greater than the payout from a jackpot in the first game. For example, the second game is designed to be relatively more profitable than the first game, such as by having a higher probability of hitting a jackpot with a probability change, and by having a larger number of unit games that make up the special game when a jackpot is hit (including cases where long-open unit games with long opening times for the big prize entrance and short-open unit games with short opening times are mixed in one special game, and even if the number of unit games is the same, the second game has a larger number of long-open unit games than the first game). Furthermore, the gameplay is realized in which the player first aims for an initial hit in the first game, and after a time-saving feature is granted by hitting a jackpot in the first game, the player repeatedly aims for the second game to win more balls.

Figure 1 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine 100 is mainly composed of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. The gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 101, a front frame 102, a transparent plate 103, a door 104, an upper ball tray 105, a lower ball tray 106, a launch handle 107, a speaker 108, a performance button 109, a cross key 110, and a decorative lamp 111. The outer frame 101 has an opening and is a frame body for fixing the pachinko gaming machine 100 in the desired installation position. The front frame 102 is a frame body that fits into the opening of the outer frame 101 and is attached to the outer frame 101 so that it can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The front frame 102 includes a mechanism for launching gaming balls, a mechanism for detachably storing the gaming board, a mechanism for guiding or retrieving gaming balls, and the like.

The transparent plate 103 is made of glass or the like and is supported by the door 104. The door 104 is attached to the front frame 102 so that it can be opened and closed by a hinge mechanism (not shown). The upper ball tray 105 has mechanisms for storing game balls, sending game balls to the launch rail, and removing game balls to the lower ball tray 106. The lower ball tray 106 has mechanisms for storing and removing game balls. Speakers 108 are provided on the left and right sides of the upper part of the door 104, and output sound effects and music according to the game status and presentation using a presentation control means. Most of the resin material that makes up the exterior of the door 104 is translucent, and a decorative lamp 111 is provided inside the transparent part. The decorative lamp 111 is an LED that emits light in various colors according to the game status and presentation using a presentation control means, and plays a role in presentation by flashing, etc.

The game board 80 includes a first start opening 11, a second start opening 12, a large prize opening 20, a first operating opening 31, a second operating opening 32, a general prize opening 33, an exit opening 34, a performance display device 60, and a center ornament 64 on a play area 81 partitioned by rails 82. The center ornament 64 is a decorative resin member installed in the approximate center of the play area 81 and extending to the upper and right portions thereof to form the screen frame of the performance display device 60, and serves functions such as providing a flow path for game balls, protecting the performance display device 60, and providing decoration. A stage 65 is formed below the center ornament 64 on which game balls roll. Depending on the way the game balls roll, the direction of their fall from the stage 65 is divided into two directions: one that will enter the first start opening 11 and one that will not enter the first start opening 11. A movable device 66 is installed above the center ornament 64 and is driven in accordance with the performance content to perform a performance-related action. In the game area 81, multiple game pins, windmills, and other mechanisms (not shown) are installed to form a flow path for game balls. Note that in this specification, "ball entry," "winning," and "falling into the game" may be synonymous with each other. Furthermore, each winning opening and each ball entry opening may be configured as a "passing opening" (also called a "gate" or "through chucker") through which game balls pass, and "ball entry," "winning," "falling into the game," and "passing through" may also be synonymous with each other.

The first starting hole 11 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the first game, and the second starting hole 12 is provided as a starting winning hole corresponding to the second game. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 are configured so that the player can aim for the ball to land in either hole by varying the strength of the shot of the game ball according to their intention. The first starting hole 11 is located approximately in the lower center of the game area 81, and the second starting hole 12 is located directly below the first starting hole 11. The placement of the game nails forms a flow path so that a left-handed hit, i.e., a relatively weak hit aimed at flowing into the left passage of the center ornament 64, will result in the ball being possible or easy to land in the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12, while a right-handed hit, i.e., a relatively strong hit aimed at flowing into the right passage of the center ornament 64, will result in the ball being possible or easy to land in the second starting hole 12, but will be impossible or difficult to land in the first starting hole 11. However, under normal circumstances, the upper part of the opening of second starting hole 12 is covered by first starting hole 11, preventing the inflow of game balls, and therefore it is impossible or difficult for a ball to enter second starting hole 12 unless the expansion mechanism of second starting hole 12 is opened. The win/loss lottery is a lottery that determines whether or not to transition to special play, which is more advantageous to the player than normal play, and is held every time a ball enters first starting hole 11 or second starting hole 12.

The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far enough apart to allow the ball to be aimed at either hole depending on the strength of the shot. The first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12 may be located far apart on the left and right sides of the game area 81, respectively, so that a ball aimed at one hole will have difficulty scoring in the other. For example, the first starting hole 11 is located in a position that allows or makes it easy to score when hit from the left, i.e., when fired relatively weakly with the aim of flowing into the left passage of the center ornament 64. The second starting hole 12 is located in a position that allows or makes it easy to score when hit from the right, i.e., when fired relatively strongly with the aim of flowing into the right passage of the center ornament 64.

The first starting opening 11 is equipped with a first starting winning detection device 16. The first starting winning detection device 16 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 11, and generates first starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters. The second starting opening 12 is equipped with a second starting winning detection device 17, a normal electric device 90 (a so-called electric tulip) that serves as an opening mechanism, and a normal electric device solenoid 91 for opening and closing the normal electric device 90. The second starting winning detection device 17 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 12, and generates second starting winning information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters.

The first actuation opening 31 is located on the left side of the play area 81 and includes a first passage detection device 36. The first passage detection device 36 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball through the first actuation opening 31 and generates passage information indicating the passage upon passage. The second actuation opening 32 is located on the right side of the play area 81 and includes a second passage detection device 37. The second passage detection device 37 is a sensor that detects the passage of a game ball through the second actuation opening 32 and generates passage information indicating the passage upon passage. The passage of a game ball through the first actuation opening 31 or the second actuation opening 32 triggers an opening lottery that determines whether the normal electric device 90 will be opened. When a game ball passes through the first actuation opening 31 or the second actuation opening 32, a normal symbol, which indicates the result of the opening lottery, is displayed variably on the normal symbol display unit 45. Therefore, the opening lottery is also called the "normal symbol lottery." After a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the display of the normal symbols stops. When the normal symbols stop at a winning symbol, the normal electric symbol 90 is expanded by the driving force of the normal electric symbol solenoid 91, increasing the possibility of the ball entering the second starting hole 12. As an alternative, there may be only one operating hole, which is located on the left side of the playing area 81.

Each of the three general winning openings 33 is equipped with a general winning detection device 38 for detecting the entry of a gaming ball. The general winning detection device 38 is a sensor that detects the entry of a gaming ball into the general winning opening 33, and generates general winning information indicating the entry of the ball when it enters.

The large prize opening 20 is equipped with a large prize detection device 25 for detecting the entry of a game ball and a large prize opening solenoid 92 for opening and closing the large prize opening 20. The large prize detection device 25 is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 20 and generates large prize opening entry information indicating the entry of the ball when the ball enters the large prize opening 20. The large prize opening 20 is a horizontally rectangular opening that opens when the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52 stops in a predetermined manner, indicating a "jackpot." The large prize opening 20 is located above and to the right of the outlet opening 34. Alternatively, another large prize opening may be located in the lower center of the play area 81 or above or below the large prize opening 20, resulting in multiple large prize openings. The outlet opening 34 is an outlet through which game balls that did not enter any of the other openings are discharged, and is equipped with an outlet detection device 39. The out detection device 39 is a sensor that detects game balls that pass through the outlet 34 and are discharged, and generates discharge information indicating the detection upon detection. The outlet 34 is located at the bottom center of the game area 81 so that all game balls that do not enter any of the winning ports can be guided through it. Multiple out detection devices 39 may be installed side by side, ensuring a game ball passage of sufficient width to prevent balls from clogging the outlet 34.

A symbol display unit 120 is arranged below and outside the play area 81 on the playboard 80. The symbol display unit 120 is provided with various display units, including a first special symbol display unit 41, a second special symbol display unit 42, a first special symbol reserve display unit 71, a second special symbol reserve display unit 72, a normal symbol display unit 45, a normal symbol reserve display unit 75, a play status display unit 76, and an abnormality notification unit 77. Specifically, the first special symbol display unit 41 corresponding to the first game and the second special symbol display unit 42 corresponding to the second game are arranged side by side at the lower left position, and the fluctuations of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed.

The first special symbol 51 corresponds to the result of the first lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 11, and when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern, a jackpot is generated as a special game. The second special symbol 52 corresponds to the result of the second lottery triggered by the entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 12, and when it stops in a predetermined winning pattern, a jackpot is generated as a special game. The first special symbol display unit 41 and the second special symbol display unit 42 are 8-segment LED display devices consisting of eight segments, for example, seven segments forming a "figure eight" and one segment representing a "dot." An 8-segment LED can represent an 8-bit numerical value by combining eight segments. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52, represented by a combination of segments, do not necessarily take the form of letters or numbers; they may be symbols formed by the combination of each segment that do not generally have any meaning. These symbols are displayed in rapid succession on first special symbol display section 41 and second special symbol display section 42, or a predetermined display (for example, "-") and non-display (for example, all lights off) are repeated for a predetermined period of time, followed by the display of a symbol corresponding to the judgment result, thereby realizing the variable display of first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 52. Note that first special symbol display section 41 and second special symbol display section 42 may use an LED dot array other than an 8-segment LED, and multiple types of first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 52 may be displayed by combining their lighting patterns and lighting colors.

Furthermore, since the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 do not necessarily have to play a dramatic role, in this embodiment they are displayed in an inconspicuous size in the first special symbol display section 41 and the second special symbol display section 42 at the bottom left of the play area 81. However, if a method is adopted in which the special symbol itself plays a dramatic role and is expressed without using decorative symbols, the special symbol may be displayed on another display device, such as an LCD display, rather than an 8-segment LED.

Above the first special symbol display section 41, there is provided a first special symbol pending display section 71 as a pending lamp for the special symbol variation corresponding to the first game, and above the second special symbol display section 42, there is provided a second special symbol pending display section 72 as a pending lamp for the special symbol variation corresponding to the second game. The first special symbol pending display section 71 consists of two lamps, the number of which is lit or flashing, indicating the number of pending win/lose lottery values for the first game (hereinafter, the number of pending win/lose lottery values will also be referred to simply as the "pending number"). The pending number in the first special symbol pending display section 71 is the number of times (number) a lottery value has been obtained based on winning the first starting hole 11 during the variation of the first special symbol 51 or the execution of the special game, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the pattern variation has not yet been performed. The second special symbol pending display section 72 also consists of two lamps, the number of which is lit or flashing, indicating the number of pending wins for the second game. The number of reserved balls in the second special symbol reserved display section 72 is the number of times (number) that a lottery value has been obtained based on winning balls entering the second starting hole 12 while the second special symbol 52 is changing or while a special game is being played, and indicates the number of winning balls for which the symbol change has not yet been performed. The number of reserved winning/losing lottery values is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the performance display device 60 as the number of lit reserved lamp images.

On the right side of the symbol display unit 120 is provided the normal symbol display section 45. For convenience, the normal symbol display section 45 is composed of two lamps, and the display state of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of their lighting. First, the first lamp and the second lamp are simultaneously flashed to express the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and finally, the stopping symbol of the normal symbol is expressed by the combination of the lighting states of the first lamp and the second lamp. For example, a missing stopping symbol is expressed by the first lamp being lit and the second lamp being extinguished, a first winning pattern is expressed by the first lamp being extinguished and the second lamp being lit, and a second winning pattern is expressed by both the first lamp and the second lamp being lit.

Also, to the right of the normal symbol display section 45, there is a normal symbol pending display section 75 which serves as a pending lamp for normal symbol changes. The normal symbol pending display section 75 also consists of two lamps, and the number of lit or flashing lamps indicates the number of pending normal symbol changes. The number of pending normal symbol changes is the number of game balls that have passed through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32 during the normal symbol change, and indicates the number of normal symbol lotteries for which the normal symbol change has not yet been executed.

The symbol display unit 120 is equipped with a game status display unit 76 and an abnormality notification unit 77. The game status display unit 76 is a display unit that displays game statuses such as specific game statuses, which will be described later, and is composed of, for example, one lamp and one 7-segment LED. For example, the lamp lights up when the probability is changing, flashes when a ball is likely to be scored, and is off when the status is normal, thereby notifying each game status. When a special game is being played, the 7-segment LED displays the number of unit games (number of rounds) to be played in that special game. The abnormality notification unit 77 is a display unit that notifies abnormalities in the gaming machine, and is composed of, for example, multiple lamps that notify abnormalities using lighting patterns corresponding to the type of abnormality. These display units may not be centrally located on the symbol display unit 120, but may be configured as individual units, or may be configured as multiple display devices grouped together as appropriate. Notification of game statuses such as specific game statuses may also be configured to be limited to a predetermined period of time, such as a certain period of time after power is restored from a power outage.

A display device 60 is provided in approximately the center of the play area 81 so that the screen is exposed from the screen frame formed by the center ornament 64, and displays changes in the display image, including decorative patterns 61 linked to the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. Hereinafter, such displays will be referred to as "pattern changes" or "change displays," etc.

The effect display device 60 is a display device consisting of a liquid crystal display that displays a varying decorative pattern 61 in conjunction with the varying display of the first special pattern 51 or the second special pattern 52. The decorative pattern 61 is a pattern that visually displays the lottery result indicated by the first special pattern 51 and the second special pattern 52. The effect display device 60 displays, in the central area of the screen, a moving image that changes multiple rows of patterns, for example, imitating a slot machine game, as the decorative pattern 61. In this embodiment, three rows of patterns consisting of the numbers "0" through "9" are displayed and changed, and a win or loss is indicated by the combination of three patterns that finally stops and is displayed. Each of the multiple patterns that make up the decorative pattern 61 is composed of numbers, letters, or symbols decorated with colors and patterns. However, these numbers, letters, and symbols may be integrated by adding a pattern common to all patterns or a different pattern for each pattern. This image is a pattern depicting a motif related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100, and may be a pattern depicting a human or animal character, for example. The decorative pattern 61 may be configured to switch between a pattern that includes the image as a whole and a pattern that is separated and only the numbers, letters, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner as the presentation unfolds. In the background of the decorative pattern 61's variable display, a moving image with a presentation effect related to the decoration or presentation theme set for that model of pachinko gaming machine 100 is displayed in conjunction with the pattern variation.

The effect display device 60 is composed of a high-definition liquid crystal display, a dot-matrix display device. The width of the display area may be approximately half the width of the game area, or it may be larger, exceeding half the width. In the case of a large size, the game ball passage on the right side of the effect display device is formed with a passage width sufficient for one game ball to pass through. If the player hits the ball with maximum strength as a so-called "right-handed hit," the game ball will almost certainly pass through the right-hand passage, allowing for the player to distinguish between a so-called "left-handed hit" and a so-called "right-handed hit." The effect display device 60 may not only be composed of a single display device, but may also be composed of a combination of multiple display devices. In the case of multiple display devices, displays of different sizes, such as a main LCD and a sub-LCD, may be combined. The sub-LCD may be located adjacent to the main LCD or may be installed in a location other than the game board, such as near the launch handle (upper ball tray, right-side decorative lamp, etc.). If installed near the launch handle, it may be configured as a touch panel that allows the player to input operations. The performance display device 60 is not limited to a liquid crystal display, and may be configured as a display device such as an organic EL display, or may be configured as a mechanical display means such as a rotating drum type or an LED matrix type display means.

The effect button 109 is an operation input device that the player presses to input specific instructions to the gaming machine depending on the effect content, and changes are made to the effect content depending on how the button is pressed. The effect button 109 is located on the front frame 102. The effect button 109 is normally stored within the front frame 102, but a rod-shaped member is attached to the back of the effect button 109 so that the rod-shaped member and effect button 109 can protrude in a direction approximately perpendicular to the board surface. When protruding, the rod-shaped member and effect button 109 function as an effect lever 112, allowing the player to grasp the effect button 109 and pull the effect lever 112 downward. This also allows the player to input specific instructions to the gaming machine. The cross key 110 is an operation input device that the player uses to input directional instructions to the gaming machine, and is located on the outer wall surface to the left of the upper ball tray 105.

The following is an overview of the game method and control flow used in a gaming machine configured as described above. When a player rotates the launch handle 107 by hand, game balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 are guided one by one along the rail 82 and launched into the play area 81 with a force corresponding to the rotation angle. When the player fixes the rotation position of the launch handle 107 by hand, game balls are repeatedly launched at regular time intervals. Game balls launched toward the top of the play area 81 hit multiple game pegs, windmills, center decorations 64, etc., and fall in a direction corresponding to the impact. When a game ball falls into one of the general prize slots 33, first start slot 11, second start slot 12, or large prize slot 20, prize balls corresponding to the type of prize slot are paid out to the upper ball tray 105 or lower ball tray 106. Gaming balls that fall into each winning port, such as general winning port 33, are treated as safe balls, and gaming balls that fall into outlet port 34 are treated as out balls. The specifications may be such that discharged safe balls are not subject to detection by out detection device 39, or safe balls may also be guided to an area where out detection device 39 is installed and all discharged safe balls are detected by out detection device 39. Alternatively, the specifications may be such that safe balls are not guided and safe balls are not detected by out detection device 39, and the number of detected safe balls is added to the number of detected out balls to determine the total number of discharged balls.

When a gaming ball passes through the first operating port 31 or the second operating port 32, a normal symbol is displayed in the normal symbol display section 45 in a variable manner and then displayed in a static manner after a variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. When a normal symbol is displayed in a static manner in the first winning mode or the second winning mode, the normal electric device 90 is expanded based on the winning mode of the displayed symbol and the game state at the time of the static display. That is, if the game state when the symbol is stopped is the normal game state and the normal symbol is displayed in the first winning mode, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed to open the normal electric device 90. Furthermore, when a normal symbol is displayed in the first winning mode during a specific game state (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), and when the normal symbol is displayed in the second winning mode during normal and specific game states (e.g., a state where it is easy to score a ball), a long opening of 6 seconds is executed to open the normal electric device 90. Here, the winning probability of the normal symbol and the execution probability of the long release are set to differ depending on the gaming state. Specifically, in the release lottery in the normal state, the normal symbol wins with a probability of 1/100, and in that case the execution probability of the short release (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the first winning mode) is set to 1/3, and the execution probability of the long release (the probability of selecting the winning symbol of the second winning mode) is set to 2/3. Also, in the release lottery in a specific gaming state (for example, a state where it is easy to score), the normal symbol wins with a probability of 99/100, and although the selection probability of the first winning mode and the second winning mode is the same as in the normal gaming state, the long release is set to be executed regardless of the mode in which it is won. In this way, in the easy-to-score state, the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole 12 is increased by the function of varying the winning probability of the normal symbol (probability varies from 1/100 to 99/100) and the function of extending the opening time (extending the opening time when the first winning pattern is displayed stopped from 0.1 seconds to 6.0 seconds). Note that the function of extending the operating period of the normal electric device 90 (long opening) is sometimes called "opening extension."

As mentioned above, by configuring the system so that the probability of a long release is higher than the probability of a short release in the normal state, long release is performed at a certain rate even in the normal state when a normal symbol is selected. Alternatively, the system may be configured so that the probability of a short release is higher than the probability of a long release in the normal state, or so that the probabilities for both are the same, or so that a short release is always performed. Furthermore, when the ball is in the easy-to-score state, a configuration may be used to further increase the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole 12 by using three additional functions, including a function to shorten the normal symbol fluctuation time. In this case, the normal symbol fluctuation time is, for example, 10 seconds in the normal state and 2 seconds in the easy-to-score state. The winning probability of the opening lottery in the normal state may be set to zero (0/100), and the normal electric device 90 may be expanded only when the opening lottery is performed in the easy-to-score state. Furthermore, when the normal electric device 90 expands, this fact may be notified in advance, or a pending normal symbol change may be predicted and a notification may be given before the normal symbol changes begin, or a notification may be given while the normal symbol is changing.

As a variation of the opening mode when the normal electric device 90 of the second starting hole 12 is opened for a long time, a two-second opening, longer than the short opening, may be repeated three times to extend the total opening time to approximately six seconds. Alternatively, multiple combinations of opening time and number of openings may be prepared, and one of them may be selected. For example, three two-second openings will result in the same total opening time as one six-second opening, but the former is longer than the latter when the interval period is included. Therefore, particularly in a variation in which the second starting hole 12 is positioned in the right-hand hitting direction, it can be said that the former offers a longer chance of scoring if a player notices the opening and then aims the ball toward the second starting hole 12 from that point on. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which there are multiple winning types for normal symbols, and the opening mode of the expansion mechanism may be varied depending on the winning type. For example, if a normal symbol results in the first win, the reel will open once for 0.1 seconds in the normal state, and three times for 1 second in the easy-to-score state; if a second win results in the second win, the reel will open once for 6 seconds in the normal state, and two times for 2 seconds in the easy-to-score state.

On the other hand, when a ball lands in the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 are displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display unit 41, the second special symbol display unit 42, and the effect display device 60. The display of the first special symbol 51, the second special symbol 52, and the decorative symbol 61 is stopped after the variable display time determined prior to display has elapsed. The first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to a variable pattern, which determines the manner in which they change from start to stop. The decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable effect pattern, which determines the manner in which they change from start to stop. Multiple variable patterns and variable effect patterns are provided, each with a variable or short change time. While the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in a variable manner according to the variable pattern, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed in a variable manner according to a variable effect pattern having the same change time. Each variation pattern has a set variation display time as the end condition for the pattern variation, and when that variation display time has elapsed, the variation of the first special pattern 51, second special pattern 52, and decorative pattern 61 will stop. Below, we will show examples of the variation display of the decorative pattern 61 displayed according to the variation presentation pattern, and briefly explain the variation presentation pattern. Details of the variation pattern and how the variation presentation pattern is determined will be explained separately.

As an example of the display of decorative pattern 61 changes, all three rows of patterns change as the change begins, like the reels of a slot machine spinning, and as the change approaches its end, the rows are stopped one by one to display the final pattern combination. Note that the action taken when decorative pattern 190 stops changing may be controlled to stop multiple rows simultaneously rather than one by one, drawing attention to performance displays other than the decorative patterns during the change display, or the pattern changes may be displayed in a shorter change time. Furthermore, the action taken when decorative pattern 190 starts changing may be controlled to delay the start of change in some rows depending on the subsequent development of the change (such as the type of performance pattern) to create a sense of anticipation.

Next, we will briefly explain the variable presentation patterns. Variable presentation patterns include normal miss presentation patterns, reach miss presentation patterns, and reach jackpot presentation patterns. Normal miss presentation patterns are presentation patterns when a normal miss symbol combination is displayed. Reach miss presentation patterns are presentation patterns when a miss symbol combination is displayed after passing through a reach state, where one more symbol is needed to achieve a jackpot. Reach jackpot presentation patterns are presentation patterns when a jackpot symbol combination is displayed after passing through a reach state. In particular, patterns when passing through a reach state include patterns with various lengths of fluctuation time, with reach patterns with relatively short fluctuation times being called "normal reach" and reach patterns with long fluctuation times being called "super reach." Normal miss presentation patterns, reach miss presentation patterns, and reach jackpot presentation patterns each include normal patterns displayed in normal states and time-saving patterns displayed in time-saving states. However, even in the normal state, if there is a second pattern variation corresponding to a ball entering the second starting hole 12, the probability of a jackpot involving a probability variation or the probability of a large number of unit plays in a special game can be considered a higher chance state than the first variation corresponding to a ball entering the first starting hole 11, so a chance presentation pattern can be used to indicate a relatively favorable chance of a jackpot occurring. Note that in the embodiment, a time-saving pattern is used in the time-saving state, but since the time-saving pattern is also used in the probability variation state, a time-saving pattern is also used in the probability variation state. However, in a modified example, a specification may be used in which a probability variation pattern different from the time-saving pattern is used in the probability variation state. Alternatively, a specification may be used in which a common pattern is used for both the time-saving and probability variation states, or a specification may be used in which a time-saving pattern is not specifically used and a probability variation pattern is used in the probability variation state.

When the number of reserved symbols for the win/lose lottery reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), the pattern change time in the event of a loss is shortened from normal to improve gaming efficiency (hereinafter referred to as "shortened change"). Similarly, when the number of reserved symbols for the win/lose lottery reaches four, the pattern change time in the event of a loss is shortened even further than when there are three symbols (hereinafter referred to as "ultra-shortened change") to further improve gaming efficiency. After the above-mentioned pattern change, if the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 stop in a pattern indicating a jackpot, the game will transition to special play, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than normal play, and the opening and closing operation of the big prize opening 20 will begin. The stopping pattern of the decorative symbol 61 indicating a jackpot is, for example, a combination of three matching symbols.

There are two types of special games: regular special games and shortened special games, and the profits from winning balls vary greatly between them. Regular special games begin with the display of a special screen called the "start demo time." After the "start demo time" screen appears, the large prize opening 20 opens and closes after remaining open for approximately 30 seconds or after nine or more game balls have fallen into it. This period from opening to closing the large prize opening 20 is basically called a unit game, but it may open for multiple short periods during a single unit game. After the opening and closing of the large prize opening 20 or the unit game is repeated a predetermined number of times, for example, four or ten times, the regular special game ends with the display of a special screen called the "end demo time." In regular special games, nine or more balls can be expected to enter each unit game, and ten unit games can result in sufficient prize balls (also called "out balls"), resulting in significant profits. A special game in which 10 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "10R jackpot" as appropriate, and a special game in which 4 unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "4R jackpot" as appropriate. Note that although unit games are repeated 10 times, by opening the large prize slot 20 for a shorter time than usual (for example, 1.6 seconds) in some unit games, it is possible to achieve a normal special game (sometimes referred to as an "effective nR jackpot") that is essentially the same as a small number of unit games being repeated.

On the other hand, in a shortened special game, the start and end demo times are short or almost nonexistent (e.g., 0.1 seconds), and the large prize opening 20 is opened for only 1.6 seconds in one unit game. This unit game is repeated twice to end the shortened special game. In a shortened special game, the large prize opening 20 is only opened twice for a very short time, so very few balls enter the large prize opening 20, and the actual payout is almost zero or a small number (for example, the payout number corresponding to the number of balls that enter, such as a few to several dozen balls, up to 1-2 balls per round). A special game in which two unit games are repeated is also referred to as a "2R jackpot" as appropriate. Note that while the number of unit games is the same as in a regular special game, a shortened special game can also be realized by opening the large prize opening 20 for a shorter time than usual in all unit games.

Furthermore, after the above-mentioned pattern changes, if the first special pattern 51 or second special pattern 52 and decorative pattern 61 at the time of stopping are in a predetermined small win mode, the game will transition to a small win game consisting of one unit game, and the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 will be executed. In one unit game that constitutes a small win game, the large prize opening 20 will be opened for only approximately 1.6 seconds, and the appearance will be an operation mode similar to that of a 2R big win.

When a special game occurs and the winning stop symbol at that time is a specific pattern (for example, "777"), a special game called a "probability change" will begin after the special game ends. During the probability change, a win/loss lottery is held with a higher probability of winning than in the normal probability state, and a new special game may occur relatively quickly. Note that the result of the win/loss lottery is a specific jackpot, i.e., a jackpot with a probability change, may not be clearly indicated externally, and a latent probability change state may be set in which no explicit notification is given through decorative symbols or presentation content. In this case, even during the probability change, the presentation display device 60 does not clearly indicate whether the game is in a probability change or not. Note that the presentation display device 60 may clearly indicate whether the game is in a probability change or not when predetermined conditions are met.

After the special game ends, an easy-to-enter state, one of the specific game states, begins during normal play. In the easy-to-enter state, the winning probability of the opening lottery is increased compared to normal, and the opening time of the normal electric device 90 is extended to make it longer. Not only can the number of normal symbol wins per certain period of time increase, but the ease of balls entering the second starting hole 12 also increases, so there is a high possibility that the number of balls entering the second starting hole 12 will increase. Therefore, as the opportunity to win prize balls by having balls enter the second starting hole 12 increases, it becomes possible to continue playing with almost no balls lost, or even while gradually increasing the number of balls in your possession.

In the easy-to-score state, a specific game state is implemented in which the time it takes for the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 to fluctuate is shortened compared to the normal state, a so-called time-saving feature. The fluctuating time for the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is returned to its original fluctuating time after a predetermined number of fluctuating times, for example 100, but if a jackpot occurs before that number of fluctuating times is reached, the time-saving feature will end. Because the fluctuating time for the first special symbol 51, second special symbol 52, and decorative symbol 61 is shortened during the time-saving feature, the time until a jackpot occurs can be shortened compared to the normal state in which the symbols fluctuate at the normal fluctuating time, thereby relatively increasing the ease of winning a jackpot. In a variant, the time-saving feature for the special symbols may not be implemented during the easy-to-score state.

Figure 2 shows the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine. The power switch 150 is a switch that turns the power of the pachinko gaming machine 100 on and off. The main board 200 controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine 100, and in particular processes all game operations, such as the lottery when a ball wins the first starting slot 11 or the second starting slot 12. The sub-board 300 is equipped with an LCD unit 151 and controls the display content on the performance display device 60, and in particular changes the performance display content in response to the judgment results of the main board 200. The back set mechanism 152 includes a prize ball tank 153, a prize ball flow path, and a payout device 154 that pays out prize balls. The payout device 154 pays out game balls supplied from the prize ball tank 153 to the upper ball tray 105 in response to a win at each winning slot. The payout control board 155 controls the payout operation by the payout device 154. The launching device 156 launches the balls stored in the upper ball tray 105 one by one into the play area 81. The launching control board 157 controls the launching operation of the launching device 156. The power supply board 158 supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 100. A performance display unit 159 is provided on the main board 200. The performance display unit 159 is composed of four 7-segment LEDs that display, for example, a four-digit number, the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of launched balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls.

A setting change device 170 is provided on the main board 200. The setting change device 170 is a device for changing the setting to one of multiple settings (also referred to as game settings) corresponding to multiple game specifications. For example, six game settings (Setting 1 to Setting 6) are provided, and the probability of winning a jackpot can be varied depending on the game setting. Specifically, the higher the numerical value among Settings 1 to 6, the more advantageous the game specification becomes for the player. If the jackpot probabilities for Settings 1 to 6 are M1 to M6, respectively, the jackpot probabilities for each setting can be set so that M1≦M2≦M3≦M4≦M5≦M6. It is not necessary to assign different jackpot probabilities to different game settings; the jackpot probabilities may be the same across different game settings. For example, the same jackpot probability may be assigned to all game settings from Setting 1 to Setting 6.

The setting change device 170 includes a setting key cylinder 171 into which a setting key held by an employee of the gaming establishment is inserted, a setting change button 172 for changing the setting to one of multiple game settings, a setting display unit 173 that lights up and displays the set setting value, and a setting memory that stores the set setting value. The setting key cylinder 171 is a turnkey switch that transitions to a state in which the setting can be changed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting change state") or a state in which the setting can be confirmed (hereinafter referred to as the "setting confirmation state"). First, turn the power switch 150 off, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder 171, turn it to the on state, and then turn the power switch 150 on to transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state. To transition to the setting change state, turn on the power switch 150 while pressing the RAM clear switch (sometimes referred to as the "RWM clear switch"). On the other hand, to transition to the setting confirmation state, turn on the power switch 150 without pressing the RAM clear switch.

When the setting change state is entered, the setting display unit 173 displays the number "1," indicating setting 1, as the initial game setting. The setting can be changed by pressing the setting change button 172. The setting display unit 173 is composed of a 7-segment LED that displays single-digit numbers. Each time the setting change button 172 is pressed, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 changes sequentially: 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ... After changing the setting, if the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned off, the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is stored in the setting memory, the setting change is confirmed, and the game becomes playable. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173. In the setting confirmation state, pressing the setting change button 172 does not change the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173, and the setting cannot be changed. Subsequently, if the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned off, the game becomes playable. Furthermore, when the setting key is turned off to enable play, the setting display unit 173 turns off, making the current setting value invisible.

The setting change button 172 may also double as a RAM clear switch. In this case, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is not turned (setting key off state), a RAM clear is executed. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed while the setting key is turned (setting key on state), a RAM clear is executed and the system transitions to the setting change state. Also, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is off, the system restores power without clearing the RAM. On the other hand, if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch not pressed while the setting key is on, the system transitions to the setting confirmation state. The setting display unit 173 may also double as the performance display unit 159. In this case, the dual-purpose display unit may function as the performance display unit 159 when in a playable state, and as the setting display unit 173 when in a setting change state or setting confirmation state. Alternatively, the setting change device 170 may not be provided, making it impossible to change game settings.

<Function block>
3 shows the functional blocks of the pachinko gaming machine 100. Below, we will explain the functions realized using each component, but in this specification, in order to align the physical component with the functional component, for example, the main board 200, payout control board 155, launch control board 157, etc., the terms already explained as physical components may be used as is for convenience.

The pachinko gaming machine 100 is configured with functions divided among a power supply board 158 that generates power used within the gaming machine based on an AC power source (such as AC 24V) supplied from outside the gaming machine, a main board 200 that serves as the main control device that controls the basic game operations and progress of the game, a payout control board 155 that serves as a frame control device that controls the payout of prize balls, a launch control board 157 that controls the launch of game balls into the game area, and a sub-board 300 that serves as a sub-control device that controls the performance operations and processing.

The main board 200 is electrically connected to the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large prize port 20, the first operating port 31, the second operating port 32, the group of general prize ports (first general prize port 33a, second general prize port 33b), the outlet port 34, the symbol display unit 120, and the external information output terminal 160, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them. The payout control board 155 is electrically connected to the main board 200, the launch control board 157, and the payout device 154. The payout control board 155 indirectly controls the launch control board 157 by sending a launch permission signal to the launch control board 157 based on signals indicating prize ball payout and the control status of the main board 200 transmitted from the main board 200, and also controls the payout of prize balls by the payout device 154. The payout device 154 includes a payout motor 166 and a ball counting sensor 167. The launch control board 157 is electrically connected to the payout control board 155, the launch device 156, and the ball delivery device 164, and controls the ball delivery device 164 and the launch device 156 to launch game balls based on a launch permission signal sent from the payout control board 155. The sub-board 300 is electrically connected to the effect display device 60, movable role-playing device 66 (drive motor 67, position detection sensor 68), speaker 108, effect input operation device 115 (effect button 109, cross key 110), and decorative lamp 111, and transmits and receives various control signals to and from each of them.

Data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300 is unidirectional, from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300, and the components required to achieve overall operation through unidirectional data transmission are located on the main board 200 and the sub-board 300. Because unidirectional data transmission from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is maintained, data cannot be transmitted from the components included in the sub-board 300 to the components included in the main board 200, and data transmission cannot be requested. Therefore, the sub-board 300 cannot access information generated by the main board 200 unless that information is transmitted. Data is also transmitted bidirectionally between the main board 200 and the dispensing control board 155, and between the dispensing control board 155 and the launching control board 157. However, as with the data transmission between the main board 200 and the sub-board 300, data transmission may be unidirectional from the main board 200 to the dispensing control board 155, or from the dispensing control board 155 to the launching control board 157.

The functional blocks included in the main board 200, dispensing control board 155, launch control board 157, and sub-board 300 described below are merely examples, and as a modified example, some of the functional blocks may be mounted on other boards. For example, the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the sub-board 300, or the functional blocks included in the launch control board 157 may be configured to be mounted on the dispensing control board 155. Also, for example, some of the functional blocks included in the main board 200 may be configured to be mounted on the main board 200, and the remaining parts may be mounted on the dispensing control board 155, and some of the functional blocks may be divided and provided on multiple boards, with a single functional block being formed as a whole.

<Main board 200>
4 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the main board 200. The main board 200 includes a ball entry determination means 201, a performance display unit 159, a random number generation means 202, a first lottery means 211, a second lottery means 212, a preliminary determination means 235, a normal game lottery means 213, a hold control means 240, a main display control means 250, a special game control means 260, a small win game control means 265, a specific game control means 270, an opening/closing control means 275, a special game adjustment means 276, a main initial processing execution means 280, a main power cut processing execution means 282, a main error detection means 284, a setting change means 286, a setting confirmation means 287, and a command communication means 205.

<Ball entry determination means 201>
The ball entry determination means 201 determines whether a gaming ball has entered each winning port. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives first start winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the first start winning port 11, and when it receives second start winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the second start winning port 12. When the ball entry determination means 201 receives special prize winning port information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the special prize winning port 20, and when it receives general prize winning information, it determines that the gaming ball has entered the general prize winning port 33. When it receives passing information, it determines that the gaming ball has passed through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32. When it receives discharge information, it determines that the gaming ball has passed through the outlet port 34. The ball entry determination means 201 calculates the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the total number of fired balls, which is the sum of safe balls and out balls, and displays this on the performance display unit 159. The ball entry determination means 201 displays the value of "number of paid out balls" ÷ "number of out balls" × 100 on the performance display unit 159 when the probability of a jackpot is in a normal probability state and normal ball entry state (a so-called low-low state where the probability is low and balls are entered low). Therefore, the performance display unit 159 displays the base in a low base state.

<Random number generation means 202>
The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers to be used for various determinations in the first lottery means 211, the second lottery means 212, and the regular lottery means 213. Specifically, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "65535" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also referred to as "win/lose lottery values") to be used in the win/lose lottery by the first win/lose determination means 221 and the second win/lose determination means 222. In addition, the random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also referred to as "pattern determination lottery values") to be used in pattern determination (pattern lottery) by the first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227. The random number generation means 202 generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "255" by a predetermined means as random numbers (also referred to as "variation pattern determination lottery values") used in determining the variation patterns by the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232. The random number generation means 202 also generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "99" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in the winning/losing lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213. The random number generation means 202 also generates random numbers in the range of "0" to "2" by a predetermined means as random numbers used in determining the normal symbol. The "random numbers" referred to here may be physical random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit or true random numbers in the mathematical sense, as well as pseudo-random numbers such as random numbers using a 16-bit counter or software random numbers using a random number generation algorithm. Alternatively, they may be random numbers generated by a combination of hardware random numbers and software random numbers. Furthermore, the random numbers obtained by the first lottery means 211 and the second lottery means 212 may be generated by the same generating means, or may be generated by different generating means.

<General drawing lottery means 213>
When a gaming ball passes through the first actuation port 31 or the second actuation port 32, the normal symbol lottery means 213 acquires from the random number generation means 202 a random number used to determine whether a normal symbol will win or lose and a random number used to determine the normal symbol's stopping pattern, and executes a lottery. The normal symbol lottery means 213 holds a normal symbol win/loss determination table (not shown) that is referenced to determine whether a normal symbol will win or lose, and a normal symbol determination table that is referenced to determine the normal symbol's stopping pattern to be displayed on the normal symbol display unit 45. The normal symbol win/loss determination table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for the win/loss lottery and a win, and the normal symbol determination table defines the correspondence between the lottery value for determining the stopping pattern and the normal symbol, and the win/loss of the normal symbol and the stopping pattern are determined based on the above-mentioned win probability and symbol selection probability. When the lottery value for the normal symbol lottery corresponds to a win, the normal symbol lottery means 213 refers to the normal symbol determination table to determine the stop symbol for the normal symbol. When the lottery value for the normal symbol lottery corresponds to a miss, the normal symbol lottery means 213 always determines the type of the miss symbol (1). When the result of the normal symbol win/loss determination corresponds to a win and the normal symbol stops in a predetermined pattern (first win type or second win type), the opening/closing control means 275 (described later) expands the normal electric device 90 in the second start opening 12 according to the type of the stopped symbol and the game status. The expansion time is 0.1 seconds for short opening and 6 seconds for long opening. The lottery value for the normal symbol is temporarily reserved by the reservation control means 240 (described later). However, the lottery value is reserved only if it does not exceed the predetermined maximum number of reserved symbols reserved by the reservation control means 240.

<First lottery means 211 and second lottery means 212>
The first lottery means 211 includes a first lottery value acquisition means 216, a first win/loss determination means 221, a first symbol determination means 226, and a first variation pattern determination means 231 as a function of executing a first lottery for a first game, and executes a first win/loss lottery as a win/loss lottery corresponding to a ball entering the first starting hole 11. Based on various lottery results by the first lottery means 211, the main display control means 250 displays a variation of the first special symbol 51 in the first special symbol display section 41. Also, based on information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the display area of the effect display device 60 displays a variation of the decorative symbol 61. The second lottery means 212 includes a second lottery value acquisition means 217, a second win/loss determination means 222, a second symbol determination means 227, and a second variation pattern determination means 232, and executes a second win/loss lottery as a win/loss lottery corresponding to a ball entering the second starting hole 12. Based on the results of various lotteries by the second lottery means 212, the main display control means 250 causes the second special symbol 52 to be displayed variably in the second special symbol display section 42. Also, based on the information transmitted from the command communication means 205, the decorative symbol 61 is displayed variably in the display area of the effect display device 60.

<First lottery value acquisition means 216 and second lottery value acquisition means 217>
The first lottery value acquisition means 216 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the first lottery means 211, triggered by the ball entering the first starting hole 11. Specifically, a first win/loss lottery value for determining whether or not the first win/loss determination means 221 is used, a first pattern lottery value for determining the stop mode of the first special pattern 51 by the first pattern determination means 226 is used, and a first pattern lottery value for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special pattern 51 by the first variation pattern determination means 231 is acquired from the corresponding random number generation means. The second lottery value acquisition means 217 acquires, from the random number generation means 202, random numbers for various lotteries and decisions by the second lottery means 212, triggered by the ball entering the second starting hole 12. Specifically, the second win/loss lottery value for determining win/loss by the second win/loss determination means 222, the second pattern lottery value for determining the stopping mode of the second special pattern 52 by the second pattern determination means 227, and the second pattern lottery value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the second special pattern 52 by the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 are obtained from the corresponding random number generation means.

The first win/loss determination means 221 performs a win/loss determination based on the first win/loss lottery value to determine whether or not to transition to special play. The second win/loss determination means 222 performs a win/loss determination based on the second win/loss lottery value to determine whether or not to transition to special play. More specifically, the win/loss determination determines whether or not the result is a "big win," which indicates a transition to special play, a "small win," which indicates a transition to small win play, or a "miss," which indicates no transition to special play or small win play. The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 hold a win/loss determination table to be referenced in the win/loss determination. Note that the win/loss determination performed when starting the pattern variation is also referred to as the "win/loss determination as the main determination" as appropriate to distinguish it from the preliminary win/loss determination described below. In this specification, the terms "table" and "selection criteria" do not strictly refer to data in a table structure that defines the correspondence between a first parameter, such as a lottery value, and a second parameter, such as a value indicating an option, but also broadly include cases where such correspondence is realized using a program structure that derives the second parameter from the first parameter. These are all referred to as "selection criteria" as appropriate, as they are essentially synonymous with "table." Furthermore, when a table structure is used, one type of selection criteria may be composed of a combination of multiple structurally subdivided tables, but the term "multiple types of selection criteria" refers to the actual number of types of tables, not the number of subdivided tables.

The first win/loss determination means 221 and the second win/loss determination means 222 each hold a win/loss determination table corresponding to their respective win/loss determinations, which they reference in their win/loss determinations. Specifically, they hold a win/loss determination table for the win/loss determination by the first win/loss determination means 221 (also referred to as the "first win/loss determination table") and a win/loss determination table for the win/loss determination by the second win/loss determination means 222 (also referred to as the "second win/loss determination table"), and select the table to reference depending on the win/loss determination to be performed. The multiple win/loss determination tables correspond to the determination results of jackpot, minor win, and miss and the win/loss lottery value, and the win/loss probability is determined according to the corresponding jackpot range setting. In addition, multiple types of win/loss determination tables are prepared corresponding to multiple game settings. For example, for each of game settings 1 through 6, a win/loss determination table with a different correspondence between the win/loss lottery value and the win/loss determination result is prepared. Furthermore, if the probabilities of big wins, small wins, and misses are the same across multiple game settings, a win/loss determination table that is common to multiple game settings may be prepared.

Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of a hit/miss determination table. This figure shows a hit/miss determination table corresponding to a specific game setting, and a hit/miss determination table corresponding to setting 6. The hit/miss determination table in this figure corresponds the determination results of jackpot, minor hit, and miss with hit/miss lottery values, and the hit/miss probability of a jackpot or minor hit is determined according to each corresponding range setting. The first hit/miss determination means 221 and the second hit/miss determination means 222 refer to the hit/miss determination table in this figure when making their main hit/miss determination. In both the first hit/miss lottery performed by the first hit/miss determination means 221 and the second hit/miss lottery performed by the second hit/miss determination means 222, a jackpot is determined under normal circumstances only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299. During special probability mode, the range of jackpots is expanded, and a jackpot is determined not only when the hit/miss lottery value falls within the range of 0 to 299, but also when it falls within the range of 300 to 2999. In this way, the range that corresponds to a jackpot changes depending on the game state. Note that while this diagram shows the jackpot ranges for both normal and special modes using a single hit/miss determination table, separate hit/miss determination tables may be prepared for normal mode and special mode, or separate tables may be prepared for the first hit/miss lottery and the second hit/miss lottery.

In this embodiment, even if the hit/miss lottery value does not fall within the jackpot range, it will be considered a small hit if it falls within a specified range. In the example shown in this diagram, a small hit occurs when the hit/miss lottery value obtained by the first hit/miss determination means 221 falls within the range of 56,500 to 65,535, and a small hit occurs when the hit/miss lottery value obtained by the second hit/miss determination means 222 falls within the range of 64,000 to 65,535. In other words, the range of small hits is wider in the first hit/miss lottery than in the second hit/miss lottery, making small hits more likely to occur. In this way, all cases that do not result in a jackpot are essentially "misses," but in the example shown in this diagram, the hit/miss lottery value range for cases that do not result in a jackpot but also do not fall into a small hit category is specifically expressed as a "miss." In other words, when considering "hit/miss" in terms of "whether it is a jackpot or not," a "small hit" can be considered to be included in the broader sense of "miss," in the sense of "not a jackpot." Furthermore, when considering "hit or miss" in terms of "hit or miss," "small hits" can be considered to be included in the broader definition of "hit" along with "big hits." While this diagram shows an example in which the determination table for whether or not a big hit is occurring and the determination table for whether or not a small hit is occurring are realized in the form of a single hit or miss determination table, they may also be realized as separate tables. Furthermore, "small hits" may be provided in only one of the first game or the second game, or may not be provided in either game. In that case, a value corresponding to a small hit is not set in the corresponding hit or miss determination table.

Figure 6 shows a schematic diagram of the range setting of the hit/fail lottery value for each setting value. Figure (a) shows the correspondence between the first hit/fail lottery value obtained by the first hit/fail determination means 221 and the hit/fail determination result. Figure (b) shows the correspondence between the second hit/fail lottery value obtained by the second hit/fail determination means 222 and the hit/fail determination result. The range of the first hit/fail lottery value and second hit/fail lottery value that will result in a jackpot during normal play and during special mode is 0 to 294 for the setting value "1," 0 to 295 for the setting value "2," 0 to 296 for the setting value "3," 0 to 297 for the setting value "4," 0 to 298 for the setting value "5," and 0 to 299 for the setting value "6." Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of hit/fail lottery values that will result in a jackpot during normal play, increasing the probability of a jackpot during normal play. In addition, the range of the first hit/miss lottery value and the second hit/miss lottery value that result in a jackpot only during a special mode (i.e., a miss during normal mode) is 295 to 2949 for the setting value "1," 296 to 2959 for the setting value "2," 297 to 2969 for the setting value "3," 298 to 2979 for the setting value "4," 299 to 2989 for the setting value "5," and 300 to 2999 for the setting value "6." Therefore, the larger the setting value, the wider the range of hit/miss lottery values that result in a jackpot during a special mode, and the higher the probability of a jackpot during a special mode. Note that the range of hit/miss lottery values is determined so that the ratio between the normal jackpot probability that results in a jackpot during a special mode and the special mode jackpot probability that results in a jackpot during a special mode is constant regardless of the setting value. In this diagram, the range of the hit/fail lottery value is set so that the probability of a jackpot during a special mode is 10 times the normal jackpot probability, and this range is common to all setting values "1" to "6." The range of the hit/fail lottery value is also set so that the probability of a small jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value. For all setting values "1" to "6," a small jackpot occurs when the first hit/fail lottery value ranges from 56,500 to 65,535, and a small jackpot occurs when the second hit/fail lottery value ranges from 64,000 to 65,535. A hit/fail lottery value range outside the range of a jackpot or small jackpot is considered a "miss." In this diagram, the jackpot probability differs for each setting value, but the correspondence between the hit/fail lottery value and the hit/fail determination result may be set so that the jackpot probability is the same across different setting values.

<First symbol determination means 226 and second symbol determination means 227>
Returning to Figure 4, the first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 determine the stop symbol when the symbol variation starts based on the symbol lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202 and the result of the win/loss determination. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 hold a plurality of symbol determination tables to be referenced in order to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol. Specifically, the first symbol determination means 226 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the win/loss determination by the first win/loss determination means 221, and the second symbol determination means 227 holds a plurality of symbol determination tables according to the result of the win/loss determination by the second win/loss determination means 222. The first win/loss determination means 221 holds a jackpot first symbol determination table to be referenced in the event of a jackpot, a small win first symbol determination table to be referenced in the event of a small win, and a miss first symbol determination table to be referenced in the event of a miss. The second hit/miss determination means 222 holds a second symbol determination table for big hits to be referenced when a big hit occurs, a second symbol determination table for small hits to be referenced when a small hit occurs, and a second symbol determination table for misses to be referenced when a miss occurs. The first symbol determination means 226 and the second symbol determination means 227 select the symbol determination table to be referenced depending on the result of the hit/miss determination. Note that the symbol determination performed when starting the symbol variation is also referred to as "symbol determination as actual determination" as appropriate to distinguish it from the preliminary symbol determination described below.

Figure 7 is a schematic diagram of a pattern determination table. Figure 7(a) is the table referenced when the hit/miss determination result is a big hit, Figure 7(b) is the table referenced when the hit/miss determination result is a miss, and Figure 7(c) is the table referenced when the hit/miss determination result is a small hit. The first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227 refer to the pattern determination table in this figure when making the main determination. Each pattern determination table defines a correspondence between the numbers "0" to "10" indicating the type of special pattern and the first or second pattern lottery value. The types of special patterns are each associated with the hit/miss determination results of a big hit, small hit, or miss, with "0" to "4" corresponding to a big hit, "5" to "9" corresponding to a small hit, and "10" corresponding to a miss. Each type is assigned multiple special patterns, i.e., multiple meaningless symbols formed by combinations of segments.

As shown in Figure 7(a), special symbol types "0" to "4" are associated with the presence or absence of a jackpot and a probability change after the jackpot. Specifically, type "0" indicates a 10R jackpot with a probability change as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "0 to 99" for the first symbol drawn value and "0 to 144" for the second symbol drawn value. Type "1" indicates a 4R jackpot with a probability change (or "effective 4R win") as a specific jackpot, and is associated with "100 to 149" for the first symbol drawn value and "145 to 149" for the second symbol drawn value. Type "2" indicates a 2R jackpot with a probability change, and is associated with "150 to 189" for both the first symbol drawn value and the second symbol drawn value. Type "3" indicates a normal jackpot, a 10R jackpot without a probability change, and type "3" is associated with a first pattern lottery value and a second pattern lottery value of "150-189". Type "4" indicates a normal jackpot, a 4R jackpot without a probability change, and type "4" is associated with a first pattern lottery value and a second pattern lottery value of "230-255". In this way, the selection probability for each jackpot type (i.e., the type of jackpot and whether or not there is a subsequent probability change) is determined by the size of the range of the pattern lottery value.

It is also possible to provide more types of special symbols, in which case one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with multiple types of special symbols, thereby increasing the number of symbol types while reducing the number of jackpot types. Alternatively, it is possible to subdivide the jackpot types into more types in correspondence with the increased number of symbol types. Furthermore, it is also possible to provide different symbol types for the first and second draws. In this case, one jackpot type is determined in correspondence with each of the types of special symbols selected in the first and second draws. However, it is desirable to set the probability fluctuation rate to be the same for the first and second draws.

As shown in Figure 7(b), type "10" corresponds to the entire range of symbol lottery values when the win/loss determination result is a miss. Therefore, it is determined that the same special symbol will always stop and be displayed when the result is a miss. It is also possible to have multiple special symbols stop and be displayed when the result is a miss.

As shown in Figure 7(c), special symbol types "5" to "9" are associated with small wins. Type "5" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "0 to 49", and type "6" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "50 to 99". Type "7" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "100 to 149", type "8" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "150 to 199", and type "9" is associated with the symbol lottery value range "200 to 255".

In this embodiment, in order to conserve storage space on the main board 200, the table in Figure 7 is also referenced as the preliminary pattern determination table when making a preliminary pattern determination. The first pattern determination means 226 and the second pattern determination means 227 send a value between "0" and "10" indicating the type of special pattern as a result of the preliminary pattern determination to the effect determination means 303, along with a value indicating whether it is the first win/lose lottery or the second win/lose lottery and the number of reserved symbols. The preliminary pattern determination table may be one that is further subdivided to enable more complex determinations, or one that simplifies the determination range of jackpot symbols that execute similar special games. Furthermore, when a pattern is uniformly determined in the event of a loss, as in this embodiment, a specific pattern may be determined without referencing the acquired pattern lottery value or without preparing a pattern determination table for losses.

<First variation pattern determination means 231 and second variation pattern determination means 232>
Returning to Fig. 4, the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines a variation pattern, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the first special symbol display unit 41 and the performance display device 60, from a plurality of variation patterns based on a first pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The second variation pattern determination means 232 determines a variation pattern, which defines the display process of the pattern variation to be displayed on the second special symbol display unit 42 and the performance display device 60, from a plurality of variation patterns based on a second pattern lottery value obtained from the random number generation means 202. The first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 each determine the variation pattern of the pattern variation by referring to a variation pattern table when starting the pattern variation. In addition, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 perform a preliminary pattern determination of which variation pattern range the pattern lottery value falls into. The first variation pattern determination means 231, the second variation pattern determination means 232, and the control means of the main board 200 each retain or share a variation pattern table that is referenced to determine the variation pattern when the variation start condition is met, and a preliminary pattern determination table that is used to generate information for determining whether to execute the pre-reading process when the ball enters the starting hole. Each variation pattern has a predetermined variation time from the start to the end of the special symbol variation, and the variation time varies depending on the type. In other words, each variation pattern with a predetermined pattern variation display process essentially has a variation display time set for each pattern as the end condition for that symbol variation, and the variation of the special symbol stops when that variation display time has elapsed. Note that the variation pattern determination performed to start the pattern variation is also referred to as the "variation pattern determination as the actual determination" to distinguish it from the preliminary pattern determination. Furthermore, to aid in the selection of the decorative symbol variation display pattern described below, different types of variation patterns may be defined despite having the same variation time.

Figure 8 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a fluctuation pattern table. The first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 refer to the table in this figure (a) in the normal state, and refer to the table in this figure (b) in the time-saving state.

As shown in Figure 8 (a), if the hit/miss judgment result in normal conditions is a miss, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 4, then "Super 1", a super reach with pattern range number "0", is selected; if the pattern lottery value is 5 to 9, then "Super 2", a super reach with pattern range number "1", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 10 to 19, then "Normal 1", a normal reach with pattern range number "2", is selected; if the pattern lottery value is 20 to 29, then "Normal 2", a normal reach with pattern range number "3", is selected. If the pattern lottery value is 30 to 255, then "no reach, miss" with pattern range number "4" is selected. For "no reach, miss", different fluctuation patterns are selected depending on the number of reserved balls; if the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, then a 10-second fluctuation pattern is selected; if the number of reserved balls is 3, then a 7-second fluctuation pattern is selected; and if the number of reserved balls is 4, then a 4-second fluctuation pattern is selected.

This diagram explains an example where the symbols are mainly classified into five types based on the change time, but the sub-board 300 has multiple change presentation patterns prepared for each of these change patterns, which means that a total of several dozen change presentation patterns are associated with the lottery value ranges for each category.

The range of pattern selection values assigned to "Normal 1," "Normal 2," and "No-reach miss" also differs depending on the number of reserved balls. When the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, it is as shown in Figure (a), but as the number of reserved balls increases, the selection value range for "Normal 1" and "Normal 2" narrows, and the selection value range for "No-reach miss" widens. The fewer the number of reserved balls, the wider the selection value range for fluctuation patterns with relatively long fluctuation times, increasing the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time will be selected. Therefore, the fewer the number of reserved balls, the longer the average fluctuation time, and the more the number of reserved balls, the shorter the average fluctuation time. By using a fluctuation pattern table in which the correspondence between pattern selection value ranges and fluctuation patterns differs for each number of reserved balls, it is possible to achieve control that makes it more likely that fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times will be selected when the number of reserved balls is low.

If the result of the hit/miss judgment under normal conditions is a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, if the pattern lottery value is 0-123, "Super 1", a super reach with pattern range number "5", is selected; if the pattern lottery value is 124-248, "Super 2", a super reach with pattern range number "6", is selected; if the pattern lottery value is 249-252, "Normal 1", a normal reach with pattern range number "7", is selected; and if the pattern lottery value is 253-255, "Normal 2", a normal reach with pattern range number "8", is selected.

If the result of the hit/miss judgment under normal conditions is a 2R jackpot or small hit, if the pattern lottery value is 0 to 122, "Super 3", a super reach with pattern range number "9", is selected; if the pattern lottery value is 123 to 255, "Normal 3", a normal reach with pattern range number "10", is selected.

When the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 send the preliminary determination result to the performance determination means 303 as a so-called pre-read result, they send the pattern range number value (0-10) along with a value indicating whether it is the first or second win/loss lottery and the number of pending items. Note that the example shown in Figure 8 illustrates a preliminary pattern determination with a table for each win/loss determination result, but it is also possible to use one preliminary pattern determination table regardless of the win/loss lottery result to derive only information regarding the approximate range in which the random number value falls, and the control means of the sub-board 300 can control the determination of what variation will be performed along with the preliminary win/loss determination result.

In the fluctuation pattern table of Figure 8(b) referenced in the time-saving state, pattern lottery values are assigned to all time-saving fluctuation patterns. However, the correspondence between the pattern lottery value range and fluctuation time is the same as in Figure 8(a) except for "No-reach Miss Shortened," which is selected when a miss occurs. "No-reach Miss Shortened" is a fluctuation pattern with a relatively short fluctuation time that corresponds to the same lottery value range and pattern range number as "No-reach Miss Shortened" in Figure 8(a). For "No-reach Miss Shortened," a different fluctuation pattern is also selected depending on the number of reserved balls; when the number of reserved balls is 0 or 1, a 10-second fluctuation pattern is selected, and when the number of reserved balls is 2 to 4, a 1-second fluctuation pattern is selected. Note that the first fluctuation pattern determination means 231 and the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 may be configured to reference different fluctuation pattern tables, or different fluctuation pattern tables may be referenced depending on the game state. For example, in a gaming machine where the second lottery is set to be more advantageous than the first lottery and the second lottery is processed with priority over the first lottery, it would be undesirable for the player if the reserved balls for the second lottery were to be depleted and the first lottery were to be executed continuously, even when the time was shortened and it was easy to score. Therefore, for a losing variation in the first lottery when it was easy to score, a variation pattern table could be referenced that uniformly selects a long variation pattern (e.g., 10 seconds) that does not shorten the variation time, regardless of the number of reserved balls.

<Holding control means 240>
Returning to FIG. 4, the reserve control means 240 includes a special symbol reserve means 241 and a regular symbol reserve means 242. When a new first or second symbol lottery value is acquired, if a symbol change corresponding to the previously acquired first or second symbol lottery value is displayed, the special symbol reserve means 241 reserves the start of the symbol change corresponding to the newly acquired first or second symbol lottery value and stores the symbol lottery value until the corresponding symbol change display begins. Here, for the first special symbol, the first symbol lottery value, first symbol lottery value, and first pattern lottery value are stored, each up to a maximum of four. For the second special symbol, the second symbol lottery value, second symbol lottery value, and second pattern lottery value are stored, each up to a maximum of four. The regular symbol reserve means 242 stores the regular symbol lottery value acquired by the regular symbol lottery means 213 as a reserved ball. The number of reserved items is represented by the number of lights or flashes on the first special symbol reserved display unit 71, the second special symbol reserved display unit 72, and the normal symbol reserved display unit 75. The number of reserved items by the special symbol reserved means 241 is also displayed on the performance display device 60.

The lottery values for the second win/loss lottery reserved in the special symbol reservation means 241 are consumed before the lottery values for the first win/loss lottery, and the pattern changes are displayed. Therefore, even if a jackpot lottery value is reserved for the first win/loss lottery, the pattern changes corresponding to the jackpot lottery value for the first win/loss lottery will not be displayed as long as there are lottery values reserved for the second win/loss lottery. Therefore, even if a jackpot is reserved for the first win/loss lottery, it is possible to win multiple consecutive jackpots by continuing to play until a jackpot is reserved for the second win/loss lottery.

<Main Display Control Means 250>
The main display control means 250 includes a first special symbol control means 251, a second special symbol control means 252, and a normal symbol control means 254. The first special symbol control means 251 displays the variation of the first special symbol 51 on the first special symbol display unit 41 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the result of the first win/lose lottery by the first lottery means 211. The first special symbol control means 251 sets the start condition for a new pattern variation as the completion of the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the previous first win/lose lottery or second win/lose lottery. The second special symbol control means 252 displays the variation of the second special symbol 52 on the second special symbol display unit 42 according to a variation pattern determined in response to the result of the second win/lose lottery by the second lottery means 212. The second special symbol control means 252 also sets the condition for starting a new symbol change as the end of the display of the symbol change corresponding to the previously performed first or second winning or losing lottery.

The first special symbol control means 251 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first win/loss lottery if the win/loss lottery value for the second win/loss lottery has been stored by the special symbol holding means 241. On the other hand, the second special symbol control means 252 starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second win/loss lottery regardless of whether the win/loss lottery value for the first win/loss lottery has been stored by the special symbol holding means 241. As a result, if lottery values are held for both the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery, the lottery value held for the second win/loss lottery is read out preferentially and the pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the lottery value held for the first win/loss lottery will not be read out and the pattern change will not start until the number of holds for the second win/loss lottery reaches 0.

The first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 transmit a variation start command and a variation stop command to the presentation determination means 303 (sub-main) via the command communication means 205, which will be described later, at the timings when the varying display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 starts and stops. When transmitting the variation start command, values indicating the pass/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern determined or decided as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating either the first pass/fail lottery or the second pass/fail lottery, are transmitted to the presentation determination means 303 together with the variation start command. When transmitting the variation stop command, a value indicating the stopped symbol is transmitted again to the presentation determination means 303 together with the variation stop command. In addition, the presentation determination means 303 (sub-main) transmits the variation start command, variation stop command, etc. to the presentation control means 304 in order to control the varying display of the decorative symbol by the presentation control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable displays by the main display control means 250 and the performance control means 304 (sub-sub), maintaining linkage. The normal symbol control means 254 displays the results of the lottery by the normal symbol lottery means 213 on the normal symbol display unit 45 as a variable display of the normal symbol.

<Special figure adjustment means 276>
The special symbol adjustment means 276 causes the start of variable display of one of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 to wait while the other is being displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol adjustment means 276 prioritizes the variable display of the second special symbol 52 based on a ball entering the second starting hole 12 over the variable display of the first special symbol 51 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11, regardless of the order in which the gaming balls enter the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. For example, when both the first winning/losing lottery value and the second winning/losing lottery value are reserved, the second winning/losing lottery value is always consumed preferentially, and the second special symbol 52 is continuously displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, in a modified example, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may selectively change the display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 in accordance with the order in which the balls enter the first starting hole 11 and the second starting hole 12. For example, when the balls enter the first starting hole 11, the first starting hole 11, and the second starting hole 12 in that order, the display will change in the order of the first special symbol 51, the first special symbol 51, and the second special symbol 52. In this case, the special symbol adjustment means 276 monitors the reservation control means 240 and stores the reservation order of the win/lose lottery values. Which special symbol should be changed is determined according to the order in which the game balls enter, i.e., the reservation order of the win/lose lottery values in the reservation control means 240, making it easy for the player to visually grasp the order of the changes.

In another variant, the special symbol adjustment means 276 may display the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52 in a predetermined order, regardless of the order in which the balls land. For example, it may be prioritized to alternate between the variable display of the first special symbol 51 and the variable display of the second special symbol 52. For example, when both the first win/lose lottery value and the second win/lose lottery value are reserved, the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are displayed in an alternating manner. Since which special symbol should be changed simply alternates regardless of the order in which the game balls land, it is easy for the player to intuitively grasp the order of change.

The special symbol adjustment means 276 also waits for the start of the variable display of the first special symbol 51 or the second special symbol 52 when one of them stops in a winning state. In this case, the variable display of the special symbol does not start while the special game is being played, allowing the player to concentrate on the special game.

<Preliminary Determination Means 235>
The advance judgment means 235 includes a first lottery advance judgment means 236 and a second lottery advance judgment means 237. The first lottery advance judgment means 236 uses various random numbers acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 to judge in advance information regarding the variation of the first special symbol before the first special symbol control means 251 starts varying the first special symbol, before various judgments are made by the first win/loss judgment means 221, the first symbol determination means 226, and the first variation pattern determination means 231. The second lottery advance judgment means 237 uses various random numbers acquired by the second lottery value acquisition means 217 to judge in advance information regarding the variation of the second special symbol before the second special symbol control means 252 starts varying the second special symbol, before various judgments are made by the second win/loss judgment means 222, the second symbol determination means 227, and the second variation pattern determination means 232.

The first lottery advance judgment means 236 holds a first advance win/lose lottery value judgment table, a first advance pattern lottery value judgment table, and a first advance variable pattern random number value judgment table as judgment tables for advance judgment related to the first lottery means 211. The first lottery advance judgment means 236 uses the first advance win/lose lottery value judgment table to judge the random number group to which the first win/lose lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery advance judgment means 236 uses the first advance pattern lottery value judgment table to judge the random number group to which the first pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs. The first lottery advance judgment means 236 uses the first advance variable pattern judgment table to judge the random number group to which the first variable pattern lottery value stored in the special chart holding means 241 belongs. These judgment results are then temporarily stored as advance judgment results, and information regarding the advance judgment results is transmitted to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), described below.

Figure 9 is a schematic diagram showing the advance win/loss determination table referenced in the advance win/loss determination. The first lottery advance determination means 236 (advance win/loss determination for the first game) refers to the first advance win/loss lottery value determination table in Figure 9(a) when the ball enters the first starting hole 11, and if the win/loss lottery value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the advance win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the advance win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "3000 to 56499", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the advance win/loss determination result. If the win/loss lottery value is "56500 to 65535", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the advance win/loss determination result. Next, a first preliminary pattern lottery value determination table (not shown) is referenced, and if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 99", a value of "0" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "100 to 149", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. Furthermore, a first preliminary variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown) is referenced, and if the first pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", the value "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the first pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", the value "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the preliminary determination information set by the first lottery preliminary determination means 236 (preliminary win/loss determination for the first game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described below in accordance with the transmission timing of information indicating a ball entering the first starting hole 11 (indicating that this is the first win/loss lottery), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/win/lose determination for the second game) refers to the second pre-win/lose lottery value determination table in Figure 9 (b) when the ball enters the second starting hole 12, and if the win/lose lottery value is "0 to 299", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "300 to 2999", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "3000 to 63999", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. If the win/lose lottery value is "64000 to 65535", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the pre-win/lose determination result. Next, the second pre-pattern lottery value determination table (not shown) is referred to, and if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 144", a value of "0" indicating this is set as the pre-pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "145 to 149", a value of "1" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "150 to 189", a value of "2" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "190 to 229", a value of "3" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "230 to 255", a value of "4" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. Furthermore, by referring to the second preliminary variable pattern random number value determination table (not shown), if the second pattern lottery value is "0 to 9", a value of "A" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "10 to 29", a value of "B" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. If the second pattern lottery value is "30 to 255", a value of "C" indicating this is set as the preliminary pattern determination result. As described above, the pre-determination information set by the second lottery pre-determination means 237 (pre-win/lose determination for the second game) is transmitted to the performance determination means 303 by the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207) described below in accordance with the timing of transmission of information indicating a ball entering the second starting hole 12 (indicating that a second win/lose lottery is being held), information indicating the number of reserved balls, etc.

The various pieces of information temporarily stored as preliminary judgment results by the preliminary judgment means 235 are stored in a predetermined preliminary judgment result memory area, up to a maximum of four items, similar to the number of reserved memories. The preliminary judgment results may also be stored in a reserved memory area stored by the reservation control means 240. The information may be erased upon transmission of the preliminary judgment results by the preliminary judgment means 235 to the presentation determination means 303 via the command communication means 205 (sub-control command transmission means 207), which will be described later. By sharing the information with other areas or erasing the information upon completion of transmission, efficient use of storage space on the main board 200 is expected. Furthermore, instead of providing a dedicated table for preliminary judgment, a judgment table for this judgment may be used as the judgment table for preliminary judgment. A common preliminary judgment table, partially or entirely, may be shared between the preliminary success/failure judgment for the first game and the preliminary success/failure judgment for the second game. By sharing the information with other judgment tables in this way, a reduction in data volume on the main board 200 is expected. The content to be transmitted as the judgment result of the preliminary judgment means 235 can be selected as appropriate, for example, by transmitting only the judgment result of whether the result is correct or incorrect. Alternatively, without making a judgment using the preliminary judgment means 235, the random number values acquired by the first lottery value acquisition means 216 and the second lottery value acquisition means 217 can be transmitted to the sub-board 300 via the command communication means 205 described above, and the content of the preliminary judgment can be determined by the sub-board 300.

The advance judgment means 235 may refer to an advance win/fail lottery value judgment table in which the correspondence between the win/fail lottery value and the advance win/fail judgment result varies depending on the setting value set by the setting change device 170. As with the win/fail judgment table described above, multiple types of advance win/fail lottery value judgment tables corresponding to multiple game settings may be prepared, and the advance win/fail lottery value judgment table to be referenced may be switched depending on the setting value of the game setting. Alternatively, an advance win/fail lottery value judgment table that can be shared between multiple game settings may be used. In this case, a win/fail may be pre-judged based on a combination of the setting value of the game setting and the value of the advance win/fail judgment result.

Figure 10 is a schematic diagram showing a pre-hit/miss determination table corresponding to the game setting. Figure (a) is the pre-hit/miss determination table referenced by the first pre-lottery determination means 236, and Figure (b) is the pre-hit/miss determination table referenced by the second pre-lottery determination means 237. When the hit/miss lottery value is "0 to 294," the pre-hit/miss determination result is "11," indicating a jackpot in all settings 1 to 6. When the hit/miss lottery value is "295," the pre-hit/miss determination result is "12," indicating a jackpot in settings 2 or higher during normal play or in all settings during special mode. When the hit/miss lottery value is "296," the pre-hit/miss determination result is "13," indicating a jackpot in settings 3 or higher during normal play or in all settings during special mode. When the hit/miss lottery value is "297," the pre-hit/miss determination result is "14," indicating a jackpot in settings 4 or higher during normal play or in all settings during special mode. If the hit/miss lottery value is "298", the preliminary hit/miss judgment result will be "15", indicating that a jackpot will occur on settings 5 or higher during normal play, or on all settings during special mode. If the hit/miss lottery value is "299", the preliminary hit/miss judgment result will be "16", indicating that a jackpot will occur on setting 6 during normal play, or on all settings during special mode. Also, if the hit/miss lottery value is "300 to 2949", the preliminary hit/miss judgment result will be "21", indicating that a jackpot will occur on all settings during special mode. If the hit/miss lottery value is "2950 to 2959", the preliminary hit/miss judgment result will be "22", indicating that a jackpot will occur on settings 2 or higher during special mode. If the hit/miss lottery value is "2960 to 2969", the preliminary hit/miss judgment result will be "23", indicating that a jackpot will occur on settings 3 or higher during special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2970 to 2979", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "23", indicating that a jackpot will occur in setting 4 or higher during the special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2980 to 2989", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "25", indicating that a jackpot will occur in setting 5 or higher during the special mode. If the winning/losing lottery value is "2990 to 2999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "26", indicating that a jackpot will occur in setting 6 during the special mode. Furthermore, if the first winning/losing lottery value shown in (a) is "3000 to 56499", and if the second winning/losing lottery value shown in (b) is "3000 to 63999", the preliminary winning/losing judgment result will be "30", indicating that a small jackpot will occur in all settings. Additionally, when the first win/loss lottery value shown in (a) is "56,500 to 65,535," and when the second win/loss lottery value shown in (b) is "64,000 to 65,535," the preliminary win/loss judgment result will be "40," indicating a loss for all settings. By using such a preliminary win/loss judgment table, it is possible to display an appropriate preliminary win/loss judgment result for each setting value of the game settings.

<Special Game Control Means 260>
If the first win/loss lottery by the first lottery means 211 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game activation condition has been established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined jackpot pattern, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20. Similarly, if the second win/loss lottery by the second lottery means 212 results in a transition to a special game, the special game control means 260 determines that the special game activation condition has been established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined jackpot pattern, and executes the special game by opening the large prize opening 20.

A special game is a game in which the opening and closing operation of the large prize opening 20 continues multiple times in succession, and is composed of multiple unit games. Special games include a 10R jackpot, in which the unit game is repeated 10 times, a 4R jackpot, in which the unit game is repeated four times, and a 2R jackpot, in which the unit game is repeated only twice, with a shorter opening time than the 10R and 4R jackpots. A 10R jackpot is a jackpot in the second win/loss lottery, and a 4R jackpot is a jackpot in the first win/loss lottery. In a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot, the large prize opening 20 is generally opened for approximately 30 seconds in one unit game. In a 2R jackpot, the large prize opening 20 is opened for only approximately 1.6 seconds in one unit game. The special game control means 260 ends the special game when the set number of rounds of the unit game have been exhausted. Furthermore, even in the case of a 2R jackpot, if certain conditions are met, the large prize opening 20 may be opened in the same manner as in the case of a 10R jackpot and a 4R jackpot.

<Small win game control means 265>
If the first drawing by the first drawing means 211 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game activation condition has been established when the first special symbol 51 stops in a predetermined small win pattern, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large prize opening 20. Similarly, if the second drawing by the second drawing means 212 results in a small win, the small win game control means 265 determines that the small win game activation condition has been established when the second special symbol 52 stops in a predetermined small win pattern, and executes the small win game by having the opening/closing control means 275 open the large prize opening 20.

In a small win game, one unit game is executed, and the large prize opening 20 is opened and closed twice during one unit game. The small win game control means 265 opens the large prize opening 20 for approximately 0.8 seconds per opening and closing, and then closes the large prize opening 20 to end the small win game.

<Specific Game Control Means 270>
The specific game control means 270 controls normal game play in the probability variable state, time-saving state, and easy-to-score state. When the special symbol is a symbol for a specific jackpot that transitions to the probability variable state, the specific game control means 270 transitions the game state to the probability variable state, time-saving state, and easy-to-score state after the special game ends. The probability variable state, time-saving state, and easy-to-score state continue until the next jackpot occurs. In the time-saving state, the first variation pattern determination means 231 and the second variation pattern determination means 232 select variation patterns with short variation times so that the variation display times of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are generally short. However, in the normal state, the reserve control means 240 references a variation pattern table corresponding to the number of reserved win/lose lottery values, and the fewer the reserved numbers, the more likely variation patterns with long variation times will appear. In the easy-to-score state, at least one of the three functions of the probability variation of normal symbols, the time reduction of normal symbols, and the extension of the opening of the second starting hole 12 is performed, thereby improving the frequency of the ball scoring into the second starting hole 12 (the ease of scoring). During the probability variation state, the probability that the results of the hit/miss determination by the first hit/miss determination means 221 and the second hit/miss determination means 222 will result in a jackpot is maintained at a high value. Furthermore, the specific game control means 270 puts the second starting hole 12 into the extended opening state when a specific jackpot is achieved, and further shifts the winning probability of the opening lottery to a probability variation state higher than the normal probability state only if the hit/miss lottery is a second hit/miss lottery.

<Opening/Closing Control Means 275>
The opening/closing control means 275 controls the opening and closing of the normal electric device 90 in the second starting hole 12 and the large prize hole 20. When the normal symbol stops in a specific manner, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening command to the normal electric device solenoid 91, causing the normal electric device 90 in the second starting hole 12 to open. In the normal state, the opening/closing control means 275 opens the second starting hole 12 with a short or long opening time depending on the result of the opening lottery, and in the ball-entry easy state, opens the second starting hole 12 with a long opening time. This increases the ease of ball entry into the second starting hole 12, allowing the player to continue playing without reducing their ball holdings. In the special game, the opening/closing control means 275 sends an opening command to the large prize hole solenoid 92, causing the large prize hole 20 to open.

<Main initial processing execution means 280, main power cutoff processing execution means 282, main error detection means 284>
The main initial processing execution means 280 executes control start processing for the main board 200 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage. The main power outage processing execution means 282 executes abnormality response processing such as power outage processing in the main board 200 when a power outage or other power abnormality occurs. The main error detection means 284 executes abnormality detection processing in the main board 200. The control start processing, abnormality response processing, and abnormality detection processing of the main board 200 will be described later.

<Setting Change Means 286, Setting Confirmation Means 287>
The setting change means 286 executes a "setting change process" for changing game settings. When the power switch 150 is turned on while the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting change means 286 transitions to the setting change state described above. When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting change means 286 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting value stored in the setting memory. In response to pressing of the setting change button 172, the setting change means 286 changes the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 in the order 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → ..., and updates the setting value stored in the setting memory to the same value displayed on the setting display unit 173. When the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting change means 286 terminates the setting change state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting confirmation means 287 executes a "setting confirmation process" to confirm game settings. If the power switch 150 is turned on without pressing the RAM clear switch while the setting key cylinder 171 is in the on state, the setting confirmation means 287 transitions to the setting confirmation state described above. When transitioning to the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation means 287 causes the setting display unit 173 to display the setting values stored in the setting memory. Unlike the setting change means 286 described above, the setting confirmation means 287 does not change the setting values displayed on the setting display unit 173 even if the setting change button 172 is pressed, nor does it update the setting values stored in the setting memory. If the setting key cylinder 171 is turned off, the setting confirmation means 287 ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display unit 173.

The setting value data managed in the setting memory may instead be numeric values "0" through "5" rather than numeric values "1" through "6." In this case, setting value "0" may correspond to setting 1, setting value "1" to setting 2, setting value "2" to setting 3, setting value "3" to setting 4, setting value "4" to setting 5, and setting value "5" to setting 6. Using "0" as the normal value for setting value data simplifies the RAM clearing process in the event of an abnormality, since resetting the setting value data to the initial value "0" through RAM clearing in the event of a RAM abnormality will not result in an abnormality. Another advantage is that when using setting value data to perform a lottery, such as selecting different tables or data for each setting value in a look-ahead process, the offset process for that selection can be simplified. For example, when using setting value data values "1" through "6," additional processing, such as subtracting 1 from the starting address, is required to use these values directly as offset data for table or data selection. On the other hand, when using values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the numerical value of the setting value data can be used as is as the offset data. Note that when using values from "0" to "5" as the setting value data, the setting change means 286 and setting confirmation means 287 may display the numerical value of the setting value data as is on the setting display unit 173, or may display a value obtained by adding +1 to the numerical value of the setting value data on the setting display unit 173. In the latter case, the numerical data from "0" to "5" is converted into the numerical values of settings 1 to 6 in the game settings and displayed, making the display easy to understand for the gaming machine administrator.

<Command transmission means>
The command communication means 205 includes a payout control command communication means 206 that transmits control commands required to execute payouts, etc. to the payout control board 155, and a sub-control command transmission means 207 that transmits control commands required to execute performance control, etc. to the sub-board 300. The payout control command communication means 206 transmits payout commands that instruct the payout of the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning slot based on the determination of balls entering each winning slot by the ball entry determination means 201, and transmits commands that indicate the status of any error that has occurred on the main board 200. When starting a pattern variation, the sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits the result of the lottery determination corresponding to the pattern variation together with the control command for the pattern variation to the performance determination means 303.

The sub-control command sending means 207 sends a variation start command and a variation stop command to the presentation determination means 303 (sub-main) at the timing when the first special symbol control means 251 and the second special symbol control means 252 start and stop the varying display of the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52. When sending the variation start command, the sub-control command sends values indicating the pass/fail judgment result, the stopped symbol, and the variation pattern judged or determined as the main judgment, as well as a value indicating either the first pass/fail lottery or the second pass/fail lottery, together with the variation start command, to the presentation determination means 303. When sending the variation stop command, the sub-control command sends a value indicating the stopped symbol to the presentation determination means 303 again together with the variation stop command. In addition, the presentation determination means 303 (sub-main) sends the variation start command, variation stop command, etc. to the presentation control means 304 in order to control the varying display of the decorative symbol by the presentation control means 304 (sub-sub). This synchronizes the variable display by the main display control means 250 and the effect control means 304 (sub-sub), maintaining linkage. The sub-control command transmission means 207 also transmits the preliminary determination result by the preliminary determination means 235 to the effect determination means 303. The preliminary determination result is temporarily stored in a transmission buffer, and then transmitted to the effect determination means 303 along with information on the type of winning slot (first start slot 11, second start slot 12), the number of reserved balls, the game status, etc., corresponding to the preliminary determination result, regardless of whether the symbol variable display corresponding to the lottery will immediately begin. The information is then deleted from the transmission buffer or later overwritten. This allows the sub-board 300 to predict the winning or losing outcome before its turn to start the symbol variable based on the received preliminary determination result, a process known as "prediction." The processing performed by the sub-board 300 based on the preliminary determination information will be described later. The sub-control command transmission means 207 transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding special games performed by the special game control means 260, information regarding small win games performed by the small win game control means 265, information regarding the lottery results performed by the regular lottery means 213, and setting value information for game settings set by the setting change means 286. The sub-control command transmission means 207 also transmits to the sub-board 300 information regarding various controls on the main board 200 or various signals sent to the main board 200, such as information regarding initial processing performed by the main initial processing execution means 280 and main error detection means 284, and information regarding errors, as well as information regarding various controls on the main board 200.

Figure 11 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sub-board. The sub-board 300 includes a symbol mode determination means 301, a pattern storage means 302, a performance determination means 303, a performance control means 304, a timing means 307, a performance setting means 308, a sub-initial processing execution means 360, a sub-power cutoff processing execution means 362, a sub-error detection means 364, a command reception means 370, and a sub-side preliminary determination means 371.

The pattern storage means 302 stores multiple presentation patterns that define the presentation image content and display process to be displayed on the presentation display device 60 when the decorative pattern 61 changes. The presentation patterns include multiple variation presentation patterns that define the change process and presentation process from the start to the end of the decorative pattern 61 change display, as well as multiple preview presentation patterns that are displayed separately from the decorative pattern change display to give a preview of the high likelihood of a jackpot before the display stops.

The command receiving means 370 receives various commands transmitted from the command communication means 205, and the sub-side advance judgment means 371 holds the advance judgment results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determination means 303 includes a normal effect determination means 373 and a look-ahead effect determination means 374. The normal effect determination means 373 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., in accordance with the information on the judgment result of the first win/lose lottery or the judgment result of the second win/lose lottery transmitted from the command communication means 205. The effect determination means 303 determines the effect content in accordance with the setting values of the game settings transmitted from the command communication means 205. The look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device 60 by the effect control means 304 and output to the speaker 108, decorative lamps 111, etc., in accordance with the advance judgment results transmitted from the command communication means 205. The normal effect determination means 373 selects one of a plurality of variable effect patterns determined by the first variable effect pattern determination means 231 or the second variable effect pattern determination means 232 and corresponding to the variable effect pattern of the special symbol transmitted from the command communication means 205, and reads it from the pattern storage means 302. The normal effect determination means 373 sends information on the read variable effect pattern to the effect control means 304. The normal effect determination means 373 holds a pattern table to be referenced in order to select a variable effect pattern. The normal effect determination means 373 may determine the variable effect pattern by referring to the preliminary determination result transmitted from the command communication means 205, or may determine the variable effect pattern in conjunction with the content of the pre-read effect determined by the pre-read effect determination means 374. The pre-read effect determination means 374 more accurately identifies the result of the actual determination based on the preliminary determination result from the command communication means 205 and past preliminary determination results and game status information stored on the sub-board 300, and determines whether to execute the pre-read effect and the execution content based on the identified result before the actual determination. Specifically, the look-ahead effect determination means 374 determines whether the current game state is a probability-varying game state, and then determines whether to transition to a normal game state based on the pre-determination result that precedes the currently received pre-determination result. Based on this determination result, the means 374 identifies the success or failure of the actual determination related to the currently received pre-determination result, the variation pattern to be selected, etc., and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect and the execution content of the look-ahead effect based on the identified results. Note that the effect determination means 303 is largely composed of the normal effect determination means 373 and the look-ahead effect determination means 374, and therefore will be described as the effect determination means 303 that encompasses both, except for particularly necessary parts.

For each variation effect pattern, a variation time is set as the end condition for the pattern variation, and the pattern variation stops when that variation time has elapsed. The effect determination means 303 selects a variation effect pattern of a performance image with the same variation time according to the variation pattern of the special pattern.

The pattern mode determination means 301 determines the combination of stopping patterns of the decorative patterns 61 and their arrangement based on the results of the lottery by the first lottery means 211 or the second lottery means 212, the stopping patterns of the special patterns, the variation patterns of the special patterns, and the variation presentation patterns of the decorative patterns. The pattern mode determination means 301 transmits information indicating the determined combination of stopping patterns to the presentation control means 304. The pattern mode determination means 301 holds a pattern range table to be referenced in order to determine the stopping patterns of the decorative patterns.

The decorative symbols 61 are stopped as a combination of three symbols. For example, if the result of the hit/miss determination by the first hit/miss determination means 221 and the second hit/miss determination means 222 indicates a transition to a special game of a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, a specific combination, such as a combination of three symbols such as "777" or "111," is selected. If the hit/miss determination result is a 2R jackpot or a small jackpot, a specific combination, such as a predetermined combination such as "357," is also selected, but these specific combinations do not necessarily have to be combinations of three symbols. If the hit/miss determination result is neither a jackpot nor a small jackpot, a combination of three symbols not matching, such as "312" or "946," which does not fall under the specific combinations selected for a 2R jackpot or small jackpot, is selected. If the result of the hit/miss judgment is not a 4R jackpot or a 10R jackpot, and a variable pattern indicating a miss with reach is selected, a combination with only one missing symbol, such as "191" or "727", will be selected.

The decorative symbol variation presentation pattern defines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol, that is, the presentation process from when the decorative symbol starts to vary until it stops varying. Variation presentation patterns include a pattern when a normal losing symbol is displayed, a pattern when a losing symbol is displayed after going through a reach state where one more symbol will be aligned for a jackpot, and a pattern when a jackpot symbol is displayed after going through a reach state. In particular, patterns when going through a reach state include patterns with various variation times, both long and short. Each variation presentation pattern has a variation time set for it as the end condition for that symbol variation, and the symbol variation stops when that variation time has elapsed. The presentation determination means 303 selects a decorative symbol variation presentation pattern whose variation time is equal to that of the special symbol, depending on the special symbol variation pattern.

When the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern determination means 231 or the second variation pattern determination means 232 in the time-saving state is a pattern for time-saving, the effect determination means 303 selects a variation effect pattern for which the effect content for time-saving has been determined. The effect content for time-saving is an effect in which background images and sounds are output to impress upon the player that they are in an advantageous state due to the time-saving or probability variation state.

Preview effect patterns include those that temporarily display images, animations, or videos of specific characters or motifs on the screen, those that activate special props, and those that output specific sounds. Preview effect patterns are executed in parallel with the symbol changes, and provide a preview of the high likelihood that the symbol changes will stop in a jackpot mode. For example, there is the standard preview effect, which simply displays a single character image on the screen, and the group preview effect, which displays a group of multiple characters passing from one end of the screen to the other. Further examples include step-up preview effects, which divide the preview effect display process into multiple stages, with the number of stages displayed being variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot.

Pre-announcement performance patterns include a pattern in which a performance is executed after the display mode of the decorative pattern 61 has reached a reach state, thereby announcing the final stopping mode of the pattern (post-reach notice), and a pattern in which a performance is executed before any decorative pattern 61 has stopped, simultaneously announcing that a reach state will be reached (pre-reach notice).

The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to display a preview effect on the effect display device 60 through a predetermined preview lottery based on the result of the win/loss lottery or the result of the preliminary determination, thereby setting the preliminary effect and determining the preview effect pattern to be displayed. The effect determination means 303 holds a preview determination table to be referenced when determining whether or not to display a preview effect, and a preview type table to be referenced when selecting the type of preview effect pattern. The preview determination table is set so that different columns are referenced depending on the result of the win/loss lottery or the result of the preliminary determination, and a correspondence between the result of the win/loss lottery determination and whether or not to display a preview effect is determined so that a preview effect is displayed with a higher probability if the win/loss lottery is a win than if it is a loss. As a result, the display of a preview effect itself can suggest a high level of expectation of a jackpot.

The performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a varying performance image including the decorative pattern 61 in accordance with the selected varying performance pattern data. The performance control means 304 determines that receipt of a command to start varying the decorative pattern 61 is the condition for starting the varying display of a new decorative pattern. When the performance determination means 303 determines that a preview performance is to be displayed, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a preview performance according to the selected preview performance pattern in a manner superimposed on the performance of the pattern change.

If the win/loss lottery value for the second win/loss lottery is stored, the performance control means 304 reserves the start of the pattern change display corresponding to the first win/loss lottery, and starts the pattern change display corresponding to the second win/loss lottery regardless of whether the win/loss lottery value for the first win/loss lottery is stored. As a result, if lottery values are reserved for both the first win/loss lottery and the second win/loss lottery, the reserved lottery value for the second win/loss lottery is read out first, and the decorative pattern change is displayed. In such a case, the reserved lottery value for the first win/loss lottery is not read out, and the decorative pattern change does not begin until the reserved number for the second win/loss lottery reaches 0. In this way, the performance control means 304 causes the performance display device 60 to display a pattern change performance including a change display of the decorative pattern 61.

The performance control means 304 further controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111 and the operation of the movable props 66. The performance control means 304 has a performance display control means 305, an audio control means 306, and a lamp control means 309. The performance display control means 305 controls the display on the performance display device 60, and the audio control means 306 controls the audio output from the speaker 108. The lamp control means 309 controls the turning on and off of the decorative lamps 111.

While the first special symbol 51 and second special symbol 52 are changing, the effect display device 60 must display an image indicating that the symbols are changing. Normally, a normal-sized decorative symbol 61 of a certain size is displayed changing, but a special effect in which the main effect content is something other than the changing decorative symbol 61 may be displayed in a manner that obstructs the visibility of the changing display of the normal-sized decorative symbol 61. In this case, the player is informed that the symbols are changing by displaying a changing substitute symbol, which is a decorative symbol smaller than the normal-sized decorative symbol. Hereinafter, when simply referring to a decorative symbol, it means a normal-sized decorative symbol, but when distinguishing it from the substitute symbol, the normal-sized decorative symbol will also be referred to as a "normal decorative symbol" or "main decorative symbol."

The alternative pattern is displayed while the visibility of the normal decorative pattern is impaired, for example, while the normal decorative pattern is hidden. The alternative pattern is a form of decorative pattern used to suggest the winning/losing result in a dramatic way, and has a display form that is simpler (in other words, more simplified) than the normal decorative pattern, and is displayed in a more simplified changing process than the normal decorative pattern. The alternative pattern has an external display form that corresponds to the part of the normal decorative pattern that indicates the pattern type, for example, a display form that shows numbers, letters, or symbols that indicate the pattern type. Furthermore, the alternative pattern is displayed in a smaller area than the area in which the normal decorative pattern is displayed, and is typically displayed in a position that does not interfere with the main effect caused by elements other than the pattern, for example, in the corner of the screen of the effect display device 60. The alternative pattern is displayed relatively smaller than the normal decorative pattern, but has a display form that at least makes the pattern type identifiable visually. The alternative pattern may be a scaled-down version of the normal decorative pattern, or may be identical to the normal decorative pattern except for its size.

The multiple alternative symbols displayed in place of multiple normal decorative symbols indicate the high probability that the winning/losing lottery result will be favorable to the player, depending on the combination of stop patterns at the end of the variation. For example, the multiple alternative symbols indicate a high probability of a jackpot in that variation when two of the three alternative symbols are aligned, creating a ready-to-win state. Furthermore, the left and right symbols in the ready-to-win state may be specific types of symbols, such as "3" or "7," that indicate a relatively high probability of winning, or specific types of symbols, such as "1" or "2," that indicate a relatively low probability of winning, to indicate the high or low probability of winning. The alternative symbols do not appear to be in a definitively stopped state, but rather are in a provisionally stopped state where slight fluctuations are maintained. After the provisional stop of the alternative symbols, a normal decorative symbol may be displayed in place of the alternative symbol, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed in a definitively stopped state. Furthermore, the normal decorative symbol and the alternative symbol do not have to be displayed exclusively, but may overlap in their display periods. Furthermore, during a predetermined effect in which the visibility of the normal decorative symbols is impaired, the display of the normal decorative symbols may continue while the display of the alternative symbols is displayed. Unlike the alternative symbols, a simplified symbol, which indicates that the special symbols are changing, may be displayed in a predetermined area of the effect display device 60 as an image of the same size or smaller than the alternative symbols while the first special symbol 51 and the second special symbol 52 are changing. The simplified symbol may be configured as a three-symbol combination display, as with the normal decorative symbol, or as a single symbol display, or as a simple symbol (such as a circle or an x) that switches sequentially. The simplified symbol may not be related to the display modes of the normal decorative symbol or the alternative symbol, but may display a constant change from the start to the end of the special symbol change, and when the special symbol stops, it may be displayed in relation to the display mode of the normal decorative symbol. The simple symbols may be modified as needed, such as by displaying a combination of two symbols, as long as they indicate that a special symbol is changing and indicate the outcome of the special symbol. The simple symbols may also be referred to as "simple decorative symbols," "sub-decorative symbols," "sub-decorative symbols," "mini-decorative symbols," or "mini-decorative symbols." A decorative symbol called a fourth symbol, which displays a display equivalent to the simple symbol through an LED or other illumination, may also be used separately from the display device 60. The fourth symbol is used to indicate the progress of the game (display of the special symbol changing and the result) in the event of a malfunction in the display device 60. As an example of the display mode of the fourth symbol, the LED may sequentially light up (or flash, including being turned off) in the following colors: white, blue, green, yellow, orange, and red. Alternatively, the LED may flash a single color depending on the type of special symbol to indicate a changing display, and the color of the light emitted when the special symbol stops may indicate the type of miss or jackpot.

The timing means 307 is a timing circuit that outputs time information used in games. The timing means 307 is a timer circuit that uses a counter to measure the time since power was turned on and outputs the time information. However, it may also be a real-time clock circuit that has a built-in battery and can continue to measure the date and time using the battery even when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is turned off or during a power outage. With a real-time clock circuit, there is a possibility that slight differences in the time between each gaming machine may occur due to individual differences and time skew, whereas with a timer circuit, there is little chance of time differences occurring between multiple gaming machines as long as they are powered on at the same time.

The effect determination means 303 executes a synchronized effect that begins at a predetermined timing when the time information output by the timing means 307 indicates a predetermined time. The synchronized effect is an effect displayed on the effect display device 60 during a synchronized effect period, which is a period that is substantially asynchronous with the pattern change period and the game state. The synchronized effect period lasts for several minutes, is longer than the length of one pattern change period, and can encompass multiple pattern change periods. The synchronized effect effect patterns are stored in the pattern storage means 302, and the effect patterns involve the playback of predetermined music and video. Multiple synchronized effect effect patterns are provided, and different effect patterns can be selected depending on the date and time, such as the month, date, day of the week, and time of day.

Synchronization effects are executed regardless of whether normal gameplay or special gameplay is in progress. Here, "normal gameplay" includes the display of the so-called standby demo screen. Specifically, "normal gameplay" includes (1) "normal gameplay during variable display," in which symbols are displayed in a variable manner; (2) "normal gameplay during non-variable display," in which symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed; and (3) "normal gameplay during standby demo screen display," in which symbols are not displayed in a variable manner and the standby demo screen is not displayed. Synchronization effects can be executed during any of (1) through (3), but in (2) and (3), the output mode for controlling the synchronization effects, such as reducing the volume and brightness, may differ from that in (1). Furthermore, while the standby demo screen is displayed, the player can input information related to the mobile link system (described below) by operating the effect button 109 or the directional pad 110. When this input is made, the video and audio output of the synchronization effects is suppressed, and priority is given to the screen display, such as effect customization by the mobile link system.

A synchronized effect is, for example, an effect in which a specified piece of music or video is played at a specified time (referred to as the "synchronized effect start time"). The time that triggers the playback of the synchronized effect may be a time that arrives a specified time interval after the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on, or it may be every hour or half past the hour based on standard time. Alternatively, a time that can vary depending on the date or day of the week may be set. Rather than a fixed interval such as "every hour," the interval may vary, such as one hour first, then three hours later, or the interval may vary depending on the date or day of the week. The time may be variable, allowing gaming parlor staff to specify the time. However, the same synchronized effect is pre-set so that it is executed at at least the same time on multiple machines of the same model installed in the same gaming parlor. For example, if the specification is such that the trigger time arrives a specified time interval after powering on, multiple machines are powered on at the same time in the gaming parlor. As a result, the same synchronized effect is executed simultaneously on all of the multiple gaming machines when the specified time arrives. As a result, the effects are displayed simultaneously as if synchronized across multiple devices, and the same music and video are played simultaneously, creating a synergistic production effect that feels as if a live performance or movie screening is taking place on the spot.

The synchronized performance function is also built into other gaming machines of the same model, and multiple gaming machines in the same gaming center are turned on at the same time by gaming parlor staff every day. All of the multiple gaming machines that are turned on at the same time will reach the synchronized performance start time at almost the same time, allowing the synchronized performance to be carried out simultaneously. This is called a multi-machine synchronized performance. In this case, not only are the images displayed on multiple machines synchronized, but the output of sound effects and background music is also synchronized on multiple machines, and the more synchronized machines there are, the greater the synergistic effect of the simultaneous performance.

The effect setting means 308 stores the player's gaming history. The gaming history includes the gaming result history and the effect result history. The gaming result history is the gaming results that lead to the player's winnings as a result of the game, such as the number of hits, the number of winning balls, the number of jackpots, the number of special bonuses, and the number of time-saving bonuses. The effect result history is information such as the effect scores recorded to acquire benefits, such as the right to change the content or type of effects or the right to make certain types of effects appear more frequently, rather than the gaming benefits themselves. For example, to score the number of times a specific effect appears or the results of a mini-game, and award the score to the player, coded information indicating the score and gaming history, such as a two-dimensional code, is displayed on the screen. When the player reads and decodes the two-dimensional code with the camera on their mobile device, the score and gaming history information obtained by the decoded code are stored on the player's mobile device. The linking system between the gaming machine and the player's mobile device via the two-dimensional code will be described later. The points mentioned here are required to expand the scope of effect customization, which will be described later, and the number of customizable items increases when the points reach a certain cumulative value (for example, when 1000 points are reached, or every 100 points, etc.).

The effect setting means 308 stores settings for selecting from multiple effect content options as effect customization based on the player's selection instructions and game history. For example, multiple effect patterns with different motifs, characters, and music may be prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as effect patterns to be displayed during special play, and the player may select which of these effects to display. Alternatively, multiple motif or character designs may be prepared in the pattern storage means 302 as designs of images included in decorative patterns that change the design, and the player may select which of these designs to display. In such cases, the player may operate the effect button 109 or cross key 110 while the standby demo screen is displayed, and when an effect pattern is selected through this operation, the effect setting means 308 stores the selection. The effect determination means 303 selects the type of effect pattern to be displayed during special play according to the settings stored by the effect setting means 308.

The sub-initialization processing execution means 360 executes control start processing for the sub-board 300 when the pachinko gaming machine 100 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage. The sub-power-off processing execution means 362 executes abnormality response processing, such as power-off processing for the sub-board 300, when a power outage or other power abnormality occurs. The sub-error detection means 364 executes abnormality detection processing for the sub-board 300. When the sub-error detection means 364 detects a power outage, the sub-power-off processing execution means 362 backs up data in RAM to backup RAM as part of the power-off processing.

Figure 12 is a diagram showing a schematic overview of the mobile linkage system. As a prerequisite for the mobile linkage system, a player registers as a user by setting an account and password on the mobile terminal 354 with the game history server 358, which has a dedicated website. When the player presses the effect button 109 at the start of a game, the effect display control means 305 displays a two-dimensional code 350 encoding the address of the dedicated website of the game history server 358 on the screen of the effect display device 60, and has the player scan the code with the camera of the mobile terminal to access the dedicated website of the game history server 358. Character information (also referred to as "password information") encoding the player's identification information and effect score history is transmitted from the dedicated website to the mobile terminal and displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. The effect display control means 305 displays an input screen for the password information on the effect display device 60, and has the player input the password by operating buttons such as the cross key 110. The effect setting means 308 decrypts the entered password information and registers it as the player's identification information and effect score history, allowing the player to inherit the game details and effect score status from previous times. Entering this password information serves as an instruction to start recording the player's game history and an instruction to start effect customization, which selects various effect elements. Thereafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 100, as the game and effects progress, the effect setting means 308 adds points to be awarded to the player as effect benefits as needed, accumulating these points as effect score history, and the player can also perform effect customization at any time to select and set their preferred elements as various effect elements. Effect points are basically awarded with each symbol change, with higher points awarded for effect types with a higher likelihood of transitioning to special play, and high points are also awarded when transitioning to special play.

To customize effects, players can use a portion of their accumulated points to customize the effects displayed on the effect display device 60, including colors, backgrounds, shapes, characters, and music, depending on the number of points used. The effect setting means 308 receives instructions to change effect elements via button operation by the player and changes various effect elements in response to those instructions. Multiple types of customizable effect elements are available for each element, and different points are required for each item. Therefore, when the accumulated points reach a predetermined value, the number of customizable items increases, or an opportunity to increase the number of customizable items is granted. When the player operates a button to end the game or effect customization, the effect setting means 308 generates a two-dimensional code 350 encoding information such as effect bonuses and effect score history, which the effect display control means 305 displays on the effect display device 60. The player can then read the two-dimensional code 350 with the camera on their mobile device and decode the two-dimensional code 352 to obtain information that can be stored on the mobile device 354. This information is then sent from the mobile terminal 354 to a game history server 358 on a dedicated website via network 356, where it is linked to the player's account information and managed. In this way, information such as special effects and performance score history is transmitted to the mobile terminal 354 via the transmission means of displaying and reading the two-dimensional code 350, and managed by the game history server 358, allowing the game and performance details to be carried over to the next game. Furthermore, the longer the player continues playing, the more points can be earned as the number of symbol changes and performances increases.

Figure 13 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the main board 200 and sub-board 300. The main board 200 includes electronic components such as a main CPU 290, main RAM 291, and main ROM 292. The main ROM 292 pre-stores a main control program and data for controlling overall game operation. The main control program or data is loaded from the main ROM 292 into the main RAM 291, and the main control program is executed by the main CPU 290. The electronic components are connected via buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Ball entry signals from each ball entry port and payout signals from the payout control board 155 are acquired by the main CPU 290 via various interfaces (not shown). The main CPU 290 drives and controls external devices such as the winning port solenoids, the first special symbol display unit 41, and the second special symbol display unit 42 using various drive circuits (not shown). In addition, commands necessary for performance control are sent from the main CPU 290 to the sub-board 300, along with information such as the results of the lottery, the results of the symbol selection, and the results of the variation pattern selection. Signals are sent from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 via one-way communication.

The command data sent from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is a two-byte combination of one byte of command type data, known as MODE data, and one byte of command content data, known as EVENT data. The main board 200 can send a single command by associating the command type data with the command content data and sending it to the sub-board 300. The command type data is a bit string that indicates the type of command, and a unique type code is assigned to each command type in advance during the development stage. The command content data is a bit string that indicates the content of the command. The most significant bit of the command type data and command content data is an identification bit that indicates whether it is command type data or command content data; a most significant bit of 1 indicates command type data, and a most significant bit of 0 indicates command content data.

Communication from the main board 200 to the sub-board 300 is specified to send one byte of data per data transmission, so to send two bytes of command data, two transmissions of one byte each are required. The first communication sends the upper byte, MODE data, and the second communication sends the lower byte, EVENT data. To account for the possibility of communication failure due to noise, etc., the main board 200 sends the same data continuously, and when the same data has been read twice in succession by the sub-board 300, it determines that the transmission and reception of that data is complete. Until the same data has been read twice in succession, the main board 200 will repeatedly send the same data, up to a maximum of five times.

The sub-board 300 includes electronic components such as a sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, sub-ROM 312, and performance control device 313. Sub-ROM 312 is a data storage means for storing a sub-control program containing performance pattern data that defines the performance process and display pattern data that defines the performance display process. The sub-control program containing performance pattern data, display pattern data, and audio pattern data is loaded from sub-ROM 312 into sub-RAM 311, and performance control by the sub-control program is executed by sub-CPU 310. The electronic components are connected via buses such as a system bus and a data bus (not shown). Signals from external devices such as the performance button 109 are acquired by the sub-CPU 310 via various interfaces (not shown). In accordance with the performance pattern data, the sub-CPU 310 drives external devices such as the performance display device 60, speaker 108, decorative lamp 111, and movable props 66 via the performance control device 313 and various drive circuits and control circuits (not shown), thereby controlling display output, audio output, lamp illumination, and prop operation. The sub-CPU 310 transmits display pattern data and audio pattern data to the performance control device 313. Note that, although this embodiment describes an example in which the sub-board 300 includes the performance control device 313, the sub-board 300 and the performance control device 313 do not need to be integrated as a board, and may be formed as separate boards that are separated and connected to each other.

Figure 14 is a block diagram showing the hardware configuration of the effect control device 313. The effect control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, display control circuit 326, and audio control circuit 314. Data ROM 324 is a data storage means that stores compressed material data such as effect image data and motion data used for effect display, and audio data used for audio output. The effect image data is images used for variable display and effect display as effect objects showing the results of the win/lose lottery, such as sprite images of decorative patterns used for decorative pattern variation, sprite images used for preview effects, and video used for various effects. The motion data is data that defines the actions that are added to images used for various effects at predetermined timings for special effects. The audio data is audio data such as music, background sounds, sound effects, and character lines that are output during effects.

Based on the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310, the effect image data and motion data specified in that display pattern data are read from the data ROM 324 to the control RAM 322, and the effect display using that effect image data and motion data is executed by the control CPU 320. As a result, commands, effect image data, and motion data related to the effect display are sent from the control CPU 320 to the display control circuit 326, and the display is controlled by the display control circuit 326. Similarly, commands and audio data related to audio output are sent from the control CPU 320 to the audio control circuit 314, and the audio output is controlled by the audio control circuit 314.

The display control circuit 326 includes a decoder 332, drawing memory 334, drawing circuit 336, frame buffer 338, and display circuit 340, each of which is connected via bus 330. For convenience, the bus 330 in this diagram comprehensively represents buses such as a system bus, data bus, and address bus.

The performance image data and motion data sent from the control CPU 320 are stored in the drawing memory 334, and compressed data from this data is decoded by the decoder 332. The drawing memory 334 is a VRAM (Video RAM) that is used as a work area when the performance image data and motion data are decoded by the decoder 332, and as a work area when the drawing circuit 336 performs drawing and image processing.

The drawing circuit 336 uses the data stored in the drawing memory 334 to execute commands sent from the control CPU 320 in sequence to generate images for display, and stores the generated images for display as frames of moving images in the frame buffer 338. The frame buffer 338 is a VRAM that functions as a buffer memory for temporarily storing frames of moving images to be output to the performance display device 60.

The display circuit 340 outputs the display images stored in the frame buffer 338 to the performance display device 60 in the form of video signals in the order they were stored. The frame buffer 338 has a memory area for, for example, two frames, and while the display circuit 340 outputs a display image from the memory area for one frame, the drawing circuit 336 generates the next display image and stores it in the memory area for the other frame.

The data ROM 324 stores "detailed display pattern data" that defines the display control process performed by the display control circuit 326. At this time, the display pattern data sent from the sub-CPU 310 can be called "outline display pattern data" that defines the outline of the effect display process. For example, the outline display pattern data defines the general flow of the series of effect display processes, such as the timing at which decorative patterns start and stop changing, the playback order of multiple moving images, and the timing at which playback starts and stops. On the other hand, the detailed display pattern data defines the detailed display control process, such as the display order of sprite images used to realize the changing display of decorative patterns, and the frame-by-frame display processing order for displaying moving images based on motion data.

When the performance control device 313 performs display control based on "summary display pattern data" sent from the sub-CPU 310, it reads the "detailed display pattern data" required for that processing from the data ROM 324 and executes display processing using both sets of display pattern data. Therefore, the performance control device 313 can be said to execute display control processing based on display pattern data including "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data." Therefore, in this specification, unless explicitly stated, the "summary display pattern data" stored in the sub-ROM 312 and the "detailed display pattern data" stored in the data ROM 324 are not distinguished from each other and are simply referred to as "display pattern data." For example, when the performance control means executes specific processing based on display pattern data stored in the data storage means, this display pattern data is deemed to include both "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data." Note that in a modified example, the display pattern data may not be divided into "summary display pattern data" and "detailed display pattern data," and display pattern data that serves both purposes may be stored in the sub-ROM 312 or the data ROM 324.

In this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the performance control device 313 includes a control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326. In a modified example, the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, data ROM 324, and display control circuit 326 may be integrated rather than configured as separate electronic components. Furthermore, the processing performed by the display control circuit 326 may be performed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324. For example, the control CPU 320 included in the performance control device 313 may perform the processing performed by the decoder 332, drawing circuit 336, and display circuit 340 included in the display control circuit 326. Furthermore, the control RAM 322 included in the performance control device 313 may also function as the drawing memory 334 and frame buffer 338. Alternatively, the performance control device 313 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the display control circuit 326, in which case the processing that is supposed to be executed by the display control circuit 326 may be executed by the control CPU 320, control RAM 322, or data ROM 324.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hardware configuration of the sub-board 300 includes the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, and sub-ROM 312, as well as the performance control device 313. In a modified example, the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, ROM 312, and performance control device 313 may be integrated rather than configured as separate electronic components. Furthermore, the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312. For example, the sub-CPU 310 may perform the processing of the control CPU 320, the sub-RAM 311 may also function as the control RAM 322, or the sub-ROM 312 may also function as the data ROM 324. Alternatively, the sub-board 300 may have a hardware configuration that does not include the performance control device 313, in which case the processing performed by the performance control device 313 may be performed by the sub-CPU 310, sub-RAM 311, or sub-ROM 312.

Figure 15 is a flowchart showing the control start process of the main board 200 in a pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the main initialization process execution means 280, but from here on, it will be described as being executed by the main CPU 290 functioning as the main initialization process execution means 280. When the power switch 150 is turned on, the main CPU 290 sets a stack pointer (S100), permits access to the main RAM 291 (S102), and performs initial settings related to the hardware, such as setting the main CPU 290's internal registers (S104).

The main CPU 290 checks the operation status of the setting key, and if the setting key is ON (Y in S105), checks the operation status of the RAM clear switch. If the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S122), it executes setting change processing (S124). On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch is OFF (N in S122), it executes setting confirmation processing (S126). Note that if the setting key is OFF in S105 (N in S105), processing of S122 to S126 is skipped.

Next, power-off recovery processing or main RAM 291 initialization processing is performed depending on the operating state of the RAM clear switch, the value of the power-off information flag, and the state of the data stored in main RAM 291. Specifically, if the RAM clear switch is not turned on and both the value of the power-off information flag and the data stored in main RAM 291 are normal, power-off recovery processing is performed. In other cases, that is, if the RAM clear switch is turned on, or if the RAM clear switch is not turned on but either the power-off information flag or the data stored in main RAM 291 is abnormal, main RAM 291 initialization processing is performed.

The main CPU 290 checks the operating state of the RAM clear switch, and if the RAM clear switch is ON (Y in S106), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the RAM clear switch is not ON (N in S106), the main CPU 290 checks the value of the power-off information flag (S108). If the value of the power-off information flag does not match the normal power-off data (N in S108), initializes the main RAM 291 (S116). If the value of the power-off information flag matches the normal power-off data (Y in S108), inspects the data stored in the main RAM 291 (S110). As described below, if processing was completed normally during the previous power-off, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is stored in the main RAM 291, and the main CPU 290 inspects the data in the main RAM 291 using the checksum. If the data stored in the main RAM 291 is not normal (N in S112), initializes the data in the main RAM 291 (S116). If the data stored in the main RAM is normal (Y in S112), processing is performed to restore the state before the power was turned off (S114).

During the power failure recovery process (S114), normal power-on data indicating that the power was turned on normally is stored in the power failure information flag, and various error initializations and communication initialization with the payout control board 155 are performed. Next, any command requests that have not been sent before the power failure are cleared, and a request is made to send commands for various information indicating the game status. Next, a request is made for performance commands corresponding to the number of balls pending activation for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. Next, the open/closed status of the second start port 12 and the large prize port 20 is restored to the status before the power failure. Next, a process is executed to notify the activation status of the special pattern probability fluctuation function.

In the RAM initialization process (S116), normal power-on data is stored in the power-off information flag, the entire main RAM 291 is cleared to 0, and the main RAM 291 is initialized and the performance display is initialized. Note that in the initialization process of S116, the setting values stored in the setting memory of the setting change device 170 are not cleared, and the setting values set in the setting change process of S124 are retained as they are.

When the power-off recovery process (S114) or RAM initialization process (S116) is completed, a count value is set to activate the interrupt process described below, and the interrupt timer begins operation (S118). Thereafter, a timer interrupt occurs every predetermined time (e.g., 4 milliseconds), and the interrupt process described below is executed. Next, the main CPU 290 executes the main process for managing the gaming machine (S120).

Figure 16 is a flowchart detailing the setting change process of S124 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is checked, and if the setting memory value is incorrect (N in S132), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S134). If "1" to "6" are used as setting value data, "1" is set as the initial value. If "0" to "5" are used as setting value data, "0" is set as the initial value. If the setting memory value is correct (Y in S132), processing of S134 is skipped. Next, the system transitions to a setting change state (S136), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S138). If a change operation is performed using the setting change button 172 (Y in S140), the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 173 is updated, and the setting value stored in the setting memory is updated (S142). If no change operation is performed (N in S140), processing of S142 is skipped. If the setting key remains ON (N in S144), the processes of S138 to S142 are repeated. If the setting key inserted into the setting key cylinder 171 is returned to its original position and turned OFF (Y in S144), the setting display unit 173 is hidden so that the setting value cannot be seen (S146), and the process returns.

Figure 17 is a flowchart showing in detail the setting confirmation process of S126 in Figure 15. The value of the setting memory where the game setting value should be stored is confirmed, and if the setting memory value is not normal (N in S152), the setting value is initialized to the initial value (S154). If the setting memory value is normal (Y in S152), processing of S154 is skipped. The system transitions to the setting confirmation state (S156), and the setting value stored in the setting memory is displayed on the setting display unit 173 (S158). If the setting key remains ON (N in S160), processing of S158 is repeated to continue displaying the setting value. If the setting key is turned OFF (Y in S160), the setting display unit 173 is hidden to make the setting value invisible (S162), and the system returns.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S120 in Figure 15. The main CPU 290 temporarily disables timer interrupts (S200), starts the watchdog timer (S202), and monitors for power interruption (S204). When a drop in the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 158 is detected by a power supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown), an unconditional interrupt request signal is input from the power supply voltage monitoring circuit to the main CPU 290, and power interruption confirmation data is stored in a power interruption confirmation flag during power interruption storage processing. Therefore, the main CPU 290 monitors the value of the power interruption confirmation flag (S204). If the value of the power interruption confirmation flag matches the power interruption confirmation data (Y in S206), the process proceeds to S212 to execute processing for power interruption. If the value of the power-off confirmation flag does not match the power-off confirmation data (N in S206), the initial random number update process is executed (S208) to update the initial random number for the normal symbol, the initial random number for the special symbol, and the software initial random number for the special symbol, and then a timer interrupt is permitted (S210), and processing returns to S200. From then on, S200 to S210 are repeated. If a timer interrupt occurs while timer interrupts are prohibited (S202 to S208), the timer interrupt is permitted in S210, and the interrupt processing described below is executed.

If a power outage is detected in S206 (Y in S206), the main CPU 290 restarts the watchdog timer (S212) and checks the contents of the power outage information flag (S214). If the contents of the power outage information flag do not match the power-on normal data (N in S214), it determines that the data at power-on was not saved correctly, stores abnormal power outage data in the power outage information flag (S216), and proceeds to S222. If the contents of the power outage information flag match the power-on normal data (Y in S214), it determines that the data at power-on was saved correctly, and stores normal power outage data in the power outage information flag (S218). Next, to verify the backed-up data in the main RAM 291 the next time the power is turned on, the checksum of the data stored in the main RAM 291 is calculated and stored in the main RAM 291 (S220). Next, access to the main RAM 291 is prohibited (S222), and the process loops until the power is turned off. The above power-off processing is executed by the main power-off processing execution means 282, which is implemented by the main CPU 290.

Figure 19 is a flowchart showing details of the interrupt process. When a timer interrupt occurs during the main process (S120), the main CPU 290 executes the interrupt process. First, the interrupt operation conditions are set (S300), and the watchdog timer is restarted (S302). Next, to manage the gaming machine, input processing (S304), various random number update processing (S306), initial value update type random number update processing (S308), initial value random number update processing (S310), timer subtraction processing (S312), second start port validity period setting processing (S314), winning monitoring processing (S316), prize ball control processing (S318), normal symbol activation gate monitoring processing (S320), normal symbol control processing (S322), normal symbol variation start monitoring processing (S324), start port monitoring control processing (S326), special symbol control processing (S328), and special electric device control processing (S330) are performed. ), Large prize slot validity period setting process (S332), Special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S334), Abnormality detection process (S336), Ball entry passing time abnormality detection process (S338), Game status display process (S340), Handle status signal inspection process (S342), LED output process (S344), Launch control signal output process (S346), Test signal output process (S348), Solenoid output process (S350), Presentation control command transmission process (S352), External information output process (S354) are executed in this order, the next timer interrupt is permitted (S356), and the process returns.

Input processing (S304) monitors input port data for switches attached to the game board, open/short circuit/power supply abnormality detection signals, door/frame open signals, magnetic detection signals, radio wave detection signals, and touch status signals, and creates data indicating the input status and stores it in main RAM 291. This input status data consists of level data (input port data at the time of the current interrupt) and rising or falling data (data indicating switches that have been found to have switched by comparing the input port data at the time of the current interrupt with the input port data at the time of the previous interrupt using an exclusive OR).

In the various random number update process (S306), the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number and fluctuation pattern random number are updated. The normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the value is less than a predetermined maximum value, the value is incremented and stored, and if the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined maximum value, 0 is stored. Also, the fluctuation pattern random number is read from main RAM 291, and if the result of subtracting a predetermined value from the value is equal to or greater than 0, the subtraction result is stored, and if it is less than 0, the predetermined maximum value is stored. In this way, the normal symbol fluctuation pattern random number and fluctuation pattern random number are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs.

In the initial value update type random number update process (S308), the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the software random number per special symbol are updated. The value, maximum value, and initial value of each random number are read from main RAM 291, and the random number value is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the maximum value, the random number value is set to 0. If the increment result matches the initial value, the initial value random number is read from main RAM 291 and the initial value is updated. As a result, the random number per normal symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the software random number per special symbol are updated every time a timer interrupt occurs, and when the random number value returns to the initial value, i.e., when one cycle of the random number range has been completed, a new initial value is set and a random number is generated.

In the initial value random number update process (S310), the initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are updated. The initial value random number is read from the initial value random number update table in main RAM 291, and the value of the initial value random number is incremented. If the increment result exceeds the upper limit, the value of the initial value random number is set to 0. Similar processing is also performed in the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main processing (S120).

In the timer subtraction process (S312), the 2-byte timer is updated. The values of the timers for various controls are read from the main RAM 291 according to the respective tables, and if the timer value is other than 0, the value is sequentially decremented and stored. If the timer value is 0, the timer is not updated.

The second start port valid period setting process (S314) sets the valid period of the second start port 12. The second start port 12 is set with a valid period during which prize balls are paid out and a lottery for the second special pattern is held when a game ball enters the port, and an invalid period during which prize balls are not paid out and a lottery for the second special pattern is not held even if a game ball enters the port. As will be described later, the start port monitoring control process (S326) does not execute the second start port entry monitoring process during the invalid period of the second start port 12, so that even if a game ball enters the second start port 12, prize balls are not paid out and a lottery for the second special pattern is not held. The same applies when valid periods and invalid periods are set for the first start port 11, the large prize port 20, the first actuation port 31, the second actuation port 32, the general prize port 33, etc. If the state of the normal symbol is "normal electric device in operation," the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period. If the state of the normal symbol is not "normal electric device in operation," and the value of the second start port valid extension timer is not 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port 12 is in its valid period, and if the value of the second start port valid extension timer is 0, the second start port valid period flag is stored with data indicating that the second start port is in its invalid period.

During the winning monitoring process (S316), the game ball passing through the switch is checked, and when the game ball passes through the switch, if the switch is not in an invalid period or is currently in an valid period, and if a prize ball has been paid out, the winning counter is updated. It also requests the creation of a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160 and the transmission of a command.

During the prize ball control process (S318), the following processes are performed in sequence: monitoring data reception from the payout control board 155, requesting command transmission to the payout control board 155, transmitting the command to the payout control board 155, and inspecting the data received from the payout control board 155.

In the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320), the passage of the gaming ball through the first activation port 31 and the second activation port 32 is monitored, and when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of four, the number of reserved normal symbols is updated, and a random number related to the normal symbol is stored in main RAM 291.

In the normal pattern control process (S322), the state of the normal pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that normal pattern control is in progress, processing related to the normal pattern display unit 45 or the normal electric device 90 is executed. If the normal pattern state is "normal pattern changing," normal pattern changing processing is executed; if it is "normal pattern stop pattern displaying," normal pattern stop pattern display processing is executed; if it is "normal electric device operating," normal electric device operating processing is executed; and if it is "normal electric device operation end demo in progress," normal electric device operation end demo processing is executed. In the normal pattern changing processing, after the normal pattern changes, the change time is monitored, and if it is determined that the normal pattern change time has ended, a stop setting for the normal pattern change is executed and the normal pattern state is set to "normal pattern stop pattern displaying." In the normal pattern stop pattern display processing, the display time of the normal pattern stop pattern is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the normal pattern stop pattern has ended, a stop setting for the normal pattern operation corresponding to the result of the win determination is executed. In the case of a win, the state of the normal symbol is set to "normal electric device in operation", the operating state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time the normal electric device started operating is saved, and the operation setting of the normal electric device solenoid 91 corresponding to the operating state of the normal electric device opening extension function at the time the normal electric device started operating is executed. In the case of a loss, the state of the normal symbol is set to "standby for normal symbol change". In the normal electric device operation processing, the entry of game balls into the winning slots related to the normal electric device 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the number of winning balls into the winning slots related to the normal electric device 90 has reached the maximum number of winning balls, the operation end setting of the normal electric device 90 and the setting of the effective extension time of the second start slot are executed. If it is determined that the number of wins at the winning slots related to the normal electric device 90 has not reached the maximum number of wins, the opening/closing time of the winning slot entrance related to the normal electric device 90 is monitored, and the opening/closing of the winning slot entrance related to the normal electric device 90 is set. If it is determined that the series of openings of the entrances of the normal electric device 90 has ended, the operation end setting of the normal electric device 90 and the effective extension time of the second start slot are set. Note that if it is determined that the opening/closing time of the winning slot entrance related to the normal electric device 90 has not ended, the opening/closing setting of the winning slot entrance related to the normal electric device 90 is not executed. During the normal electric device operation end demo processing, the operation end demo time of the normal electric device 90 is monitored, and if it is determined that the operation end demo time of the normal electric device 90 has ended, the state of the normal pattern is set to "waiting for normal pattern change."

The normal pattern change start monitoring process (S324) monitors the state of the normal pattern, and if it is "waiting for normal pattern change" and the value of the number of balls reserved for normal pattern activation is other than 0, it decides to start changing the normal pattern. If it decides to start changing the normal pattern, it decrements the number of balls reserved for normal pattern activation, and performs a win determination, determines the stopping pattern, sets the normal pattern change pattern number, and sets the normal pattern change time. After that, it sets the state of the normal pattern to "normal pattern changing", and clears the area of main RAM 291 used for setting the normal pattern state, determining a win, and determining the change pattern.

The start gate monitoring control process (S326) monitors the entry of game balls into the first start gate 11 and the second start gate 12. If a game ball is confirmed to have entered when the number of activated reserved balls for the first special symbol is less than four, a built-in random number is acquired, and the value obtained by adding the value of the software random number for the special symbol to the acquired built-in random number is stored in a buffer as the special symbol random number used to determine a jackpot. Additionally, a pattern random number and a variable pattern random number are acquired and stored as random numbers related to the special symbol. If the reserved second special symbol is consumed prior to the reserved first special symbol, only the reserved number related to the winning is updated. However, if the reserved special symbol consumption order is the winning order, the reserved number related to the winning is updated, and the total number of reserved balls and winning order are stored. Next, the status of the gaming machine is checked to request a preview effect command corresponding to the random number stored when the game ball entered the start gate. If it is determined that a command transmission period is in effect, a win preview effect request, a winning symbol preview effect request, and a pattern preview effect request are executed in that order. Here, a command transmission period is determined to be in one of the following cases: (1) when a random number for the first special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol is not activated; (2) when a random number for the second special symbol is stored while waiting for a win and the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol is not activated; or (3) when a random number for the second special symbol is stored during a big win or a small win. Next, a display command corresponding to the number of balls reserved for activation of the special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of balls reserved for activation of the special symbol has been updated. As described above, in the pre-reading process, four pieces of information, including pre-determination information (pre-win/failure determination information, pre-determination information, pre-pattern determination information), and the number of reserved balls, are transmitted to the sub-board 300 as a set. Note that in the above example, the main CPU 290 controlled the transmission of commands for the pre-determination process. In another example, transmissions may be uniformly performed when a ball enters the starting hole, and various situational determinations, such as whether or not a pre-reading period is in effect, may be performed by the sub-CPU 310. Next, the value of the second start port valid period flag is checked, and if the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in a valid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is executed, as in the case of a first start port winning. If the value of the second start port valid period flag is data indicating that the second start port 12 is in an invalid period, the second start port winning monitoring process is not executed. Note that if a game ball winning is confirmed when the number of reserved balls is 0, the number of reserved balls is first changed from 0 to 1, and the control process related to the start of fluctuation, described below, is executed.

In the special symbol control process (S328), the waiting state for a win is checked. If the special electric device is operating, i.e., a big win or small win is occurring, the special symbol control process is terminated. If the special electric device is not operating, the state of the special symbol is checked. If it is "waiting for special symbol change," the general special symbol control process is terminated. If it is "change start," the special symbol change start process is executed. If it is "special symbol changing," the special pattern change in progress process is executed. If it is "special symbol stop pattern display," the special pattern stop pattern display process is executed. In the special symbol change start process, the selection number of the special symbol change pattern is obtained based on the change pattern random number, the change time corresponding to the special symbol change pattern number is determined, and commands for change additional symbol information, change pattern, and character information are requested from the sub-board 300 to start the effect display. The special symbol state is set to "special pattern changing," and the change pattern determination area used to determine the special symbol change pattern is cleared to 0. In the special symbol variation processing, after the special symbol varies, the variation time is monitored, and if it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol has ended, a setting to stop the variation of the special symbol is made, and the state of the special symbol is set to "special symbol stopped symbol being displayed." In the special symbol stopped symbol display processing, the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol is monitored, and if it is determined that the display time of the special symbol stopped symbol has ended, a setting to end the operation of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the win determination is executed. In the event of a jackpot, the state of the special symbol is set to "waiting for special symbol change" to terminate the operation of the special symbol, the number of times the special electric device will operate consecutively is set, the special symbol probability change function, special symbol change time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol change time reduction function, and normal electric device opening extension function are deactivated, the state of the gaming machine is set to preparing to open the large prize opening, and the settings for the hit start demo display time, the command request for the hit start demo performance, and the command request for the launch position designation performance (a command request to execute a performance that suggests a recommended launch position such as "hit right") are executed. If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the system determines whether the special symbol change time reduction function and the normal symbol probability change function have finished operating, updates the change pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and sets the special symbol state to "standby for special symbol change" to end the operation of the special symbol, sets the gaming machine state to the small hit start demo, and executes a command request for the hit start demo display time, a command request for the hit start demo presentation, and a command request for the launch position designation presentation.If the result of the hit determination is a miss, the system determines whether the special symbol change time reduction function and the normal symbol probability change function have finished operating, updates the change pattern selection state, requests a command for the game state, and sets the special symbol state to "standby for special symbol change" to end the operation of the special symbol, and executes a command request for the launch position designation presentation.

In the special electric device control process (S330), the operating status of the condition device and special electric device is checked to execute processing related to the special electric device. If it is determined that the condition device or the special electric device is operating, processing related to the special electric device is executed. Depending on the operating status of the special electric device, processing is executed for preparing to open the large prize opening, processing while the special electric device is operating, processing while the large prize opening is closing, processing during the large prize end demo, processing during the small prize start demo, processing during the small prize special power operation, processing while the small prize large prize opening is closing, and processing during the small prize end demo.

In the large prize slot validity period setting process (S332), in order to save the results of the validity period determination for the large prize slot 20, if the large prize slot validity time value is 0, the large prize slot invalid period data is stored in the large prize slot validity period flag, and if it is other than 0, the large prize slot validity period data is stored in the large prize slot validity period flag.

The special symbol change start monitoring and control process (S334) monitors the activation status of the special symbol and determines whether the special symbol is ready to change. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is priority consumption for the second special symbol, it is determined that the special symbol is ready to change when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the game is not in a big win or small win state, (2) the first special symbol is waiting to change, (3) the second special symbol is waiting to change, and (4) the number of activated reserved balls for the special symbol is other than zero. If the order of consumption of reserved balls for the special symbol is the order of winning, it is determined that the special symbol is ready to change when, in addition to (1) through (3) above, all of the following conditions are met: (5) the total number of reserved balls for the special symbol is other than zero, and (6) this determination matches the consumption order, i.e., the order of winning.

If it is determined that the special symbol is ready to begin changing, the number of reserved balls for that special symbol is subtracted, and a performance command corresponding to the number of reserved balls for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is requested. This notifies the sub-board 300 that the number of reserved balls for the special symbol has been updated.

Next, a hit determination for the special symbol is performed. In the hit determination, the special symbol hit random number is used to determine whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss, and the determination result is stored in the special symbol determination flag. Next, the symbol is determined. In determining the symbol, if the hit determination is a big hit, the big hit symbol is determined based on the special symbol hit random number; if it is a small hit, the small hit symbol is determined; and if it is a miss, the miss symbol is determined.

If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot, the operation details of the special symbol probability fluctuation function are determined based on the value of the group determination number, which indicates the type of winning symbol determined in the symbol determination process, and the game state after the jackpot is set, such as the operation details of the special symbol fluctuation time reduction function and the setting of the easy winning state for normal symbols. Next, settings during the jackpot are executed, such as the number of times the special electric device will operate consecutively and the details of the opening time for the large prize opening. Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referenced after the jackpot is completed based on the result of the hit determination and the operating state of the normal symbol probability fluctuation function. Next, the start demo time and end demo time are set by referencing the table selected based on the game state and the value of the group determination number, which indicates the type of winning symbol. Next, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit determination and symbol determination is cleared, and the state of the special symbol is set to "variation start."

If the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the contents of the fluctuation pattern selection state are set by selecting the fluctuation pattern table to be referenced after the small hit ends, the start demo time and end demo time are set, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit determination and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "start fluctuation." If the result of the hit determination is a miss, the area of main RAM 291 used for hit determination and pattern determination is cleared, and the state of the special pattern is set to "start fluctuation."

During the abnormality detection process (S336), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, checks the magnetic detection signal, open/short circuit power supply abnormality detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and door/frame open signal. If there is a change in the error state, it stores the error state and requests the sub-board 300 to display an error state presentation for the gaming machine. At this time, the light-emitting mode of a light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the error state. If there is no change in the error state, the request to store the error state and display an error state presentation is not executed.

During the ball passing time abnormality detection process (S338), the main CPU 290, functioning as the main error detection means 284, monitors the continuous on time of each switch level to detect an abnormality in the ball passing time. If it determines that the continuous on time (for example, the value of a counter that increments with each interrupt when the switch is on) is abnormal, it sequentially sets an abnormality in the ball passing time, requests the transmission of a command, and creates a security output request to be output to the external information output terminal 160. At this time, the light emission mode of a light-emitting means such as an LED mounted on the control board may be controlled according to the abnormality in the ball passing time. If it determines that the continuous on time is not abnormal, it does not create a security output request.

During the game status display process (S340), display data is created to request the display of the number of times the special electric device has been activated in succession, the error status, the number of activated balls for normal symbols, and the number of activated balls for special symbols.

In the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S342), the steering wheel state is inspected to monitor the steering wheel touch state. If the inspection determines that there has been a change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is decremented, the steering wheel state is updated, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set, and a steering wheel state presentation command transmission request is executed. If the inspection determines that there has been no change in the steering wheel state, the steering wheel state monitoring timer is set. If the result of decrementing the steering wheel state monitoring timer is other than 0, it is determined that the timer is decrementing, and no further processing is executed.

In the LED output process (S344), the display is initialized, and display data is acquired and output in order to display the special symbol, the normal symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the special symbol, the number of balls reserved for activation of the normal symbol, the game status, the number of times the special electric device will operate in succession, the operating status of the special electric device when the device continuous operation device is not activated, the type of shot, the error, and the prize ball ratio.

In the launch control signal output process (S346), in order to output a signal prohibiting/allowing the launch of game balls, the communication status with the payout control board 155, the launch prohibition/allowance setting corresponding to the disconnection/short circuit/power supply abnormality, and the launch prohibition/allowance data are acquired, and then the launch prohibition/allowance signal is output.

In the test signal output process (S348), a signal to be output to the test device is created and output to the corresponding output port.

In the solenoid output process (S350), in order to output the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 and the special prize opening solenoid 92, the output data of the normal electric role solenoid 91 is acquired, the output data of the special prize opening solenoid 92 is acquired, and the output data is output. The operation flag and operation timer of each solenoid are acquired, and output data corresponding to the acquired solenoid operation flag and solenoid operation timer is acquired. Next, the solenoid operation timer is updated, and the output data is output to the solenoid output port.

During the performance control command transmission process (S352), the presence or absence of a request to send a command to the sub-board 300 is checked, and if a transmission request is determined to exist, the requested command data is acquired, the command buffer used is cleared to 0, MODE data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, the MODE data is output, the MODE data is retained, EVENT data corresponding to the acquired command data is acquired, and the EVENT data is output.

In the external information output process (S354), a signal to be output to the external information output terminal 160 is created, and the created signal is output to the external information output port.

The random numbers used in the operation process of the main board 200 described above will now be explained in more detail. The random numbers used by the main board 200 mainly include random numbers related to normal symbols, such as normal symbol random numbers and normal symbol variation pattern random numbers, and random numbers related to special symbols, such as special symbol random numbers (hard random numbers), special symbol soft random numbers, special symbol pattern random numbers, and variation pattern random numbers. Additionally, the random numbers used to provide the initial values for the initial value update type random numbers, such as normal symbol random numbers, special symbol pattern random numbers, and special symbol soft random numbers, include normal symbol initial value random numbers, special symbol pattern initial value random numbers, and special symbol soft initial value random numbers.

The normal symbol random number is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. When the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process determines that the gaming ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol random number is obtained from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol random number is used to determine a win and the stopping symbol when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that a normal symbol variation should be started.

The normal symbol variation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 232, for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. When the normal symbol activation gate monitoring process (S320) of the interrupt process determines that the gaming ball has passed through the first activation port 31 or the second activation port 32, and if the number of reserved normal symbol variations is less than the upper limit of four, the normal symbol variation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291. The normal symbol variation pattern random number is used to determine the normal symbol variation pattern when it is determined in the normal symbol variation start monitoring process (S324) that a normal symbol variation should be started.

The special symbol random number is generated by obtaining the values of the built-in random number and the software random number for the special symbol and adding them together when a winning game ball is confirmed during the start gate monitoring control process (S326) of the interrupt process when the number of activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four, and is stored in a specified location in main RAM 291. The special symbol random number is used to perform big hit and small hit determinations during the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The software random number for a special symbol is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in main RAM 291. The software random number for a special symbol is obtained from a predetermined location in main RAM 291 when a winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of activated balls for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four, and is used to generate the random number for a special symbol, as described above.

The special symbol winning symbol random number takes a value between 0 and 999 (0 to 255 in the example of Figure 7), for example, and is updated in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in main RAM 291. The special symbol winning symbol random number is obtained from a predetermined location in main RAM 291 and stored in another area of main RAM 291 when a winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of activation balls reserved for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is less than four. The special symbol winning symbol random number is used to determine the winning symbol when the winning judgment is a jackpot in the special symbol change start monitoring control process (S334) of the interrupt process.

The fluctuation pattern random number takes a value between 0 and 49999 (0 to 255 in the example of Figure 8), for example, and is updated in the various random number update processes (S306) of the interrupt process and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The fluctuation pattern random number is obtained from a predetermined location in the main RAM 291 and stored in another area of the main RAM 291 when a winning game ball is confirmed in the start gate monitoring control process (S326) when the number of activated balls for the first special pattern or the second special pattern is less than four. The fluctuation pattern random number is used to determine the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the special pattern control process (S328) of the interrupt process.

The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol each take values in the same range as the normal symbol random number, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol, and are updated in the initial value random number update process (S208) of the main processing (S120) and the initial value random number update process (S310) of the interrupt processing, and stored in a predetermined location in the main RAM 291. The initial value random number per normal symbol, the initial value random number per special symbol, and the soft initial value random number per special symbol are used as the initial values of the respective random numbers when updating the normal symbol random number, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol in the initial value update type random number update process (S308).

The interrupt process is executed at regular intervals by a timer interrupt, and therefore the various random number update processes (S306) and initial value update type random number update processes (S308) included in the interrupt process are also executed at regular intervals. That is, the random number per normal symbol, the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the random number per special symbol, the soft random number per special symbol, the pattern random number per special symbol, and the variation pattern random number are updated at regular intervals. In contrast, the main process (S120) is repeated from the end of the interrupt process until the next timer interrupt occurs, i.e., for the period of time calculated by subtracting the time required for the interrupt process from the fixed time measured by the timer. The time required for the interrupt process varies depending on factors such as the game status, and therefore the initial value random number update process (S208) in the main process (S120) is not executed at regular intervals, unlike the various random number update processes (S306) and the initial value update type random number update process (S308). This allows the initial value random number obtained when setting the initial value in the initial value update type random number update process (S308) to be random each time.

Figure 20 is a flowchart illustrating the control start process for the sub-board 300 in a pachinko gaming machine. This control start process is executed by the sub-initialization execution means 360, but hereafter, it will be described as being executed by the sub-CPU 310 functioning as the sub-initialization execution means 360. When control of the sub-board 300 begins, the sub-CPU 310 sets a stack pointer (S500), prohibits all interrupts until various initial settings are completed (S502), and performs hardware initialization such as register setting and port initialization (S504). The control program is read from the sub-ROM 312 and placed in the sub-RAM 311. Various variables in the control program are initialized by setting their initial values and setting zero-clear data for variables without initial values (S506). The interrupt processes executed by the sub-board 300 with the highest priority include the process at power-on and the reset process when various abnormalities occur while the watchdog function is enabled. The next highest priority level 7 interrupt is command processing received from the main board 200, followed by a reset process when a CPU runaway is detected by the watchdog timer at priority level 3. Next highest priority level 2 interrupts are processes related to commands sent to and received from the control CPU 320, and the lowest priority level 1 interrupts are communication processes with the real-time clock and various device control processes for lamps, solenoids, motors, etc. If multiple interrupts related to the above processes occur simultaneously, the highest priority interrupt, which is preset for each type, is executed first. The processes shown in this diagram include the highest priority level interrupts, power-on processing and reset processes when various abnormalities occur, and the priority level 3 interrupt, reset processes when a CPU runaway is detected.

Interrupts (priority level 7) other than commands received from the main board 200 are prohibited (S510), and various error information to be used for that model is set from all pre-stored error information for all models (S512). All lamps, including the decorative lamp 111, are turned off (S514), the watchdog timer starts operating (S516), and main processing is executed (S518). Normally, the flow does not return from the main processing in S518, but when it does return, it transitions to sleep (low power consumption mode) (S520).

Figure 21 is a flowchart showing in detail the main processing of S518 in Figure 20. To check whether the control program placed in sub-RAM 311 in S506 of Figure 20 is correctly placed within the main processing of this figure, the starting address for this check is obtained (S530), all interrupts are permitted in the subsequent processing (S532), and initialization operations are performed for devices such as motors and solenoids (S534).

If the watchdog timer is set to be used, the watchdog timer is cleared (S536), the decorative symbol counter is updated so that the losing decorative symbol combinations are random (S540), and the input port of the sub-CPU 310 is monitored (S542). Note that S540 is a process for determining the losing decorative symbol using a counter; therefore, if the losing decorative symbol is determined using a lottery sheet incorporating all symbol combinations that result in a losing symbol, S540 is not executed. The process for determining the losing decorative symbol using the lottery sheet is executed when a command indicating the special symbol stop pattern is received from the main board 200, as described below in S552. The sub-CPU 310, functioning as the sub-error detection means 364, monitors the error status and, if an error is detected, reports the error (S544), executes processing according to the input status of the effect button 109 (S546), and executes the preview lottery (S548). In addition, in the advance notice lottery in S548, in order to send as early as possible to the effect control device 313 a command for the advance notice effect to be made to appear immediately after the start of the pattern change, the lottery process is not processed in a single loop but is divided into multiple loops, and the advance notice effect to be made to appear immediately after the start of the pattern change is drawn in the first loop. If there is an operation request for a device such as a real-time clock, lamp, motor, solenoid, etc., that operation is executed (S550), the command saved in the command buffer is analyzed (S552), and if it is immediately after the command analysis, the process returns to S536 (Y in S554), but if it is not immediately after the command analysis (N in S554), the random number for the lottery software is updated (S556), which is a low-priority process that can be performed in a spare time, and the process returns to S536. In addition, in S552, if the analyzed command indicates a special symbol variation pattern, the decorative symbol variation pattern is determined by the processing of S552; if the analyzed command indicates a special symbol stopping pattern, and a lottery sheet is used to determine losing decorative symbol patterns, the decorative symbol stopping pattern is determined by the processing of S552.

Figure 22 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a command is received from the main board 200. The main command received from the main board 200 is a priority level 7 interrupt command, which has the highest priority after reset interrupts and error interrupts. The data received from the main board 200 is read from the input port. If the same data is read twice in a row, the data is confirmed as a new command (Y in S600). If the confirmed command is the first command (MODE data) (Y in S602), the first command is saved in a temporary memory area (S604). A hardware random number is acquired for subsequent processing (S606), and the program returns to the original routine. By acquiring a hardware random number each time a main command interrupt is received from the main board 200 in this way, the timing of random number acquisition is not periodic, increasing the randomness of the value. If the data read in S600 does not match twice in a row (a maximum of five reads is possible), S602 is skipped and the program returns to the original routine (N in S600).

If, in S602, the confirmed command is the second command and not the first command (N in S602), and it is confirmed that the first command has already been properly received (Y in S608), the command write pointer, which is the read position in the command buffer (ring buffer for command data), is obtained (S610), and the first command and second command are saved in the command buffer (S612). The command data saved in the command buffer is analyzed in S552 of Figure 21. The command write pointer is updated (S614), the first command saved in the temporary storage area is cleared (S616), and the original routine is returned to. If, in S608, the first command has not been received, S610 and subsequent steps are skipped (N in S608), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 23 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing when a timer interrupt for effect display control occurs. This timer interrupt is a priority level 2 interrupt for sending commands related to effect display from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320, and occurs every 500 μs. This interrupt checks the buffer (S620), and if there is command data to be sent in the buffer (Y in S622), the command data is read (S624) and sent to the control CPU 320 (S626). Note that the command data is sent to the control CPU 320 up to three times at predetermined time intervals until the sub-CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320 indicating that it was successfully received by the control CPU 320. After sending, the buffer read address setting is updated (S628), and the original routine is resumed. If there is no data to be sent in the buffer (N in S622), S624 and subsequent steps are skipped and the original routine is resumed.

Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when the sub CPU 310 receives a command from the control CPU 320. This interrupt is also a priority level 2 interrupt. The command that the sub CPU 310 receives from the control CPU 320 is mainly a command indicating that the command sent from the sub CPU 310 to the control CPU 320 was received successfully. When a command is received from the control CPU 320, the received command data is read (S630), the command is analyzed (S632), and the command is saved in the command buffer (S634), and the original routine is returned to.

Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the interrupt processing when a timer interrupt occurs for controlling various devices. This timer interrupt is an interrupt for lamp control such as the decorative lamp 111, control of the solenoids and motors that drive the movable props 66, and management and control of various timers, and occurs every 1 ms. Because this is a priority level 1 interrupt, which has the lowest priority, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher are permitted (S640), and input/output of ports that input/output signals such as signals indicating input from the effect button 109, signals indicating error detection, signals indicating power outage, and drive signals for controlled devices such as motors and solenoids is processed (S642). At this time, if a signal indicating power outage is input, the system immediately transitions to backup processing. Data related to device control is updated (S644), such as counting based on the control patterns of devices such as motors and solenoids, and on/off control of the buffer for writing data to the port in S642, a timer for timing the effects is updated (S646), a timer for managing the effective input time of the effect button 109 is updated (S648), and task control counters for controlling the lighting of the decorative lamp 111 and for monitoring runaway control of the control CPU 320 are updated to create a 16 ms cycle (S650).

The minimum unit for controlling the lighting of the decorative lamp 111 is 16 ms. One frame of image display control is 16 ms or 32 ms, and by setting an integer multiple of this as the minimum unit for controlling the lighting of the decorative lamp 111, it becomes easier to synchronize the lamp control and the image display control. Also, when counting a relatively long period, such as a 30-second error notification, if a count at a 1-interrupt (1 ms) cycle is used, the count value will be longer than necessary, but by using a 16 ms cycle, the count value can be shortened.

Task control has 16 types of tasks, processes 0 to 15, of which one is the lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 and two are runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320. The lighting switching control of the decorative lamp 111 is performed once every 16 interrupts according to the count value of the task control counter, thereby achieving switching every 16 ms. The runaway monitoring control of the control CPU 320 is assigned to processes 0 and 8, for example, and when the count value of the task control counter is 0 and 8, the toggle signal from the control CPU 320 is monitored (S652) once every 8 interrupts, thereby achieving monitoring every 8 ms.

The control CPU 320 outputs a toggle signal that alternates between on and off every frame. If this toggle signal remains unchanged and remains the same for 1600 ms consecutively, it is determined that the control CPU 320 is out of control, and a reset signal is sent from the sub-CPU 310 to the control CPU 320. Upon receiving the reset signal, the control CPU 320 executes a reset. Because the control CPU 320 receives a toggle signal at a cycle of one frame (16 ms or 32 ms), monitoring is performed at a shorter cycle of 8 ms. Finally, a timer that manages a relatively long error notification period, such as the 30-second error notification described above, is decremented (S654), and the error notification ends when the timer times out.

Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying the special symbol fluctuation. If the second win/loss lottery value is reserved (Y in S700), the second win/loss determination means 222 reads the second win/loss lottery value and determines whether the second special symbol 52 is a win/loss (S702), the second win/loss determination means 222 determines the stopping symbol of the second special symbol 52 (S704), the second fluctuation pattern determination means 232 determines the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol 52 (S706), and sends a fluctuation start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the pattern fluctuation of the second special symbol 52 (S716).

If the second win/loss lottery value has not been reserved (N in S700) and the first win/loss lottery value has been reserved (Y in S708), the first win/loss determination means 221 reads the first win/loss lottery value and determines again whether the first special symbol 51 has won (S710), the first win/loss determination means 221 determines the stopping symbol of the first special symbol 51 (S712), the first variation pattern determination means 231 determines the variation pattern of the first special symbol 51 (S714), and sends a variation start command together with the determined result to the sub-board 300 to start the pattern variation of the first special symbol 51 (S716). If the first win/loss lottery value has not been reserved, processes from S710 to S722 are skipped (N in S708).

The display of the special symbol changes is processed (S718), and S718 is repeated until the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the symbol display is reached (N at S720). When the predetermined change time has elapsed and the timing to stop the symbol display is reached (Y at S720), a change stop command is sent to the sub-board 300, the symbol change being displayed is stopped at a predetermined stop symbol (S722), and the display of the special symbol changes is ended.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the process of displaying a decorative symbol variation. The effect determination means 303 of the sub-board 300 receives a command from the main board 200 indicating the start of variation and the content of the variation display (S750). The effect determination means 303 determines the stopping mode of the decorative symbol based on the received special symbol's stopping pattern, variation pattern, and hit/miss determination result (S752), and determines the variation effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern (S754). If the premonition setting is enabled by prior determination (Y in S756), and the previously determined variation effect pattern does not include specific effect content that should be avoided from being superimposed on the preview effect (N in S758), and the pattern variation is not the one that triggered the premonition setting to be enabled (N in S760), the setting to display the predetermined preview effect is executed (S764). If the pattern variation is the one that triggered the premonition setting to be enabled (Y in S760), the premonition setting is disabled (S762). If the premonition setting is not on (N at S756) or if the variable presentation pattern includes specific presentation content (Y at S758), processing from S760 to S764 will be skipped.

Then, the display of the decorative pattern variation effect is started (S766), and the decorative pattern variation effect display process (S768) and the preview effect display process are executed (S770). S768 and S770 are repeated until a variation stop command is received from the main board 200 (N at S772). When the variation stop command is received (Y at S772), the decorative pattern variation display is stopped by displaying the decorative pattern in the stopped state determined at S752 (S774), and the decorative pattern variation effect ends (S776).

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the process of a special game. First, the effect display control means 305 starts the effect processing for the special game (S800), and the opening/closing control means 275 opens the large prize opening 20 (S802). If the predetermined opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) and the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has not reached 9 or more, the process returns to S804 (N in S806). If the predetermined opening time has elapsed (Y in S804) or if the opening time has not elapsed (N in S804) but the number of balls entering the large prize opening 20 has reached 9 or more (Y in S806), the opening/closing control means 275 closes the large prize opening 20 (S810).

If the unit game has not reached the final round (N in S810), the number of rounds is incremented by 1 and the process returns to S802 (S812). If the unit game has reached the final round (Y in S810), the effect display control means 305 ends the effect processing for the special game (S814), the special game control means 260 ends the special game (S816), and starts the execution of a specific game, i.e., a special bonus, time-saving, or easy-to-score state (S818).

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the process of a small win game. In a small win game, a unit game that is executed only once is started (S819), the large prize opening 20 is opened (S820), and remains open until the specified opening time has elapsed (N in S822). If the opening time has elapsed (Y in S822), the large prize opening 20 is closed (S824). If the set number of openings and closings has not been completed (N in S826), 1 is added to the number of openings and closings and the process returns to S820 (S828). If the set number of openings and closings has been completed (Y in S826), the small win game ends.

In the underlying technology, the payout from a jackpot in the second game is generally greater than the payout from a jackpot in the first game, i.e., the expected value of winning prize balls per jackpot in the second game is greater than that in the first game. However, in another example, the first game may be designed to have a greater expected value of winning prize balls than the second game, or the expected value of winning prize balls in the first game and the second game may be designed to be roughly equal. In the latter case, the special game executed in the first game and the special game executed in the second game may be designed to have the same average number of unit games. For example, in the first game, a special game in which seven unit games are executed with a 100% probability may be executed, while in the second game, a special game in which four unit games are executed with a 50% probability and a special game in which ten unit games are executed with a 50% probability may be executed. In either case, a specific area may be provided in the jackpot opening, and if a game ball that has entered the jackpot opening enters or passes through the specific area, a specific game such as a probability variable state may be implemented in the normal game after the special game ends. In this case, the special game implemented in the event of a jackpot in the second game may be configured so that the ball is more likely to enter the specific area than the special game implemented in the event of a jackpot in the first game, thereby increasing the probability of the normal game in the probability variable state being implemented after the special game ends. For example, a first jackpot may be provided in which a special game is implemented in which it is relatively difficult for the ball to enter the specific area, and a second jackpot may be provided in which a special game is implemented in which it is relatively easy for the ball to enter the specific area, and the probability of the second jackpot may be higher in the second game than in the first game. Alternatively, the probability of the second jackpot in the first game may be less than 100%, but the probability of the second jackpot in the second game may be 100%.

(Example)
In this embodiment, we propose suitable control and effects for a pachinko gaming machine equipped with a screen deformation effect as a special effect. Below, elements that are the same as or correspond to elements that make up the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will be described using the same symbols. In addition, content that has already been explained in the base technology will be omitted as appropriate, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 100 of the base technology will mainly be explained.

<Special effects, normal/simple decorative patterns, normal/simple reserved images, pre-reading effects>
As a special effect in this embodiment, a screen deformation effect will be described. The screen deformation effect here refers to an effect in which a frame image included in the currently displayed video is subjected to deformations such as enlargement, reduction, movement, distortion, shaking, color inversion, and color conversion, along with a frame image arranged around the frame image. The frame image deformations include a case in which a deformation is sequentially applied to a single frame image included in the original video (also referred to as a "still-in-frame effect"), and a case in which a deformation is sequentially applied to each of multiple frame images included in the original video (also referred to as a "video-in-frame effect"). The still-in-frame effect is an effect in which the original video being displayed is frozen and a deformation is applied to the frame image at the time of freezing, thereby fitting a so-called screen capture image as a still image into the frame image and deforming it. The video-in-frame effect is an effect in which a deformation is applied to each frame image of the currently displayed video, thereby fitting the original video as a moving image into the frame image and deforming it. The frame images of the original video are temporarily stored in a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by adding deformations such as enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, shaking, tilting, cracking, color inversion, and color conversion to the frame images, and the new frame images are stored in the frame buffer to display a new video as a screen deformation effect. In this way, by dynamically generating a post-deformation image for an image of one scene in a video, it is not necessary to prepare post-deformation frame images corresponding to many scenes in multiple videos in advance, and it is possible to diversify the effects while suppressing increases in data volume and processing load.

First, the screen before the screen transformation effect is executed will be described.
Figure 30 shows an example of the screen of the performance display device 60. Figure 30(a) shows the state when the variation is stopped. On the performance screen 500 of the performance display device 60, a normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61 in a vertically varying manner using most of the area in the approximate center, and a simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed as a decorative pattern 61 in a vertically varying manner in the upper right corner. In this way, the decorative pattern 61 in this embodiment is composed of a normal decorative pattern 502 and a simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of a first normal decorative pattern 502a, which is the left pattern, a second normal decorative pattern 502b, which is the middle pattern, and a third normal decorative pattern 502c, which is the right pattern.

The normal hold image 506 and the simplified hold image 507 are displayed as hold images. The normal hold image 506, which indicates the number of lottery values held, up to a maximum of four, is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 500. In the figure, the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are displayed horizontally from left to right in the order of ball entry (i.e., the order in which the values begin to change). The first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d are typically displayed as images resembling balls lit in a predetermined color (e.g., blue). When a high probability of a jackpot is determined based on so-called pre-reading at the time of ball entry, i.e., advance determination information on the lottery values corresponding to each hold, an image resembling a ball lit in a color corresponding to the high probability of a jackpot is displayed. In the example of FIG. 30(a), only the third normal reserved image 506c is displayed as an image imitating a ball lit in a color different from blue (for example, red). This effect of lighting up in a color different from blue due to pre-reading is the pre-reading preview effect in this embodiment. For example, the effect determination means 303 determines the color of the normal reserved image 506 so that the normal color "blue" suggests the lowest probability of winning, followed by "green," "red," and "rainbow" in that order. The number and color (or pattern) of these reserved images suggest to the player the number of reserved balls and the expected probability of winning. The pattern change corresponding to the third normal reserved image 506c, which is the third to be scheduled to start changing the pattern, is the pattern change that is the target of pre-reading (the trigger for the execution of the pre-reading preview effect), and is hereinafter also referred to as the "target change."

In the right corner of the presentation screen 500, a simplified hold image 507 is displayed, which is a hold image that is smaller and simplified than the normal hold image 506. The simplified hold image 507 is an image that indicates the number of normal hold images 506 being displayed using a number, and in Figure 30(a) the number "4" is displayed.

Figure 30(b) shows the state during the display of a changing pattern. Figure 30(b) shows the state during the display of a changing pattern after the start of the pattern change, following the state shown in Figure 30(a). The four normal pending images 506, the first normal pending image 506a through the fourth normal pending image 506d in Figure 30(a), are moved one pending image to the left from their respective positions. The first normal pending image 506a in Figure 30(a) moves to the left and is displayed as a changing image 508. The changing image 508 is an image showing the lottery value currently undergoing a changing pattern. It has a larger diameter than the normal pending image 506 and has a background pattern displayed around it, emphasizing that it is distinguished from the normal pending image 506 and that the pattern is currently changing. Note that the changing image 508 and the normal pending image 506 are not separate image data, but rather share the same image data. Specifically, the image data only includes the image data of the changing image 508, and the normal pending image 506 is displayed by reducing the image data of the changing image 508. The second normal hold image 506b, the third normal hold image 506c, and the fourth normal hold image 506d in Figure 30(a) move one by one to the left to become the first normal hold image 506a, the second normal hold image 506b, and the third normal hold image 506c. The first normal decorative pattern 502a has already finished its variable display and is displayed in a temporary stop state, i.e., it is essentially stopped but is fluctuating slightly and has not yet been confirmed as stopped. The second normal decorative pattern 502b is currently rotating at high speed. The third normal decorative pattern 502c has rotated at high speed and is now fluctuating at a slower speed, about to stop. The simple decorative pattern 504 is currently rotating at high speed, and when the first normal decorative pattern 502a, the second normal decorative pattern 502b, and the third normal decorative pattern 502c all stop (confirmed stop), the simple decorative pattern 504 also stops (confirmed stop). Unlike a provisional stop, a fixed stop refers to a stop mode in which there is no fine oscillation and no slight movement. However, if the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of numbers (or letters or symbols) and pictures of human or animal characters, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is composed only of numbers (or letters or symbols), the numbers (or letters or symbols) that make up the simple decorative pattern 504 will not be temporarily stopped but will only be fixedly stopped, and will not finely oscillate or move slightly when fixedly stopped. On the other hand, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be temporarily stopped, and when temporarily stopped, both the numbers (or letters or symbols) and the pictures will finely oscillate, and when fixedly stopped, neither the numbers (or letters or symbols) nor the pictures will finely oscillate or move slightly; however, after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the fixed stop, at least one of the numbers (or letters or symbols) or the pictures will finely oscillate even when fixedly stopped.

The simple hold image 507 displayed in the right corner of the presentation screen 500 is an image that indicates the number of displayed normal hold images 506 with a number, and in Figure 30 (b) the number "3" is displayed. The movable device 520 is a movable decorative lamp that is shaped like the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and when activated at a predetermined timing, it indicates a high likelihood of a jackpot. As will be described in more detail later, this embodiment is equipped with multiple movable devices in addition to the movable device 520.

Figure 31 shows a schematic example of frame image contraction in a screen transformation effect. Figure 31(a) shows a state in which an enemy character 512 appears at a predetermined timing in a predetermined symbol change effect, such as a super reach effect based on a story motif of a battle with an enemy character 512. During the execution of such a predetermined symbol change effect (super reach effect), it is preferable to hide the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508, as shown in Figure 31, but the changing image 508 may continue to be displayed even while the normal pending image 506 is not displayed. For example, when the effect develops into a super reach effect, the normal pending image 506 is hidden, but the changing image 508 may be configured to be displayed for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (for example, the first half period). Furthermore, during the execution of such a predetermined symbol variation effect (such as a super reach effect), as shown in FIG. 31 , the normal decorative symbol 502 is not displayed, but may be displayed in a smaller size (or, in the case of the normal decorative symbol 502 consisting of numbers and pictures, only the numbers). For example, when the effect progresses to a super reach effect, the normal decorative symbol 502 may be displayed in a reach mode, small and/or only the numbers, for at least a portion of the execution period of the super reach effect (e.g., the first half period). Here, when a still-in-frame effect is executed as the screen transformation effect, as shown in FIG. 31( b), the image of the enemy character 512 currently displayed on the screen as in FIG. 31( a) is frozen, and the still frame image is reduced to a slightly smaller size, and a frame-like frame image 510 that was not previously displayed is displayed around the reduced frame image. Although not specifically illustrated, when a framed video effect is executed as a screen transformation effect, a transformation process such as sequential reduction is performed on each of the multiple frame images included in the original video, similar to the framed still effect, and such multiple frame images are also considered to be included in the transformation process hereinafter unless otherwise specified. Note that at least a portion of this frame image 510 may be displayed in advance (for example, a partial area toward the inside of the frame image 510 may be displayed). The area inside the frame image 510 will hereinafter be referred to as the framed image 514. Here, the frame image 510, which was not displayed on the performance screen 500 in the state shown in FIG. 31( a), is displayed around the framed image 514 in the state shown in FIG. 31( b). Although the display control process itself was actually being executed by the performance display control means 305 at the time of FIG. 31( a), this portion of the frame image 510 was not displayed within the performance screen 500 and therefore was not visualized because it was located outside the frame of the performance screen 500. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, the entire frame image 510 is made visible, but it is also possible to make only the top portion of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the rest of the frame image 510 is invisible), or to make only the left and right portions of the frame image 510 visible (i.e., the top and bottom portions are invisible).

Here, the framed image 514, which is a reduced version of the frame image in Figure 31(a), does not include the simple decorative pattern 504 or the simple hold image 507. In other words, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 are not subject to the screen transformation effect and are displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. The normal decorative pattern 502, normal hold image 506, and changing image 508, which were displayed at the stage in Figure 30, have been switched to a hidden state and are not subject to transformation, nor are they included in the framed image 514. In other words, by hiding the normal decorative pattern 502 while continuing to display the simple decorative pattern 504, the display of the decorative pattern is ensured (making it possible to recognize whether or not it is changing), and by hiding the normal hold image 506 and the changing image 508 while continuing to display the simple hold image 507, the display of the hold image is ensured (making it possible to recognize whether or not there are holds and how many holds there are). In a modified example, normal decorative pattern 502 and changing image 508 may also be included in framed image 514 and be subject to transformation. In other words, as described above, if normal decorative pattern 502 and changing image 508 are configured to continue displaying even during a predetermined pattern change presentation (such as a super reach presentation), normal decorative pattern 502 and changing image 508 may be included in framed image 514 and be subject to a screen transformation presentation. Furthermore, normal pending image 506 may also be configured to continue displaying during a predetermined pattern change presentation (such as a super reach presentation), and, like normal decorative pattern 502 and changing image 508, may be included in framed image 514 and be subject to a screen transformation presentation. Framed image 514 is an image obtained by reducing the frame image in FIG. 31( a ) as described above and, in addition, inverting the color (also known as "negative-positive inversion"). Framed image 514 and framed image 510 are objects that are subject to subsequent transformation processing, and are therefore referred to as target objects 516.

Figure 32 shows a schematic example of frame image shaking during a screen transformation effect. The target object 516 is further reduced in size from the state shown in Figure 31(b), and the previously two-dimensional transformation is further transformed in the depth direction to create a three-dimensional transformation. As a result, the target object 516 appears as if a frame image of the video previously displayed (in the case of a still-framed effect, this is an image similar to a captured image of the video still being displayed, or in the case of a video-framed effect, successively changing frame images) has been pasted or projected onto one surface of the three-dimensional object. As shown, the target object 516 has a shape in which a framed image 514 is placed inside a curved frame image 510. While not strictly rectangular, for ease of explanation, we will assume it to be rectangular hereafter, and will refer to its left edge as the left side, right edge as the right side, top edge as the top side, and bottom edge as the bottom side. In Figure 32(a), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make it appear as if the left side of the target object 516 is moving forward and the right side is moving backward. That is, the left side is lengthened, the right side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are smaller than right angles, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoid. In Figure 32(b), a four-vertex transformation is performed to make it appear as if the right side of the target object 516 is moving forward and the left side is moving backward. That is, the right side is lengthened, the left side is shortened, and the top and bottom interior angles of the right side are smaller than right angles, and the top and bottom interior angles of the left side are larger than right angles, resulting in a trapezoid. By alternately repeating the states of Figure 32(a) and Figure 32(b) at high speed, the left and right sides are alternately rotated back and forth in the forward and backward directions, making it appear as if the target object 516 is swaying.

The effect determination means 303 determines whether or not to execute a screen transformation effect as the effect content to be displayed on the effect screen 500 of the effect display device 60, depending on the variation pattern. The screen transformation effect is displayed as a moving image by sequentially generating new frame images that combine at least an image of the target object 516 obtained by transforming a frame image stored in the frame buffer 338 at a predetermined timing, a background image 518, and an image showing the game status, and storing the new frame images in the frame buffer 338. Here, the background image 518 is solid black (blacked out), but this display style is not limited to this, and a display style such as looping a moving image in which the word "CHANCE" flows like a caption may also be used.

Figure 33 shows a schematic diagram of the layer structure of the presentation screen 500 in a screen transformation presentation. The layer structure of the presentation screen 500 is composed of, from the foreground to the background, an error display layer 521, a volume and light intensity display layer 522, a game status layer 523, a presentation layer 524, and a background layer 525, in that order. The foreground error display layer 521 displays an error warning image 536 indicating that an error has occurred and indicating the type of error when an error occurs. The next layer, the volume and light intensity display layer 522, displays a volume setting image 532 showing an interface for the player to adjust the volume, and a light intensity setting image 534 showing an interface for the player to adjust the light intensity.

The next layer, the game status layer 523, displays images such as the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple hold image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 for right-hand hits, and the display content is constantly updated. As a variant, the changing image 508 may be displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523. The next layer, the effect layer 524, is a layer that mainly displays the changes in the normal decorative pattern 502, the normal hold image 506, and the target object 516. The shape, color, and display position of the target object 516 are constantly updated, but the content of the framed image 514 included in the target object 516 remains fixed unless it is transformed, moved, or otherwise changed in a still effect such as a screen capture. In an effect in which a video is embedded in the framed image 514, frame images included in the original video are sequentially embedded. The normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal hold image 506 may be subject to transformation as part of the target object 516 in a screen transformation effect. Furthermore, as described above, if the changing image 508 is displayed on the effect layer 524 instead of the game status layer 523, the changing image 508 may also be subject to deformation as part of the target object 516 in the screen deformation effect. The background layer 525 at the rear is a solid black background image 518. By displaying the background image 518 on the background layer 525, it is possible to create the illusion of a three-dimensional space with a sense of depth, and the target object 516 displayed on the effect layer 524 can also be made to appear three-dimensional. The effect images that can be displayed on the effect display device 60 include at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group, and in the screen deformation effect, a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner and a second image that is not deformed in the predetermined manner are displayed. The first image group refers to a collection of images that constitute the transformation target effect described below, i.e., images categorized as images that are subject to transformation processing, while the second image group refers to a collection of images other than the transformation target effect described below, i.e., images categorized as images that are not subject to transformation processing. The first images are images that can be subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and can be displayed on the effect layer 524. The first image group includes, for example, the target object 516 as the first image, and may further include the normal decorative pattern 502 and the normal reserved image 506. The second images are images that are not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect and are images that are displayed on a layer other than the effect layer 524. The second image group includes, for example, the simple decorative pattern 504, the simple reserved image 507, the changing image 508, and the guide display 530 as the second images. The special first image is, for example, the transformed target object 516, and if the normal decorative pattern 502 or the normal reserved image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, the special first image may further include the transformed normal decorative pattern 502 and the transformed normal reserved image 506.

The effect determination means 303 selects one of multiple types of variation effect patterns as the variation effect pattern. The multiple types of variation effect patterns include variation effect patterns that are the target of screen transformation effect execution during the effect process and variation effect patterns that are not the target of screen transformation effect execution. The variation effect pattern that is the target of screen transformation effect execution may be defined so that the screen transformation effect may or may not be executed depending on the results of a separate lottery, or may be defined so that the screen transformation effect is always executed. This makes it possible to make the appearance of the effect different depending on whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed halfway through, even with the same variation effect pattern, or even if the effect progresses in the same way up to a certain point. For example, in the case of an effect that develops into a super reach effect, the flow of the effect can be either "variation start → reach state formation → super reach effect development → no screen transformation effect occurs during the super reach effect → super reach effect end → variation end" or "variation start → reach state formation → super reach effect development → screen transformation effect occurs during the super reach effect → super reach effect end → variation end."

The effect determination means 303 selects one of multiple preview effect patterns as the preview effect pattern. The multiple preview effect patterns include preview effects that are the target of a screen transformation effect during the effect process (e.g., a step-up preview effect that is part of a preview effect before a reach state, in addition to the effect of freezing an enemy character during the super reach effect described above), and preview effects that are not the target of a screen transformation effect (e.g., a preview effect pattern that displays a special normal decorative symbol 502 (e.g., a normal decorative symbol 502 with the word "NEXT") that is part of a preview effect before a reach state, in which the normal decorative symbol 502 temporarily stops and then changes again, and a preview effect pattern in which the movable role object 520 is activated after the effect of freezing an enemy character during the super reach effect described above ends, causing the screen to turn rainbow colors). Preview effects that are the target of a screen transformation effect may or may not be executed depending on the results of a separate lottery, or may be defined so that a screen transformation effect is always executed. This allows the same preview effect pattern to be displayed differently depending on whether or not a screen transformation effect is performed. Note that the effects that are the target of the screen transformation effect, i.e., the pattern change effects and preview effects that may result in a screen transformation effect during the effect process, are hereinafter referred to as "transformation target effects."

The effect determination means 303 determines whether to execute a so-called pre-read preview effect, which indicates the likelihood of a winning result in the lottery when a new ball is placed in the starting hole and triggers a hold corresponding to the new ball being placed in the starting hole, based on the pre-determination information (pre-determination information transmitted from the main board 200, which serves as the main control device, when a new ball is placed in the starting hole). Furthermore, the likelihood of a screen transformation effect being executed varies depending on the type of pre-read preview effect (pre-read preview). In other words, if the hold related to the target change is a hold related to a change scheduled to result in a screen transformation effect, or a hold related to a change with a high probability of a screen transformation effect being executed (or, more specifically, a hold related to a change that will result in the execution of a preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect being executed), a pre-read preview with a higher expectation is executed than if the hold is not such a hold (for the hold change effect described below, a red normal hold image 506 has a higher expectation of a pre-read preview than a blue normal hold image 506). In this configuration, even if the same presentation pattern is used, it is preferable to configure the display so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a screen transformation presentation is executed than when the screen transformation presentation is not executed. For example, it is preferable to configure the display so that the likelihood of a jackpot is higher when a presentation in which an enemy character is made to stand still during the aforementioned super reach presentation (a screen transformation presentation is executed) is higher than when a presentation in which an enemy character is made to stand still during the super reach presentation is not executed (a screen transformation presentation is not executed, and the enemy character does not stand still). The preview presentation based on pre-reading is, for example, a presentation (hold change presentation) that indicates the likelihood of a jackpot or the likelihood of a screen transformation presentation being executed by the lighting color of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the target variation that is the subject of the pre-reading, as shown in FIG. 30 . This makes it possible to vary the likelihood of a screen transformation presentation being executed depending on the type of preview presentation, i.e., the lighting color of the normal hold image 506. For example, a screen transformation presentation is more likely to be executed for the target variation that is the subject of the pre-reading when a red normal hold image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 50%) is displayed than when a blue normal hold image 506 (e.g., a jackpot expectation of 10%) is displayed. Such a hold change effect may be performed not only for normal hold image 506 but also for changing image 508. For example, when first normal hold image 506a moves to become changing image 508, (1) first normal hold image 506a displays blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 also displays blue normal hold image 506 (more precisely, blue changing image 508), making it possible to understand that the expected jackpot rate for the current change is 10%, and (2) first normal hold image 506a displays blue normal hold image 506, and changing image 508 displays red normal hold image 506 (more precisely, red changing image 508), making it possible to understand that the expected jackpot rate for the current change has increased from 10% to 50%. When a variation effect pattern that is the target for the screen transformation effect is selected, whether or not the screen transformation effect will be executed is decided at the start of the pattern change due to that variation effect pattern, and the probability of the screen transformation effect being executed varies depending on the type of pre-reading notice that has been executed up until the start of the change. As a variant, at the time the pre-reading notice is executed (at the time it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice), whether or not the screen transformation effect will be executed may be decided based on the change (target change) that triggered the execution of that pre-reading notice.

The likelihood of a screen transformation effect being executed varies depending on the mode of the preview effect of the relevant change. Note that the "change in question" here refers to the current change, and in the case of a pre-reading preview being executed, it refers to the change that triggered the execution of the pre-reading preview (the target change), not the change that is executing the pre-reading preview (the change before the target). Furthermore, the mode of the preview effect of the relevant change here refers to the mode of the preview effect (excluding the screen transformation effect) executed in the change in which the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is executed is executed, and not the mode of the pre-reading preview; in other words, it is not the mode of the preview effect in a change that precedes the change in which the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is executed. Note that whether or not the preview effect of the relevant change is executed and its mode, as well as whether or not the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect is executed and whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed are all determined by separate lotteries at the start of the change. In this way, even if a variation effect pattern that is the target of the screen transformation effect is selected, the screen transformation effect is not necessarily executed. For example, the preview effect for the change may be configured so that the likelihood of the screen transformation effect being executed is higher when the color of the speech bubble in a dialogue preview effect, which displays the dialogue of an appearing character in the form of a speech bubble (this dialogue preview effect is executed at a timing before the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect in the change), is a giraffe pattern (a display mode that has a higher likelihood of a jackpot than blue) than when the color of the speech bubble is blue.As a variant, whether or not to execute the preview effect for the change, and the mode of execution, whether or not to execute the preview effect that is the target of the screen transformation effect, and whether or not to execute the screen transformation effect may be determined all at once by lottery at the start of the change.

While the progress of the effect remains the same, the appearance can be made different depending on whether or not a screen transformation effect is executed. Furthermore, the combination of the effect content of the pre-read preview and the effect content of the target change can create a gradual sense of expectation regarding the differences in the appearance of the effect. The aforementioned hold change effect and dialogue preview effect can be executed in both target changes and pre-target changes. For example, by displaying a red normal hold image 506 in the pre-read preview, it is possible to make it appear as if the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation effect is high, and then by displaying a blue dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation effect is low. Furthermore, for example, by displaying a blue normal hold image 506 in the pre-read preview, it is possible to make it appear as if the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation effect is low, and then by displaying a giraffe-patterned dialogue bubble in the target change effect, it is possible to make it appear as if the expectation of the execution of the screen transformation effect is high. In a modified example, if the series of steps from the start of the pre-read preview (change before the target) to the target change, or the series of steps from the pre-read preview to the timing of the screen transformation effect during the target change, are determined all at once, it is possible to prevent the expected execution of the screen transformation effect from being hindered midway.

Figure 34 shows a schematic diagram of the process of the movable feature effect, which is executed simultaneously with the screen transformation effect. Figure 34(a) shows the initial stage of the operation of the movable feature 520, and Figure 34(b) shows the movable feature 520 in operation. The movable features 520 in this embodiment include a first movable feature 520a, a second movable feature 520b, a third movable feature 520c, and a fourth movable feature 520d. The first movable feature 520a is a movable decorative lamp embossed with the logo of the model title of this gaming machine, and by moving significantly so as to fall downward as shown in Figure 34(b) at a predetermined timing during a predetermined effect, it suggests a high probability of a jackpot. The second movable part 520b and the third movable part 520c are scissor arm-type decorative members, and as shown in Figure 34(b), the second movable part 520b extends from the left side of the presentation screen 500 to the center of the presentation screen 500, and the third movable part 520c extends from the right side of the presentation screen 500 to the center of the presentation screen 500, thereby suggesting a high likelihood of a jackpot. The fourth movable part 520d is a mountain-shaped decorative lamp resembling a saw blade, and at a predetermined timing during a predetermined presentation, it moves significantly so as to protrude upward as shown in Figure 34(b), thereby suggesting a high likelihood of a jackpot. As shown in FIG. 34(b), the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 are displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility even when all of the first, second, third, and fourth movable parts 520a, 520b, 520c, and 520d are in operation. By configuring the movable parts to remain in their initial positions during and after the stoppage of the fluctuations (e.g., the period from 2 seconds before the stoppage of the fluctuations to the stoppage of the fluctuations), it is possible to ensure more reliable visibility at least at the boundary of the game (i.e., when the game progress is temporarily stopped). Alternatively, the simple decorative pattern 504 and the simple hold image 507 may be displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility during the operation of at least one of the first, second, third, and fourth movable parts 520a, 520b, 520c, and 520d. For example, simple decorative pattern 504 and simple hold image 507 may be displayed in a position where visibility is impaired when third movable part 520c is in operation but visibility is not impaired when other movable parts are in operation. In such a configuration, it is preferable that third movable part 520c operates less frequently than any of first movable part 520a, second movable part 520b, and fourth movable part 520d. It is also preferable that the time during which third movable part 520c operates within one variation is shorter than the time during which third movable part 520c does not operate. In such a configuration, it is more preferable that the time during which third movable part 520c operates within one variation is shorter than the time during which third movable part 520c does not operate, in all variation patterns (variation times).

The movable role object 520 is provided near the performance display device 60 and operates in conjunction with the performance displayed on the performance display device 60. The presence or absence of the movement of the movable role object 520 and the presence or absence of the execution of the screen transformation performance are associated so that the display of the screen transformation performance and the movement of the movable role object 520 are relatively often executed simultaneously in parallel. For example, the screen transformation performance is more likely to be executed simultaneously in parallel with the movable role object 520 than with other types of performance that do not involve the screen transformation performance (e.g., capture performance, reversal performance, step-up preview, dialogue preview, hold change performance, group preview, etc.). Also, for example, the screen transformation performance is more likely to involve the movement of the movable role object 520 than to not involve the movement of the movable role object 520. The performance control means 304 operates the movable role object 520 according to the presence or absence of the movement of the movable role object 520 determined by the performance determination means 303. By coordinating the screen transformation effect with the operation of the movable role element 520 in this way, the three-dimensionality and dynamism of the performance content displayed on the performance display device 60 when the screen transformation effect is executed can be further enhanced. In other words, not only is the displayed performance content expressed as three-dimensional and dynamic movement, but three-dimensionality and dynamism are also created around the performance display device 60. Conversely, in a screen transformation effect that does not involve the operation of the movable role element 520, the content of the screen transformation effect itself can be made to stand out more by refraining from the operation of the movable role element 520. Note that when the movable role element 520 is operating and viewed from the front, the first movable role element 520a, second movable role element 520b, third movable role element 520c, and fourth movable role element 520d operate to positions and shapes that do not obstruct the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504, as shown in Figure 34.

The decorative patterns include at least a normal decorative pattern 502, which is displayed as the main pattern on the performance display device 60 when a special pattern has stopped, and at least a simple decorative pattern 504, which is displayed in a display form simpler than the normal decorative pattern 502 when the normal decorative pattern 502 is difficult to see. The normal decorative pattern 502 is a pattern displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative pattern 504. The normal decorative pattern 502 is made up of three patterns, and as a general rule, they stop one by one in order after the variable display. The simple decorative pattern 504 is also made up of three patterns, but all three stop simultaneously after the variable display. The combinations of patterns that are displayed for the simple decorative pattern 504 are the same as the combinations of patterns that are displayed for the normal decorative pattern 502.

Note that during the execution of the Super Reach effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a smaller size (alternative pattern may be displayed) for at least a portion of the time, or the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden (also configured not to display alternative patterns), but in such situations, the simple decorative pattern 504 is always displayed as a variable. This simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a smaller size in the upper right corner of the effect display device 60, and displays as a variable pattern while the special pattern is changing and as a stationary pattern while the special pattern is stationary. Like the normal decorative pattern 502, three patterns are displayed as variable and stationary. By providing this simple decorative pattern 504, it is possible to notify the player that the normal decorative pattern 502 is changing (in other words, that the result has not yet been determined) even in situations where it is desirable to make the normal decorative pattern 502 smaller or hidden (for example, when executing a Super Reach effect, when a performance using a movable role is performed and the center of the effect display device 60 is hidden), etc. In other words, it can be said that this simple decorative pattern 504 is a pattern for display guarantee (for compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). Note that when this simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable that the variable display is always continued from the start of the special pattern's variation until the stop display is performed. In other words, even if the normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped midway (for example, when executing a pseudo consecutive performance, when a special normal decorative pattern 502 displaying characters such as "NEXT" is temporarily stopped), it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 is configured so as not to be temporarily stopped midway (for this reason, a special pattern displaying characters such as "NEXT" is not provided for the simple decorative pattern 504, and the simple decorative pattern 504 is not configured to be temporarily stopped midway). The easy decorative pattern 504 only makes a fixed stop), and further, in order to prevent a miss variation from being mistaken for a jackpot, and in order to prevent a jackpot variation from being noticed in advance, it is preferable to display the variation while maintaining the pattern combination that indicates a miss to the player, whether it is a miss variation or a jackpot variation (for example, if the types of simple decorative pattern 504 are "1" to "7", the variation is displayed as follows: "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ...). Furthermore, when the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 start to change from a state in which they are fixed and stopped, the starting pattern combination (the first pattern combination immediately after the start of the change) is a pattern combination that is one step forward from the pattern combination at the time of the fixed and stopped, but when the simple decorative pattern 504 starts to change from a state in which it is fixed and stopped, the starting pattern combination will be a predetermined pattern combination regardless of the combination at the time of the fixed and stopped. For example, when the number combinations for normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are both fixed at "243" and normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 begin to change, the starting pattern combination for normal decorative pattern 502 is "354," but the starting pattern combination for simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed at "123." When the number combinations for normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are both fixed at "333," normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 begin to change, the starting pattern combination for normal decorative pattern 502 is "444," but the starting pattern combination for simple decorative pattern 504 is fixed at "123." In addition, the simple decorative pattern 504 can have the following features to clearly differentiate its role from that of normal decorative pattern 502.

(1) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502, which is easier for the player to recognize, is larger than the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504, which is used to guarantee the display (to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502). This configuration is preferable not only in situations where the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 are fixed and stopped, or when the normal decorative pattern 502 has just formed a reach state (a reach state before development into a super reach effect) and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner, but also in situations where the normal decorative pattern 502 has become a small pattern during a super reach effect, etc., and the simple decorative pattern 504 is being displayed in a variable manner.

(2) By displaying the normal decorative pattern 502 in a different display position depending on whether it is in the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), it is possible to achieve a variety of presentations for the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to display it in the same position regardless of whether it is the first presentation mode or the second presentation mode, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Details of the presentation modes will be provided later.

(3) The display mode of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied depending on whether it is the first presentation mode (e.g., normal mode, or stage A in normal mode) or the second presentation mode (e.g., rush mode, or stage B in normal mode), thereby realizing a variety of presentations for the normal decorative pattern 502 depending on the presentation mode. For example, in the first presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed only of normal decorative pattern 502 numbers (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1," "2," ..., "7"), and in the second presentation mode, the normal decorative pattern 502 is composed of a combination of normal decorative pattern 502 numbers and normal decorative pattern 502 of ally characters (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., "7" + "character g"). On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative pattern 504 using only the same display mode, for example, the normal decorative pattern 502 consisting of numbers, regardless of whether the first or second presentation mode is selected, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design work.

(4) The display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied (moved or made into a small pattern) depending on the changing situation (for example, whether or not a normal reach is in progress, whether or not a super reach performance is in progress, etc.), thereby adding variety to the performance of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable to keep the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 unchanged (not moved or made into a small pattern) to avoid unnecessary development and design work.

(5) The normal decorative pattern 502 can be varied in its speed of change to slow, medium, fast, or ultra-fast speed depending on the change situation (e.g., whether it is at the start of the change, in the middle of the change, or about to end, etc.), thereby adding variety to the presentation of the normal decorative pattern 502. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill its role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable not to vary the speed of change of the simple decorative pattern 504, or to reduce the number of stages of variation (e.g., only slow and fast), thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Furthermore, with regard to the direction of change, it is preferable that the normal decorative pattern 502 can change not only from top to bottom but also from bottom to top (allowing for change in multiple directions), while the simple decorative pattern 504 can only change from top to bottom.

(6) The normal decorative pattern 502 is temporarily stopped (a temporary stop while the special pattern is changing, with slight fluctuations) before it is fixed (a stop at the timing when the special pattern stops), and at that time a specific pattern that is a normal decorative pattern 502 other than a number (for example, a normal decorative pattern 502 with the word "Super" written on it, which predicts development into a Super Reach effect) is temporarily stopped, thereby creating a correlation between the effect of the normal decorative pattern 502 and other effects. On the other hand, since the simple decorative pattern 504 only needs to fulfill the role of compensating for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is preferable not to temporarily stop the simple decorative pattern 504 or to temporarily stop the specific pattern, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design.

(7) The normal decorative pattern 502 overlaps with the display area of other preview effects (e.g., comment preview effects, step-up preview effects, etc.), i.e., is superimposed. Such superimposed display is permitted in order to use as much area as possible on the performance display device 60 to create a powerful performance. However, since the simple decorative pattern 504 serves to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative pattern 502, it is desirable to design the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 so that it does not overlap (is not superimposed on) the display area of the other preview effects. However, in relation to special preview effects that inevitably overlap (e.g., group preview effects, background preview effects, etc. displayed across the entire performance display device 60), it is preferable to set the display priority of the simple decorative pattern 504 higher than the display priority of the special preview effect (set so that the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed in front of the special preview effect). Additionally, it is desirable to ensure that the right-hit notification image (a right-hit notification image exclusive to high-base states that is displayed during high-base states, unlike the image displayed during special play; however, it may also be an image common to the image displayed during special play) is always visible to the player, so it is desirable to design it so that the display area of the simple decorative pattern 504 and the display area of the right-hit notification image do not overlap (are not superimposed). However, if the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 is moved or enlarged, the display area of the normal decorative pattern 502 and the display area of the right-hit notification image may overlap (be superimposed), in which case it is preferable to set the display priority of the normal decorative pattern 502 lower than that of the right-hit notification image (set so that the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed behind the right-hit notification image).

(8) During special play, the normal decorative symbols 502 may be displayed singly, rather than in combination. For example, if "777" is confirmed and a special play is executed after a fixed stop, "7" is displayed during the special play, and if "222" is confirmed and a special play is executed after a fixed stop, "2" is displayed during the special play. This makes it possible to recognize which normal decorative symbol 502 resulted in a jackpot during special play. As a variant, only normal decorative symbols 502 corresponding to jackpots with a high degree of advantage (for example, "333," "555," "777," etc., which indicate a jackpot of 7R or more or a jackpot of 10R) may be displayed during special play. In this way, it is desirable that the display area displaying one normal decorative pattern 502 displayed during special play not overlap with the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, right-hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., not be configured to be superimposed (however, it may be displayed superimposed with the highlighted display, in which case the highlighted display has a higher display priority). Also, it is preferable that the simple decorative pattern 504 is not displayed during special play (because variable displays are not performed during special play), but it may be displayed during special play. If configured in this way, it is desirable that it not overlap with the other display areas during special play, which are the round display area, right-hit display area, prize ball acquisition display area, and cumulative prize ball count display area, i.e., not be configured to be superimposed, and it is also desirable that it not be displayed superimposed with the highlighted display.

(9) In addition to changing (for example, moving from top to bottom) the normal decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed with a specified action when the change starts, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is achieved, during a temporary stop, etc. (The action in each situation may be referred to as an action at the start of the change, an action at a temporary stop, an action at the achievement of a reach, or a swinging action). For example, in the case of a non-reach (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "624" at the time of the final stop), when the change starts, the left, middle, and right symbols in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand and then start changing, then when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "6" temporarily stops and continues swinging, then when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "4" temporarily stops and continues swinging, then when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops and swings a little, then at the final stop timing, all of the movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end. In this case, the simple decorative pattern 504 does not perform any of its movements. Furthermore, in the case of a normal reach (when the normal decorative symbol 502 and simple decorative symbol 504 display "212" at the time of the final stop), the left, middle, and right symbols in the normal decorative symbol 502 all expand and begin to change. Then, when the left symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then continues to swing. Then, when the right symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then continues to swing. Then, to indicate a reach, the left and right symbols rotate and continue to swing again. Then, when the middle symbol temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "1" temporarily stops, and then swings slightly. Then, at the final stop, all movements of the left, middle, and right symbols end (the middle symbol does not rotate). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of its movements.

Also, if the effect develops into a super reach effect (when the normal decorative pattern 502 and simple decorative pattern 504 are displayed as "232" at the time of the final stop), when the change begins, the left, middle, and right patterns in the normal decorative pattern 502 all expand before starting the change, then when the left pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, then when the right pattern temporarily stops, it makes a bouncing motion, then the "2" temporarily stops, and then the swinging motion continues, then the left and right patterns rotate to indicate that it is a reach, then the swinging motion continues again, then the left and right patterns While the left and right symbols are shaking, the center symbol changes (at this time, the center symbol is expanding and moving from top to bottom, and the left and right symbols, which previously had no overlap or only a small degree of overlap, now overlap or have a high degree of overlap), and then the background changes from the normal background to the reach background to execute the Super Reach effect. When the Super Reach effect announces that the result is a miss, the reach background changes to the normal background. After the transition, the left, center, and right symbols continue shaking for a predetermined period of time, and then, at the confirmed stop timing, all of the movements of the left, center, and right symbols end (the center symbol does not bounce or rotate). In this case, the simple decorative symbol 504 does not perform any of the movements. This configuration allows for greater variety in the presentation of the normal decorative symbol 502, while the simple decorative symbol 504 only needs to compensate for the display state of the normal decorative symbol 502. Therefore, it is preferable to configure the simple decorative symbol 504 so that it does not perform any special operation, thereby avoiding unnecessary development and design. Furthermore, even between the time when the fluctuation stops and the time when the standby demo effect is displayed, the normal decorative symbol 502 may perform a shaking operation a predetermined time after the fluctuation stops (e.g., 10 seconds), but even in this situation, it is preferable for the simple decorative symbol 504 not to perform any operation. This configuration can stimulate motivation to play even during game standby (when the symbol is stopped), and by not performing a shaking operation, the simple decorative symbol 504 can ensure notification that game standby is in progress. Furthermore, when the standby demo effect is displayed, it is preferable for the normal decorative symbol 502 to be hidden, while the simple decorative symbol 504 continues to be displayed. This makes it possible to emphasize the display of the standby demo effect screen while still ensuring that the displayed symbols are visible. However, since no game is being played during the standby demo effect, the simple decorative symbols 504 may also be hidden.

Furthermore, certain symbols among the normal decorative symbols 502 (for example, the middle symbol "7") may be configured to not perform a predetermined action or to have a lower probability of performing it compared to other symbols. This predetermined action may be, for example, the provisional stop action (a bouncing action) mentioned above (particularly for the middle symbol "7" after a reach is achieved). By configuring it in this way, the rarity of the action for certain symbols can be increased. In addition, when a normal decorative pattern 502 is formed by combining a normal decorative pattern 502 of a number with a normal decorative pattern 502 of an ally character (normal decorative pattern 502 such as "1" + "character a," "2" + "character b," ..., "7" + "character g"), both the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number and the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character will swing, but the swing amplitude (the swing distance; for example, if swinging up and down, the distance between the state where the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed at the top and the state where it is displayed at the bottom during the swinging motion) may be made different to achieve a more dynamic swinging motion. In such a configuration, the swing amplitude of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may be made smaller than the swing amplitude of the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character, or the normal decorative pattern 502 of the number may not swing, and only the normal decorative pattern 502 of the ally character may swing.

Normal decorative symbol 502 is included in the image of target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and can be the target of transformation, i.e., it can be included in the first image belonging to the first image group, and is displayed on the effect layer 524. On the other hand, simple decorative symbol 504 is not included in the image of target object 516 in the screen transformation effect and cannot be the target of transformation, i.e., it is included in the second image belonging to the second image group, but is an object that can be included in the image showing the game status in the screen transformation effect and is displayed on the game status layer 523. Furthermore, movable gimmick 520 can also be operated in certain situations in which the screen transformation effect processing is being performed with normal decorative symbol 502 as the target (for example, in situations in which the screen transformation effect processing is being performed while normal decorative symbol 502 is fluctuating, while temporarily stopped, or while in a reach-win state; in these situations, the image is transformed while the scrolling movement of normal decorative symbol 502 and the shaking movement when temporarily stopped and when a reach-win state is formed are continuously played back and displayed, rather than a static screen). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front, the visibility of the normal decorative pattern 502 during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d. However, as shown in FIG. 34, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first moving part 520a, the second moving part 520b, the third moving part 520c, and the fourth moving part 520d. As mentioned above, the simple decorative pattern 504 may be displayed in a position that does not obstruct visibility during the operation of at least one of the moving parts. To create a sense of unity in the screen transformation effect, the pattern change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal decorative pattern 502 are configured to move in the same dynamic manner. On the other hand, in order to make it easier to understand whether the pattern is currently changing or not, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is ensured by excluding the simple decorative pattern 504 from the target of deformation by the screen deformation effect. In this case, the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504 is more reliably ensured by setting the operation of the linked movable role object 520 to an operation mode that does not impede the visibility of the simple decorative pattern 504. Note that the relationship between the normal decorative pattern 502 and the simple decorative pattern 504 may also be applied to the relationship between the normal hold image 506 (changing image 508) and the simple hold image 507. In other words, the movable device 520 can also be operated in a specific situation where a screen deformation effect process is being performed with the normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) as the target (for example, a situation where a screen deformation effect process is being performed while the normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is being displayed; in this situation, if the normal pending image 506 (changing image 508) is displayed with a rotating animation or a light-emitting animation rather than a still screen, the image will be deformed while the animation is continuously played and displayed). When the moving part 520 is viewed from the front, the visibility of the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) during the screen transformation effect is obstructed by at least one of the first moving part 520a, second moving part 520b, third moving part 520c, and fourth moving part 520d in operation. However, as shown in FIG. 34, the visibility of the simple reserved image 507 during the screen transformation effect is not obstructed by any of the first moving part 520a, second moving part 520b, third moving part 520c, and fourth moving part 520d in operation. As mentioned above, the display may be configured to be positioned so that visibility is not obstructed during the operation of at least one of the moving parts. To create a sense of unity in the screen transformation effect, the pattern change effect without the screen transformation effect and the normal reserved image 506 (changing image 508) are configured to move in the same way. On the other hand, to make it easier to understand whether the pattern is currently changing, and if the pattern is temporarily stopped, which pattern it is, the visibility of the simple hold image 507 is ensured by excluding the simple hold image 507 from the transformation effect of the screen. In this case, the movement of the linked movable device 520 is set to an operating mode that does not impede the visibility of the simple hold image 507, thereby more reliably ensuring the visibility of the simple hold image 507.

In a screen transformation performance, regardless of the content of the frame image serving as the first image to be transformed, the background image 518 serving as the second image has the same content as the background image 518 in other screen transformation performances in which other images are transformed. For example, in this embodiment, the common background image 518 is a solid black image, and is displayed on the background layer 525 in each screen transformation performance. By using a common solid black image as the background image for each screen transformation performance, it is possible to suppress increases in the display processing load and image capacity. As mentioned above, the background image 518 may be displayed in a manner that, for example, plays a moving image in a loop with the word "CHANCE" scrolling like a caption.

When a specific error occurs (e.g., a door-opening error or frame-opening error that occurs when a door or frame opening signal is detected, or a prize ball payout error that halts prize ball payout due to a lack of game balls or the upper ball tray 105 or lower ball tray 106 being full of game balls), the effect display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error (indicating the occurrence and type of error). Furthermore, if an error occurs before a screen transformation effect is executed and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the error warning image 536 continues to be displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 , the error warning image 536 is displayed on the foreground error display layer 521 and not on the effect layer 524. Therefore, it is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and no transformation processing is performed. This not only allows for a configuration that does not impede the execution of the screen transformation effect even when an error occurs, but also allows for a configuration that does not impede the visibility of the error warning image 536 by excluding the error warning image 536 from the screen transformation effect. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the player can adjust the volume level (volume adjustment) through parallel operation. The volume setting image 532 can be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522 in FIG. 33 through player operation. Depending on the type of error (type of error warning sound) that occurs during gameplay, the gameplay sound effects associated with the game (e.g., background music for a super reach effect or sound effects associated with a screen transformation effect) are configured to be output without the error warning sound being prioritized. For example, if an error occurs during a screen transformation effect, if the error is a prize ball payout error, both the error warning sound and the effect sound are output (however, the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, and the effect sound is output at a volume corresponding to the currently set volume level). However, if the error is a door opening error, only the error warning sound is output, and no effect sound is output (or the effect sound is output at a lower volume than when a prize ball payout error occurs). Note that the types of errors listed above are merely examples. In the event of such an error occurring during gameplay, even if a screen transformation effect is executed, the volume setting image 532 is not displayed on the effect layer 524, and therefore is not included in the target object 516, which is the frame image to be transformed, and therefore the transformation process is not performed. This not only enables a configuration in which the execution of volume adjustment is not hindered even when an error occurs, but also enables a configuration in which the visibility of the volume setting image 532 is not hindered by excluding the volume setting image 532 from the target of the screen transformation effect. The volume setting image 532 can display the currently set volume level (for example, it can display "Volume level is 1" or "Volume level is 5"), and when the volume level is adjusted by a player's operation, the displayed content changes (for example, when the volume level is changed from 1 to 2, the display changes from "Volume level is 1" to "Volume level is 5"). Here, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if the player performs further operation while the screen transformation effect is being executed and the volume setting image 532 is being displayed, thereby adjusting the volume and changing the display of the volume setting image 532, the volume setting image 532 will be displayed in a display mode where the screen is not transformed, both during the screen transformation effect and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and during the screen transformation effect and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2"). Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a player operation while the volume setting image 532 is displayed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation effect is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation. Note that to ensure visibility, it is preferable that the error warning image 536 and the volume setting image are configured so that they do not overlap (are displayed in different display areas).

As shown in FIG. 30, when a hold is stored, the effect display device 60 displays a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds. Furthermore, when a hold corresponding to a new ball is created, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed suddenly but is displayed with a gradual animation (details will be described later) to indicate that a hold has occurred. Even if a screen transformation effect is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 is being displayed, that is, between the start and completion of the animation of the normal hold image 506 (until the display of the normal hold image 506 is completed), the animation display is not stopped. The animation display of the normal hold image 506 here refers not only to the animation display when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-read preview), but also to the animation display executed when the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 is changed as a pre-read preview effect (for example, an animation in which the normal hold image 506 glows white and then changes color when a hold occurs, or an animation in which a small character appears and casts a spell on the displayed normal hold image 506, changing its color). However, when a screen transformation effect is being executed or when a change is being made to execute a screen transformation effect (a situation in which a screen transformation effect is scheduled to be executed during the change but the execution timing has not yet arrived), if the system is configured to not execute a pre-reading notice (no lottery or decision) even if a new ball is scored in order to draw attention to the screen transformation effect, and if the animation display effect when a normal hold occurs is not executed, the specification that does not stop the animation display when the screen transformation effect is executed is only adopted for animation display when a normal hold occurs (when a hold occurs without a pre-reading notice).Animation display of the normal hold image 506 (when a hold occurs without a pre-reading notice) when a normal hold occurs includes, for example, a fade-in display of the normal hold image 506, an animation that appears by moving from off-screen, such as from the bottom of the screen, an animation that rotates or swings, an animation that adds a color change such as a momentary flash, an animation that momentarily expands or contracts in size, etc. Because the normal hold image 506 is displayed on the effect layer 524, if a screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display at the time of a hold occurrence, frame images including images during the animation display may be sequentially subjected to transformation, or the display content may be updated so that the animation display of the normal hold image 506 included in the target object 516 continues while the screen transformation effect is being displayed, i.e., while the target object 516 is being transformed. In this way, even if a screen transformation effect is executed during the animation display of the normal hold image 506 at the time of a hold occurrence, by continuing the animation display without stopping it, it is possible to prevent unnaturalness or discomfort from occurring in the flow of the effect. Note that even if there are consecutive hold occurrences and consecutive animation displays at the time of hold occurrences, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball score is not stopped, and the animation display of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later ball score is executed simultaneously in parallel. Therefore, depending on the timing of the hold occurrence, (1) if a first ball is scored while the screen transformation effect is being executed, an animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, and if a second ball is scored while the screen transformation effect and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball are being displayed, the screen transformation effect, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball, and the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the second ball are displayed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball being displayed; (2) if the timing to start the screen transformation effect is reached while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being displayed, the screen transformation effect is displayed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being displayed, and if a second ball is scored while the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball is being displayed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, the animation of the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the first ball being displayed (3) if a later ball is scored while the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier scored ball is being executed, the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later scored ball is executed while the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier scored ball is being executed, and if the timing to start the screen deformation effect is being executed while the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier scored ball and the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later scored ball are being executed, the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier scored ball, the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later scored ball, and the screen deformation effect are executed simultaneously in parallel without stopping the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the earlier scored ball and the animation display of normal hold image 506 corresponding to the later scored ball. Furthermore, in any of the situations (1) to (3), even if there is a subsequent ball entry in that situation (in a situation where multiple balls are being executed simultaneously) and that ball entry is a hold with a high probability of resulting in a jackpot (for example, a hold for which a super reach effect is scheduled to be executed, or a hold for which a jackpot is scheduled to result), it is preferable not to execute the animation display that is normally executed when changing the color or pattern of the hold image 506 as a pre-reading preview effect for that hold in that situation.

In this embodiment, there are multiple types of presentation modes, and for each presentation mode, it is determined which type of presentation, such as a pattern change presentation or a preview presentation, can be executed.
To explain in detail the presentation modes and the presentation contents executed in the presentation modes, for example, multiple presentation modes are set, including "normal mode,""chancemode," and "rush mode." One of the multiple presentation modes is selectively set depending on the game state (or the variation pattern selection state) and the number of times the special symbol is displayed, and a variation presentation corresponding to the set presentation mode is executed. Basically, when the game state is normal, "normal mode" is set, when the game state is in a time-saving state, "chance mode" is set, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, "rush mode" is set. When one of the presentation modes is set, a background image dedicated to that presentation mode (a background image that displays the background of the decorative symbol 61) is displayed on the screen as a presentation (variation presentation) indicating that the presentation mode is in that mode, and background music dedicated to that presentation mode is output from the speaker 108. Because the background image and background music are set differently for each presentation mode, the player can recognize which presentation mode they are currently in based on the type of background image or background music. Specifically, the "normal mode" has four stages: "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Prediction Stage." After 20 or more changes have occurred or the Super Reach effect is missed, the player will transition from "Stage A" to "Stage B," from "Stage B" to "Stage C," and from "Stage C" to "Stage A." If the predictive preview effect results in the execution (transition) of the "Prediction Stage," the player will transition from the current stage to the "Prediction Stage" (the execution of the Super Reach effect is confirmed at the time of transition to the "Prediction Stage," and if a jackpot is hit, a double number will be displayed in the "Prediction Stage," and if a miss occurs, a number other than a double number will be displayed in the "Prediction Stage," and the player will return to the stage before the transition to the "Prediction Stage" at the next change). The background music (stage BGM) is different for each of "Stage A,""StageB,""StageC," and "Prediction Stage" (it is different from the stage BGM for "Chance Mode" and the stage BGM for "Rush Mode"), but in "Stage A," the stage BGM is interrupted (ended) when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) with a non-reach miss (a miss that does not form a reach state, such as a scattered number such as "351") and the stage BGM is restarted from the beginning with the start of the next fluctuation, and in "Stage B,""StageC," and "Prediction Stage," the stage BGM is not interrupted (ended) even when the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) with a non-reach miss, and the stage BGM is output continuously for the next fluctuation (the same configuration is used for "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode" as well).

Here, pseudo consecutive performances can be performed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage," but in any stage, when a pseudo consecutive performance is temporarily stopped (when a specified pseudo consecutive performance pattern (for example, a pattern of the letters "NEXT") is displayed as a middle pattern changing near a specified temporary stop position and then temporarily stopped), the stage BGM is not output (interrupted), and the re-change display (a second change after the temporary stop) triggers the stage BGM to start from the beginning, or switches to a specific BGM different from the one before the re-change display. Thereafter, when the Super Reach performance develops in "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," or "Prediction Stage," the background image of each stage (the stage you were on) switches to the background image of the Super Reach performance (and at the same time switches to BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance), and the stage BGM is not output while the Super Reach performance is being executed, and when an effect indicating a miss is displayed in the Super Reach performance, the background image of each stage is switched back to (the background image of the stage displayed before the Super Reach performance developed) within the changing display in which the Super Reach performance was executed, but in that situation, even if the background image of the stage is displayed until the next changing display begins, the stage BGM is not output, and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is not output either (it is silent, or a specific BGM that is different from both the stage BGM and the BGM exclusive to the Super Reach performance is output). Therefore, even if the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop) without a reach miss, the stage BGM will not be interrupted (will not end), and even in "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage" where the stage BGM continues to be output for the next fluctuation (or even in "Stage A" where this is not the case), if the fluctuation misses via the super reach performance, the stage BGM will be interrupted before the fluctuation stops (confirmed stop), and the stage BGM will start from the beginning when the next fluctuation begins.

Note that pseudo consecutive effects are not executed in "Chance Mode" and "Rush Mode." Here, special effects suggesting that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed (for example, a continuation line announcement such as "It'll continue!", which confirms the execution of a subsequent pseudo consecutive effect, or "Maybe it will continue?", which does not confirm the execution of a subsequent pseudo consecutive effect) are executed, suggesting that a pseudo consecutive effect (re-changing display) will be executed in the future. However, this special effect is displayed only in "Stage A" and "Stage C," and not in "Stage B" or the "Prediction Stage." In other words, by providing both stages where the possibility of a pseudo consecutive effect being executed can be detected in advance and stages where it cannot be detected, and by repeatedly transitioning between these stages, effects that do not bore players are realized. Note that in "Stage A," special effects based on character A are executed, while in "Stage C," special effects based on character B are executed. In addition, there is also provided a pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect, which is different from the special effect and whose occurrence alone confirms that a pseudo consecutive win will be executed thereafter (for example, when character C appears, the line "Continuation Confirmed!" is always displayed), and there is also provided a development confirmation effect, which is different from both the special effect and the pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect and whose occurrence alone confirms that a pseudo consecutive win will not be executed thereafter and that the game will develop into a super reach effect (for example, when character D appears, the line "Development Confirmed!" is always displayed). These pseudo consecutive win confirmation effects and development confirmation effects can be executed in any of "Stage A," "Stage B," "Stage C," and "Prediction Stage." In this way, when a pseudo consecutive win is executed and when a pseudo consecutive win is not executed, by displaying one or more combinations of special effects, pseudo consecutive win confirmation effects, and development confirmation effects, it is possible to diversify the expectation of the execution of a pseudo consecutive win effect and the expectation of the game developing into a super reach effect. It is also possible for the special effect, pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect, and development confirmation effect to all be executed during a single change display. In this case, during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), there may be patterns in which a special effect is executed, a pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect, and a development confirmation effect are executed. Here, in patterns in which a special effect is executed during a certain re-change display (for example, the first or second re-change display), after a special effect is executed during that certain re-change display, a pseudo consecutive win confirmation effect may also be executed during that certain re-change display.

In this embodiment, different types of effects can be executed depending on which presentation mode is being executed. In addition, the type of transformation target effect executed differs depending on the presentation mode, and the type of suggestive effect that suggests that a transformation target effect may be executed and whether or not the suggestive effect is executed differs. Also, in this embodiment, when the pseudo consecutive effect "NEXT" is displayed, a screen transformation effect is not executed (not considered a transformation target effect) to make the player aware that a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed, but this is not limited to this, and a screen transformation effect may be executed (may be considered a transformation target effect). In this case, it is preferable to configure the screen transformation effect to be less likely to occur than other specified preview effects (for example, the effect that freezes an enemy character during the aforementioned super reach effect, or the step-up preview effect that is part of the preview effect before entering a reach state).

First, whether the symbol change results in a screen transformation effect or not, it is possible to create a reach state during that symbol change. Furthermore, the likelihood of a screen transformation effect being executed varies depending on the symbol change effect mode and the reach symbol mode when the symbol reaches a reach state. Specifically, the reach symbol mode and the execution (probability) of a screen transformation effect are associated so that a screen transformation effect is more likely to be executed when a reach state is reached with a "7" symbol than when a reach state is reached with a "2" symbol. More specifically, when a reach state is reached with a "7" symbol, the ratio of when a screen transformation effect that freezes an enemy character during a super reach state is executed to when it is not executed is 5:5, and when a reach state is reached with a "2" symbol, the ratio of when a screen transformation effect that freezes an enemy character during a super reach state is executed to when it is not executed is 2:8. The configuration may be such that when a screen transformation effect is executed, it is more likely that a reach will occur with the "7" symbol; for example, if a screen transformation effect is executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state occurs, the probability of a reach occurring with the "7" symbol is 10%, and a reach occurring with the "2" symbol is 15%; however, if a screen transformation effect is not executed in a step-up preview effect and then a reach state occurs, the probability of a reach occurring with the "7" symbol is 1%, and a reach occurring with the "2" symbol is 20%.

In the screen transformation effect, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in the effect layer 524 as the target object 516, but the simple decorative pattern 504 is not included in the target object 516 and may be included in the game status layer 523 as an image indicating the game status. In addition, even while the screen transformation effect is being performed, the volume setting image 532 for adjusting the volume can be displayed, and the volume can be adjusted in response to player operation.

If the screen transformation effect is executed while the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the execution of the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 will not be included in the frame image that is the target of the transformation; in other words, the volume setting image 532 will continue to be displayed on the volume light intensity display layer 522, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524, and the volume can be adjusted by the player's operation.

Normal reserved image 506 can be subject to transformation by a screen transformation effect, but simple reserved image 507 cannot be subject to transformation by a screen transformation effect. Furthermore, since movable reel 520 can be operated even when a screen transformation effect that includes normal reserved image 506 as a subject of transformation is being performed, the visibility of simple reserved image 507 is not obstructed by movable reel 520 when viewed from the front while in operation. In this case, the visibility of normal reserved image 506 may also be displayed so that it is not obstructed by movable reel 520, or it may be obstructed. Alternatively, the normal reserved image 506 may not be subject to transformation by a screen transformation effect.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, a specific sound effect (sound effect) is output. Specifically, a "ping-pong!" sound effect is output when the screen transformation effect starts (for one second from the start), a "gugugugu" sound effect is output during the screen transformation effect (for one second from the start to one second before the end), and a "splish!" sound effect is output at the end of the screen transformation effect (for one second before the end). In this case, by configuring the sound effect at the start or end of the screen transformation effect to be louder than the sound effect in the middle of the screen transformation effect under the same volume level in the volume adjustment (this relationship applies regardless of which volume level is set), the screen transformation effect can be made to have a distinctive sound not only visually but also aurally. Regarding the degree of transformation/ratio of the transformation target effect, unlike volume, at the beginning or end of the screen transformation effect, the degree of transformation/ratio of the transformation target effect is smaller (if shrinking, the shrink rate is smaller, and if four vertices are transformed, the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is shorter), while in the middle of the screen transformation effect, the degree of transformation/ratio of the transformation target effect is larger (if shrinking, the shrink rate is larger, and if four vertices are transformed, the initial positional movement distance of each vertex is longer) compared to before the screen transformation effect begins. By configuring in this way, it is possible to create an unexpected effect in which visual and auditory sharpness are reversed. The volume level for volume adjustment is provided, for example, in five stages, and can be set to any of levels 1 to 5, and the sound corresponding to each effect is output at a volume corresponding to the set volume level. Here, even at the same volume level, the volume differs depending on the type of effect. For example, as mentioned above, the sound effect "Peekeen!" at the start of the screen transformation effect (1 second from the start) and the sound effect "Splat!" at the end of the screen transformation effect (1 second until the end) are louder than the sound effect "Guggugg" during the screen transformation effect (1 second after the start to 1 second before the end), regardless of the volume level set (for example, at volume level 1, the sound effects "Peekeen!" and "Splat!" are 30 dB, and the sound effect "Guggugg" is 20 dB; at volume level 5, the sound effects "Peekeen!" and "Splat!" are 80 dB, and the sound effect "Guggugg" is 70 dB).
As mentioned above, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may also be displayed as included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance.
Alternatively, as shown in the game status layer 523 of Figure 33, the normal pending image 506 and the changing image 508 may not be included in the target object 516 as the target of transformation in the screen transformation performance, but may be displayed on a separate layer, the game status layer 523.

If a specific error occurs, the effect display device 60 displays an error warning image 536 indicating the error. If an error occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the error warning image 536 is not included in the frame image to be transformed, and is displayed on the error display layer 521, which is a layer different from the effect layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed.

The Super Reach effect has a first half and a second half. When a screen transformation effect is executed, the first half is more likely to produce a red light-emitting effect, indicating that progression to the second half, the so-called hidden button effect, is certain or highly anticipated. The screen transformation effect here preferably occurs before the Super Reach effect. For example, the screen transformation effect is executed during the step-up preview effect before the Reach state is reached. However, other examples include a screen transformation effect that freezes an enemy character during a Super Reach effect executed in the first half, and the red light-emitting effect, indicating the appearance of a hidden button effect, is more likely to occur in the first half. A hidden button effect is an effect in which, although no button image or button operation instructions are displayed on the screen, a specific effect (here, a light-emitting effect) appears when the player operates the effect button 109 at a specified timing. This effect is executed in the first half. The light-emitting effect is an effect in which the color of the light emitted by the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the light-simulating effect display (color as an image) on the effect display device 60 change; the degree of expectation increases as the light color changes from blue to green to red (the degree of expectation of progression to the second half or the degree of expectation of a jackpot increases). The hidden button effect can also be automatically triggered by holding down the effect button 109. As a variation, if a screen transformation effect that freezes an enemy character is executed in the second half of a Super Reach effect rather than the first half, when the screen transformation effect is executed in the second half, the effect button 109 may be automatically triggered by holding down the effect button 109 during the first half of the Super Reach effect (automatic repeated pressing is possible by holding down the effect button 109), compared to when the screen transformation effect is not executed. This may be configured so that the color of the light emitted by the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the light-simulating effect display on the effect display device 60 are more likely to be red, indicating that progression to the second half of the Super Reach effect is certain or highly expected, rather than blue or green.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, a button image that is not a normal color (e.g., white), such as a red or rainbow-colored button image indicating a relatively high likelihood of winning a jackpot, is more likely to be displayed. The button image in this case may be the button image before the reach state or the button image during the super reach effect. When the player actually operates effect button 109 while this button image is displayed, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, if a button image is displayed before the reach state and effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue preview effect (in which the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the dialogue content and color of the speech bubble) is displayed, and if a button image is displayed during the super reach effect (at the end of the second half) and effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the likelihood of winning a jackpot varies depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, when a non-normal color button image is displayed, rather than a normal color button image, the type of effect with a higher probability of winning (a red dialogue preview effect rather than a blue dialogue preview effect, or a red cut-in effect rather than a blue cut-in effect) is more likely to be displayed in response to operation of the effect button 109. In addition, in this embodiment, if a screen transformation effect is executed before the button image is displayed, a non-normal color button image is more likely to be displayed than a normal color button image, compared to when a screen transformation effect is not executed. Note that an effect that instructs (prompts) a player to perform an operation by displaying a button image is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).

Furthermore, this embodiment includes a button appearance teaser, which is a teaser that indicates whether or not the operation instruction performance (button performance) will begin. In this button appearance teaser, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, creating anticipation that a button image resembling the performance button 109 will subsequently appear (i.e., the operation instruction performance will begin). If the silhouette image of the performance button 109 gradually changes into a button image during this button appearance teaser, the teaser is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 fades out of the screen during this button appearance teaser, the teaser is unsuccessful. Note that when a button image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute this button appearance teaser; the button image may be displayed immediately without first going through the button appearance teaser. Here, the button appearance teaser may have multiple display modes. In such a configuration, for example, a button appearance teaser with a red effect may be configured to be more likely to change into a button image than a button appearance teaser with a blue effect. As another variation, when a button appearance prompting effect is executed, it may always change to a button image. In such a configuration, a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect, or multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a high expectation preview effect is more likely to be executed with a red button image than with a blue button image; for example, a red dialogue preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue dialogue preview effect), and a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect may be configured to have a more specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect. If the button appearance prompt always changes to a button image when it is executed, other than the above, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a longer (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompt has a higher probability of winning than a shorter (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompt, or a longer (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompt has a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a shorter (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompt. Furthermore, if multiple types of button appearance prompt display modes are provided, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a more promising button appearance prompt is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach). Alternatively, the button appearance prompt may not be executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and may be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach).

While the operation instruction effect is being executed, a valid operation period (valid input time) is set during which operation of the effect button 109 is valid. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 109 is validly accepted. "Validly accepting operation of the effect button 109" means that when the effect button 109 is operated, the operation of the effect button 109 is validly accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on that valid operation. Note that the predetermined process corresponds to the process of proceeding with the dialogue preview effect in response to operation of the effect button 109. During this valid operation period, the effect button 109 (the LED element built into the effect button 109) is illuminated, and a button image resembling the effect button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining valid operation period are displayed on the screen to notify the user that operation of the effect button 109 is valid or to encourage operation input. In addition, a circular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as a "specific image") is displayed around the button image on the screen. This specific image gradually expands as the valid operation period elapses. If the effect button 109 is operated during the valid operation period, the effect progresses to a dialogue preview effect. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to its final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the valid operation period), but other button effects (button effects other than the operation instruction effect) in this embodiment are effects (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the valid operation period).

When a dialogue preview effect is performed in which one of multiple characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and speaks a specific line, a specific image is continuously displayed around the character in its final display mode. In this dialogue preview effect, the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated depending on the display mode (display color) of the line spoken by the character. In this embodiment, three colors are set as the display colors for the lines: "blue," "red," and "giraffe pattern." The expected probability of a jackpot increases by one level in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern." When the dialogue preview effect is initiated (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a variation of this embodiment, the dialogue preview effect may be configured as a step-up type effect. This step-up effect divides the preview effect display process into multiple stages, with the number of displayed stages being variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, it is an evolving type of effect in which the presentation style (characters and dialogue) changes in stages according to a predetermined order, and the level of likelihood of a jackpot is suggested or indicated according to the number of stages that evolve. For example, the step-up effect may be configured with two presentation steps (Step Up 1, Step Up 2), with the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in Step Up 1, the first presentation step, being different from the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in Step Up 2, the second presentation step.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance promotion effect starts, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the promotion button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into a button image and promotion is successful, the operation instruction effect starts.
(B) When the operation instruction effect starts, the effective operation period of the effect button 109 is set, the effect button 109 is illuminated, and a button image imitating the effect button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining effective operation period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific image (effect image) in the shape of a ring emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. This display encourages the user to operate the effect button 109 within the effective button operation period.
(C) As the valid button operation period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the valid operation period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue preview effect. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. Meanwhile, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as is.
(D) When the line preview effect begins, a character and the line "This is your big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image continues to be displayed around the character and line in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction effect and the line preview effect in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the line preview effect will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (it is suggested that the current button effect is a line preview effect).

As a variation of the above-described embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompt effect may be determined by lottery, and the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompt effect is executed than when it is not executed. Alternatively, the longer the execution time of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image), the relatively higher the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable display, or a highly accurate indication of whether or not a jackpot has occurred may be generated in response to button operation. In this case, if the line preview effect (button appearance prompt effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above), it is preferable that the duration of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image) be set longer than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. Conversely, the duration of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set shorter than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. As another variation, multiple display modes (e.g., blue button image, red button image, rainbow button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared as the display mode of the button image. In this case, whether or not the button appearance teaser effect can be executed and the duration of the effect if executed may vary depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed thereafter. As a further variation, the line preview effect may be executed (and button images may be displayed) even during one or more variable displays (pre-reading variable displays that are pre-target variations) before the pending activation ball of the pre-reading target is consumed. The likelihood of the button appearance teaser effect being executed may be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the variable display) when the pending activation ball of the pre-reading target is consumed. Alternatively, the likelihood of a high-expectation button appearance teaser effect (such as a button appearance teaser effect with a red effect as described above or a long-duration button appearance teaser effect (e.g., 4 seconds)) may be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display (the variable display) when the pending activation ball of the pre-reading target is consumed. In other variations, when a button appearance prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the changing display (a predetermined timing before the close) (or a low-expectation button appearance prompting effect is executed instead of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect), and a button appearance prompting effect is executed in the second half of the changing display (a specific timing after the close) (or a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect is executed instead of a low-expectation button appearance prompting effect), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the close, which is the first half of the changing display, and the specific timing after the close, which is the second half of the changing display, is (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot may be, or the button image in the specific timing after the close, which is the second half of the changing display, may be more likely to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which button appearance pattern A is used in the first half of the changing display (a predetermined timing before the close), and button appearance pattern B is used in the second half of the changing display (a specific timing after the close). Furthermore, although details will be described later, timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, may start from the start of the variable display, and timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may start from the start of a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect), and the timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be configured to be longer than the timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display.

A screen transformation effect may be executed as a preview effect based on a pre-read. In this configuration, the screen transformation effect is not executed from the pattern change currently being executed at the time of the new ball being scored, which is the pre-read timing, but is executed from the next change (the change following the change with the new ball being scored). Specifically, the change with the new ball being scored results in a normal pattern change (the normal decorative pattern 502 changes without the screen being transformed). The normal pattern change (the normal decorative pattern 502 changes without the screen being transformed) continues until immediately after the start of the next change (e.g., 0.5 seconds after the change begins). From then on, the pattern change continues with the screen transformation effect executed until the middle of the target change that was the subject of the pre-read (e.g., 10 seconds after the target change begins). The pattern change with the screen transformation effect executed is, for example, the display of the normal decorative pattern 502 changing when the screen is tilted or reduced in size. As mentioned above, for target variations that are the subject of pre-reading, the screen transformation effect continues until partway through, after which it switches to the normal symbol change effect. Note that it switches at least until it develops into a Super Reach effect. Even if a power outage or other power abnormality occurs during a pre-target variation that is partway through a screen transformation effect that continues across multiple symbol change effects, and the power is restored after the outage, as a general rule, the original screen transformation effect will not be restored for the pre-target variation. However, the screen transformation effect may be executed again for target variations that are the subject of pre-reading.

If an error occurs before the screen transformation effect is executed, preventing the start of the pre-transformation effect that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed, the screen transformation effect will not be executed even when the timing for starting the pre-transformation effect arrives. For example, this would occur if a malfunction occurs in the timer that measures the timing of the effect using the timing means 307 of the sub-board 300, preventing the start of the pre-transformation effect that should be displayed in the frame image to be transformed. As a variant, even if the pre-transformation effect cannot be started due to a timer malfunction or the like, the screen transformation effect may be executed with only the background effect currently being displayed as the target of transformation.

The standby demo screen is displayed on the presentation layer 524, but is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation presentation. In a modified example, the standby demo screen may be displayed on the game status layer 523.

When the screen transformation effect is designed to be executed in response to the player's operation of the effect button 109, the timing at which the execution of the screen transformation effect begins depends on the timing at which the operation of the effect button 109 begins. Note that although the button image is also displayed on the effect layer 524, it is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect; rather, after the effect button 109 is operated and the button image is erased, the screen transformation effect is executed. In a modified example, the button image may also be displayed on the game status layer 523. Furthermore, in a further modified example, if the timing for displaying the button image is reached while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the button image may also be subject to transformation (transformation), and the effect displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 109 while the button image is displayed may also be subject to transformation (transformation). In addition, when a button image starts to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, if the timing at which the button image finishes displaying is earlier than the timing at which the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the end of its display, but if the timing at which the button image finishes displaying is later than the timing at which the screen transformation effect ends, the button image will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to halfway of its display, and will then be displayed in its normal form (without transformation) until the end. The same applies to the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed; if an effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed starts to be displayed while a screen transformation effect is being executed, and if the display of the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed ends earlier than the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to the end, but if the display of the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed ends later than the execution of the screen transformation effect ends, the effect that is displayed when the effect button 109 is operated while the button image is displayed will be displayed as a screen transformation effect from the start to partway through, and will then be displayed in the normal mode (without transformation) until the end.

While a screen transformation effect is being executed, if a hold corresponding to a new ball is generated and the advance information corresponding to that hold is information that allows for the execution of a look-ahead preview effect, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect will be restricted (for example, if it is a hold with a high expectation that allows for the execution of a super reach effect, or if it is a hold that will result in a jackpot). For example, while a screen transformation effect is being executed, control may be exercised so that a look-ahead preview effect triggered by a new ball is not executed, or control may be exercised so that the look-ahead itself is not executed.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simple decorative pattern 504 is displayed as part of the image showing the game status on the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. Therefore, before the screen transformation effect begins, the simple decorative pattern 504 was displayed within the effect screen 500, i.e., in a position overlapping the framed image 514. However, when the framed image 514 is reduced in size during the screen transformation effect, the simple decorative pattern 504 may be displayed outside the framed image 514, for example, in a position overlapping the framed image 510, which is the special first image, or the background image 518, which is the second image (this display relationship occurs at a predetermined timing during the execution of the screen transformation effect, for example, in the middle of the game). Meanwhile, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not included in the image showing the game status on the game status layer 523 during the screen transformation effect, but may be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. Therefore, during a screen transformation effect, normal decorative pattern 502 may be displayed in a position overlapping framed image 514, which is the special first image, but not in a position overlapping background image 518, which is the second image. While this display relationship is preferably always satisfied while a screen transformation effect is being executed, as a modified example, such a display relationship may be established at least at a predetermined timing (e.g., midway) during the execution of the screen transformation effect (or, at a timing other than the predetermined timing, it may be displayed in a position overlapping background image 518). As another modified example, normal decorative pattern 502 may also be displayed as part of the image showing the game status on game status layer 523.

When a screen transformation effect is executed, the simple hold image 507 is displayed so that it is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523, which is not the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. On the other hand, the normal hold image 506 is not included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523 in the screen transformation effect, but can be included in the frame image that is the target of transformation in the effect layer 524. As a variant, the normal hold image 506 may also be displayed so that it is included in the image showing the game status of the game status layer 523.

As mentioned above, when the normal decorative symbol 502 is configured to perform not only fluctuations (e.g., movement from top to bottom), but also displays with predetermined actions (action at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action at reach, shaking action) at the start of fluctuation, immediately after a temporary stop, after a reach is achieved, during a temporary stop, etc., a jackpot action may be configured to be executed as a further predetermined action, such as enlarging the display of symbols when three symbols, such as "777," are lined up to form a jackpot combination. In such a configuration, it is preferable that the screen transformation effect is not executed when a jackpot action is executed, but that the screen transformation effect can be executed when other predetermined actions are executed. It is also preferable that the jackpot action is not executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, but that other predetermined actions can be executed.

If a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 may be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect, or the normal hold image 506 may not be included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect. In the case of a change that develops into a Super Reach effect, this is preferably the specification for the change period leading up to the development into a Super Reach effect. Since the normal hold image 506 is not displayed while a Super Reach effect is being displayed, when a screen transformation effect is executed for a Super Reach effect, it is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect in either case. Note that the duration of the process of transforming the frame image in the screen transformation effect (i.e. the execution period of the screen transformation effect) is set to be longer than the animation display time when a hold occurs, regardless of the effect that is the target of transformation.

When a hold is stored during a normal effect, the effect display device 60 displays a normal hold image 506 indicating the number of holds. Of the normal hold images 506, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the lottery value at which the pattern change display began is switched to a changing image 508 indicating that the pattern is changing. Here, while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, while the changing image 508 continues to be displayed. A still-in-frame effect, which is one type of screen transformation effect, is an effect in which the effect that was displayed up until then is frozen as if paused, and the still frame image is transformed. From an effect perspective, it is preferable not to include moving images within the frame image, so the normal hold image 506 is hidden. On the other hand, the changing image 508 does not increase or decrease during pattern change, so it continues to be displayed even while the screen transformation effect is being executed. In a modified example, the changing image 508 may also be hidden while the screen transformation effect is being executed.

The simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being performed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being performed, the normal hold image 506 is not additionally displayed, but the number of holds shown on the simple hold image 507 is increased without interrupting the screen transformation effect.

When executing a still-in-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal hold image 506 may be included in the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the effect that was displayed up until then, like a paused display. If an animation display is being executed when a hold occurs, that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. The display of the changing image 508 may also be included in the frame image, and that animation display is also included in the frame image in a still state. Note that while the screen transformation effect is being executed, the simple hold image 507 continues to be displayed. As a result, even if a new hold occurs while the screen transformation effect is being executed, no additional normal hold image 506 is displayed, but the number of holds indicated by the simple hold image 507 is increased without disrupting the screen transformation effect.

When executing a still-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, the normal decorative pattern 502 may be hidden and not included in the frame image, which is a still image that freezes the previously displayed effect as if it were paused. Meanwhile, the simple decorative pattern 504 continues to change. Note that the pause time of the screen transformation effect is longer than the time it takes for the simple decorative pattern 504 to change one revolution (for example, as mentioned above, if the simple decorative pattern 504 is "1" to "7" and changes as follows: "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., one revolution is the time from the first "123" to the next "123"). In this way, if it is possible to recognize that the simple decorative pattern 504 makes at least one revolution during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to determine whether the current game situation is paused or truly stopped (game is not progressing).

Also, unlike configuration 32, when executing a still-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, normal decorative pattern 502 may be included in a frame image, which is a still image that freezes the effect that was displayed up until that point, as if paused. In this case, normal decorative pattern 502 is a fixed display. In other words, normal decorative pattern 502 does not change or animate. On the other hand, simple decorative pattern 504 continues to change. Note that the still time of the effect in the screen transformation effect is longer than the time it takes for simple decorative pattern 504 to change one cycle (for example, as mentioned above, if the types of simple decorative pattern 504 are "1" to "7," and the display changes as follows: "123" → "234" → "345" → "456" → "567" → "671" → "712" → "123" → ..., one cycle is from the first "123" to the next "123"). In this way, if it can be recognized that the simple decorative pattern 504 rotates at least once during the screen transformation effect, it is possible to distinguish whether the current game situation is paused or has actually stopped (game is not progressing).

In a still-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, a still image that has been frozen as if paused during a display and that has been previously displayed, and that has been color-inverted, may be included in the target object 516 as the still-frame image 514, and the freezing and color inversion may be processed simultaneously, or the transformation process may be performed simultaneously. However, while a still-frame effect, which is one of the screen transformation effects, is being executed, it is also possible to execute a still-frame effect in which a frame image, which is a still image that has been frozen as if paused during a display, is the target of transformation, but the transformation process does not start while the effect is frozen.
Even during the screen transformation effect, the volume setting image 532 can be displayed and the volume can be adjusted.
When the screen deformation effect is executed under the condition that the volume setting image 532 is displayed before the occurrence of the screen deformation effect, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as it is, and at the same time, the volume can also be adjusted through operation by the player.

If an error warning image 536 is displayed due to an error occurring before the screen transformation effect is executed, the error warning image 536 will remain displayed. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted by the player in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed in the volume and light intensity display layer 522 in Figure 33. However, the volume setting image 532 is not included in the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation during the execution of the screen transformation effect, and if the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by further player operation during the execution of the screen transformation effect and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, the volume setting image 532 will be displayed in the non-transformed display mode during both the execution of the screen transformation effect and before the display change (e.g., displaying "Volume level is 1") and the execution of the screen transformation effect and after the display change (e.g., displaying "Volume level is 2"). Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the screen transformation effect is executed, and the screen transformation effect is executed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a player operation while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the screen transformation effect is being executed, the volume setting image 532 before the screen transformation effect is executed and before the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the screen transformation effect is executed and after the display change (for example, displaying "Volume level is 2") are both displayed in a display mode without screen transformation.

If a still-frame effect (such as pausing the effect that was displayed up until that point), which is one of the screen transformation effects, is executed while the animation of the normal hold image 506 is being displayed when a hold occurs, is performed, and if the display of the normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animation display of the normal hold image 506 may be stopped (in other words, the display of the normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animation display of the normal hold image 506 referred to here is the animation display that occurs when a normal hold occurs, and does not include displays that change the color or pattern of the normal hold image 506 as a preview effect.

In a screen transformation effect, if the frame image of the video that was displayed up until that point (a single frame image frozen as in a paused display in the case of a still-framed effect, or multiple frame images that are switched sequentially in the case of a video-in-framed effect) is the subject of color inversion (the subject of transformation), the volume setting image 532 can be displayed even during color inversion, and the volume can be adjusted in parallel through operation by the player. Note that the "color inversion" that follows also targets both the frame image frozen as in a paused display in a still-framed effect, and the multiple frame images that are switched sequentially in a video-in-framed effect, as the subject of color inversion processing.
In a situation where a volume setting image 532 is displayed before color inversion is performed, even if color inversion is subsequently performed, the display of the volume setting image 532 continues as is, and the volume can also be adjusted through operation by the player in parallel.
If an error occurs before color inversion and the error warning image 536 is displayed, the error warning image 536 will continue to be displayed even if color inversion is subsequently performed. Even if the error warning sound is output at the maximum volume, which is the specified volume, the volume can be adjusted by the player in parallel, and the volume setting image 532 can be displayed in the volume light intensity display layer 522 of FIG. 33 . However, the volume setting image 532 is not subject to color inversion. More specifically, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation during color inversion, and if the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a further player operation during color inversion and while the volume setting image 532 is displayed, the volume setting image 532 will be displayed in a non-color inverted display mode both during color inversion and before the display change (e.g., displaying "volume level 1") and after the display change (e.g., displaying "volume level 2") Furthermore, if the volume setting image 532 is displayed by a player operation immediately before the color inversion is performed, and the color inversion is performed immediately thereafter (while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed), and the volume is adjusted and the display of the volume setting image 532 is changed by a player operation while the volume setting image 532 is being displayed and the color inversion is being performed, the volume setting image 532 before the color inversion is performed and before the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 1") and the volume setting image 532 after the color inversion is performed and after the display change (for example, displaying "volume level is 2") are both displayed in a non-color inverted display mode.
If color inversion is performed during the animated display of normal hold image 506 when a hold occurs, and the display of normal hold image 506 is to be maintained, the animated display of normal hold image 506 may be stopped (i.e., the display of normal hold image 506 continues, but is displayed without animation). The animated display of normal hold image 506 here refers to the animated display when a normal hold occurs, and does not include displays that change the color or pattern of normal hold image 506 as a preview preview effect.

FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a plurality of buffer areas obtained by dividing a frame buffer.
The performance display control means 305 includes a frame buffer 338 that temporarily stores frame images that make up the moving image to be displayed on the performance display device 60. The frame buffer 338 is divided to include five buffer areas, namely, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, a third buffer area 544, a fourth buffer area 546, and a fifth buffer area 548, each of which has a capacity capable of storing frame images.
In a presentation pattern that executes a screen transformation presentation, for example, three buffer areas, namely, a first buffer area 540, a second buffer area 542, and a third buffer area 544, are used.

FIG. 36 shows a schematic diagram of the relationship between the display size of a frame image and the capacity of the frame buffer area.
The frame buffer 338 of this embodiment includes at least a first buffer area 540 having a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a first display size that exceeds the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and a second buffer area 542 that is an area different from the first buffer area 540 and has a capacity capable of storing a frame image of a second display size that is the same as or smaller than the screen area size of the effect display device 60. As shown schematically in FIG. 36 , the first buffer area 540 has a capacity capable of storing an image of the target object 516 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the first display size"). The second buffer area 542 has a capacity capable of storing the framed image 514 (i.e., the above-mentioned "frame image of the second display size"), but does not have enough capacity to store the entire target object 516. When the image of the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, its display size exceeds the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and mainly the frame image 510 falls outside the screen area. Therefore, only the framed image 514 is actually displayed on the effect display device 60 so that it can be seen by the player. In other words, when the target object 516 is displayed at 100% size, most of the frame image 510 is barely displayed on the effect display device 60, or even if a portion of it is displayed, it is hidden by the center decoration 64 and is virtually impossible for the player to see. When displaying effects that may be subject to at least a screen transformation effect, the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and when displaying effects that are not subject to a screen transformation effect, the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer. The multiple types of effect patterns include a first special effect pattern in which effects that may be subject to a screen transformation effect are defined, and a second special effect pattern in which effects that are not subject to a screen transformation effect are defined.

As shown in Figure 35, the third buffer area 544, fourth buffer area 546, and fifth buffer area 548 also have the same capacity as the second buffer area 542, and are able to store the framed image 514, but not the entire target object 516. In this way, the first buffer area 540 is the only buffer area that can store the target object 516, including the frame image 510, while the other buffer areas are limited to a capacity that cannot store the target object 516 but can store the framed image 514. As a result, even in the frame buffer 338, which does not necessarily have an abundant data capacity, five buffer areas can be secured by keeping the capacity of each buffer area to the minimum necessary. This also makes it possible to avoid contention over the use of buffer areas in the drawing process, thereby reducing the processing burden and efficiently diversifying the presentation.

The first special effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the first buffer area 540 is used as a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by combining an image showing the game status and a background image, which are obtained by deforming a frame image of a first display size stored in the first buffer area 540 at a predetermined timing so that the image can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60, and the new frame images are stored in the first buffer area 540, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. The second special effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the second buffer area 542 is used as a frame buffer, and new frame images are sequentially generated by combining an image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, which is deformed so that the frame image can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60, which are obtained by deforming a frame image of a second display size stored in the second buffer area 542 at a predetermined timing, which are obtained by deforming a frame image of a second display size, which are stored in the second buffer area 542, and the new frame images are stored in the second buffer area 542, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60, and a second special effect different from the first special effect is defined.
For each of the plurality of types of special effect patterns, it is determined which of the plurality of buffer areas is to be used as a frame buffer.

For example, the first special effect pattern uses the first buffer area 540, the second special effect pattern uses the second buffer area 542, and the third special effect pattern uses the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546. In this way, it is possible to define multiple types of special effect patterns that use different buffer areas according to the size of the frame image to be transformed by the screen transformation effect, thereby providing diversity in the effects while maintaining the efficiency of the drawing process and the utilization efficiency of the frame buffer 338.
There may be multiple types of special effect patterns that use overlapping buffer areas, such as the fourth special effect pattern being determined to use the first buffer area 540 like the first special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern being determined to use the second buffer area 542 like the second special effect pattern.
The first special effect pattern and the second special effect pattern are not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, their execution timings do not overlap). The fourth special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern are also not executed simultaneously in parallel (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, their execution timings do not overlap). The third special effect pattern is not executed simultaneously in parallel with the first special effect pattern, the second special effect pattern, the fourth special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern (by design, they are not executed within the same variation, or even if they are executed within the same variation, their execution timings do not overlap).

For multiple special effect patterns that are scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (that is, by design, can be executed within the same variation and may have overlapping execution times within the same variation), different buffer areas are specified to be used for each. However, for multiple special effect patterns that are not scheduled to be displayed simultaneously (that is, that are not executed within the same variation by design, or that are executed within the same variation but may have overlapping execution times), if a decision is made to display an effect using one special effect pattern while another special effect pattern is being displayed, the effect using the later-determined special effect pattern is displayed with priority over the effect using the special effect pattern that was displayed earlier. For example, if a first special effect pattern and a fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer area 540 are executed simultaneously, the effect of the previously-executed special effect pattern is stopped, and the effect of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is executed with priority. Similarly, if the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern, which use the same second buffer area 542, are executed simultaneously in parallel, the execution of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the execution of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is started as a priority.

Here, "canceling the execution of the special effect pattern that was being executed earlier" may be a process of canceling the execution of the screen transformation effect that was being executed and returning to playback of the video image before the screen transformation effect was initiated. This prevents processing problems that may occur when the buffer space used is conflicted, even if the number of special effect patterns targeted by the screen transformation effect is increased. Furthermore, even if screen transformation effects overlap, normal image processing can be maintained and the image processing burden reduced by ceasing the screen transformation effect and switching the priority effect. As a variant, the design may be configured to simultaneously execute multiple types of special effect patterns that use the same buffer space (i.e., they may be designed to be executed simultaneously). In such a configuration, for example, if a first special effect pattern and a fourth special effect pattern that use the same first buffer space 540 are simultaneously executed in parallel, the execution of the previously executed special effect pattern is stopped, and the execution of the special effect pattern commanded later is prioritized and initiated. Similarly, when the second special effect pattern and the fifth special effect pattern, which use the same second buffer area 542, are executed simultaneously in parallel, the effect of the special effect pattern that was executed first is stopped, and the effect of the special effect pattern that was commanded later is given priority and begins to be executed.

Figure 37 schematically illustrates the process of transforming a frame image stored in a buffer area. First, at a predetermined timing when the screen transformation effect begins, a frame image stored in the first buffer area 540 of the frame buffer 338 is read into the drawing memory 334 (S900). This frame image is the target object 516, which includes the frame image 514 and the frame image 510, and is one frame of the moving image that had been displayed up until then. This frame image is read into the drawing memory 334 and transformed. The next frame image of the moving image that had been displayed up until then is the frame image that was originally intended to be displayed, but from now on, a new frame image generated by the transformation and compositing processes will be displayed in place of that frame image. Therefore, in a still-frame effect, the enemy character contained in the content of this frame image, which had been displayed as moving up until then, becomes still in this frame image, and becomes like a captured image of the moving image. In a moving-image effect, the frame images read into the drawing memory 334 are sequentially switched, and the enemy character contained in the content of those frame images is displayed as continuing to move.

When the target object 516 is stored in the first buffer area 540 and displayed on the effect display device 60, the frame image 510 is located outside the screen area of the effect display device 60, making it virtually invisible to the player, or only a small portion of it visible. This target object 516 is then reduced (S902) so that the frame image 510 fits within the screen area of the effect display device 60, making the entire target object 516 visible. For convenience, this diagram depicts the target object 516 as being 100% in size at S10, and reduced to approximately 80% at S12. However, the actual rendering process for moving images does not instantaneously switch from 100% to 80%; rather, microscopically, it is a gradual reduction process in which the rendering is repeatedly reduced by, for example, 1% each time a new frame image is generated. The foreground image 517 and background image 518 are then overlaid on the reduced target object 516 (S904). In this diagram, an example of a foreground image 517 is shown in which a lightning-shaped object is overlaid in the foreground of the target object 516, but other images showing the game status, such as simple decorative patterns 504 and simple hold images 507, are also overlaid in the foreground with their content updated for each frame image. The images overlaid in S14 are combined to form the next frame image 519 (S906), which is written to the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that will make up the moving image.

The target object 516 of S14 is gradually deformed as subsequent frame images are drawn. For example, the target object 516 of S14 is color-inverted, another foreground image 517 is overlaid on that image (S908), and an image showing the game status, such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and simple hold image 507, and a background image 518 are overlaid. These overlaid images are then combined to form a new frame image 519 (S910), which is written to the first buffer area 540 to become the next frame image that constitutes the moving image. Thereafter, the target object 516 is sequentially deformed for each subsequent frame image, and the foreground image 517 and background image 518 are overlaid, and an image showing the game status, such as the updated simple decorative pattern 504 and simple hold image 507, is overlaid (S912), and new frame images are then combined to form the moving image.

The effects of the first and fourth special effect patterns comprise a single effect image made up of a main image portion with a display size equal to the screen area size of the effect display device 60 and a frame image 510 formed to surround the periphery of that main image portion. New frame images are sequentially generated by combining an image showing the game status with an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image have been changed so that at least a portion of the frame image 510, which is initially positioned outside the screen area of the effect display device 60, can be displayed within the screen area of the effect display device 60, thereby displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60. In this way, when the screen transformation effect is performed, the frame image 510, which is normally difficult to see, is intentionally made visible while being transformed by enlarging, reducing, or oscillating, thereby creating an even more dynamic effect. If the normal hold image 506 is to be displayed in the frame image 510, the image including the normal hold image 506 may also be transformed using the screen transformation effect.

The effects of the second special effect pattern, the third special effect pattern, and the fifth special effect pattern are achieved by constructing one effect image with a main image portion of a display size equal to the screen area size of the effect display device 60, and displaying a moving image on the effect display device 60 by sequentially generating new frame images that combine an image in which the display ratio and shape of the effect image have been changed with an image showing the game status.
In the effects of the second, third, and fifth special effect patterns, the frame image 510 is not displayed. Note that the frame image 510 is not displayed under certain circumstances, such as during a standby demo screen or a jackpot.

Figure 38 shows an example screen of the third special effect pattern. The third special effect pattern is an effect involving a screen transformation effect, the timing of which is determined by operating the effect button 109. In the third special effect pattern, a button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing, prompting the player to operate the effect button 109. When the player operates the effect button 109, the frame image is transformed using the screen transformation effect. The button image 550 is displayed multiple times, and each time the effect button 109 is operated in accordance with the button image 550, the frame image is transformed using the screen transformation effect.

In the third special effect pattern, when effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are sequentially generated by combining a modified image of the frame image at the time of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and these new frame images are stored in first buffer area 540, causing a moving image to be displayed on effect display device 60. Furthermore, when effect button 109 is operated, new frame images are sequentially generated by combining a modified image of the frame image stored in first buffer area 540 at the time of the operation input with an image showing the game status, and these new frame images are stored in second buffer area 542, causing a moving image to be displayed on effect display device 60.

Figure 39 schematically shows the process of using the buffer areas in the third special effect pattern. In the third special effect pattern, frame images are stored alternately in the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 each time the player operates the effect button 109. That is, frame images of the currently displayed moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed at a predetermined timing (S920). When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S922), an image is generated that has been transformed using the screen transformation effect (S924), and this is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S926). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546, and the button image 550 is again displayed at a predetermined timing.

When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the fourth buffer area 546 (S928), an image is generated that has been modified using the screen deformation effect (S930), and this is stored in the third buffer area 544 as the next frame image (S932). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the third buffer area 544, and the button image 550 is displayed again at a predetermined timing. When the player operates the button image 550, a frame image is read from the third buffer area 544 (S934), an image is generated that has been modified using the screen deformation effect (S936), and this is stored in the fourth buffer area 546 as the next frame image (S938). Frame images of the moving image are stored sequentially in the fourth buffer area 546.

In this way, the third buffer area 544 and the fourth buffer area 546 are alternately used to repeatedly store frame images that are moved slightly. This allows the player to clearly see the progress and display of effects that must be visually recognized by the player when a screen transformation effect is executed, such as the effect button 109 and images showing the game status, while maintaining the sense of dynamism, thereby achieving both a sense of dynamism in the effect and visibility of the effect progress. Furthermore, when executing effects that place a high processing load, such as repeated screen transformation effects, the buffer area can be divided into multiple areas and processed alternately, distributing the processing load and avoiding malfunctions.

In the third special effect pattern, the button image 550 is not included in the target of transformation by the screen transformation effect.
The sixth special effect pattern may further be included. The effect of the sixth special effect pattern is not subject to transformation by the screen transformation effect, but includes an effect mode that resembles a screen transformation effect. However, since it is not a screen transformation effect, both the first display element and the second display element are operated in an effect-like manner, but the first display element and the second display element are not synchronized, as in the screen transformation effect, in an effect-like manner (for example, the first display element is a background display, and the second display element is a normal decorative pattern 502 or a display object specific to that effect).

In addition, during the execution of a special game in this embodiment, based on the detection of a ball entering the large prize opening during the special game, a count-up effect can be executed on the screen of the effect display device 60, which counts up the total number of prize balls (for example, if the currently acquired number of prize balls is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the effect of counting up by one is 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). Furthermore, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display reaches a specific number, a highlight display can be executed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display reaches 2500, a display of "2500" is displayed in a larger size than the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display, separate from the display in the count-up effect). The specifications described below may be adopted for these effects and displays. When the large prize opening 20 opens during one unit game, it closes when nine game balls enter it (note that the prize balls for one ball entering it are "15"). In this way, the number of game balls that is the end condition for a unit game (the condition for closing the large prize opening 20) is referred to as the specified count number.

(1) If an over-entry (a ball that exceeds the specified count) occurs while a count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within the specified count (particularly a count-up effect corresponding to the ninth count, which is the specified count) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-entry be configured to start after all count-up effects that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo begins), the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large prize opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and 15 balls have not yet been counted up, it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the large prize opening 20 in the next round will start after all 15 balls of the count-up effect that have not yet been counted up have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted up).

(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds," meaning that the count-up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds." The execution time of the count-up effect is calculated by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize slot 20, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds." However, even when a special game is being played, the count-up effect is configured not to be executed during the execution of the opening demo or the closing demo. Furthermore, the execution time of the count-up effect is set to be shorter than the interval time (also referred to as the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the ending demo. It is the unit game waiting time or ending demo waiting time during which the special prize opening 20 remains closed from the start of its closing operation, and is set to 2 seconds for all round games. Furthermore, by configuring the count-up effect time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if a count-up effect is performed based on a game ball entering the special prize opening 20 just before the end of a unit game, the count-up effect will be completed within the interval time after the end of that unit game. This reduces the possibility that the count-up effect will extend beyond the interval period and continue into the next unit game or the ending demo (if an over-entry occurs, the interval period may be exceeded), and the division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the ending demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up presentation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up presentation time is set to 0.45 seconds. The execution time of the end demo is set to 20 seconds, common to all jackpot types (jackpot presentations). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the end of the special game. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game during which it is possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 20 (i.e., it is detected as a target for a prize ball payout, and is not determined to be an illegal entry), but the execution time of the end demo is set as a preparation time for a game (presentation mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game, during which it is not possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 20. By configuring the count-up presentation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up presentation is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the large prize opening 20 is closed after the final unit game (even during the end demo period), if the count-up presentation is performed, the count-up presentation will be completed within the end demo period. As a result, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demo period and into the variable display after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of game balls in this one unit game (the count-up presentation for the number of prize balls that can be won in one unit game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of game balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up presentation time) x 10 balls (specified count) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (jackpot in-game presentations). In this embodiment, the total time for the count-up effect for the specified number of counts (4.5 seconds) is shorter than the execution time for the jackpot end demo (20 seconds). This means that even if multiple count-up effects are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls consecutively entering the large prize entry port 20 near the end of the final unit game, or even after the large prize entry port 20 closes after the final unit game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect will not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period and extend into the variable display after the special game ends, clearly defining the boundary between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

<Types of conditions that make it easy to score>
The states relating to the ease of scoring a ball into the second starting hole 12 include a low base state (also called the "normal game state"), which is a state of normal ball scoring ease (a state where the ball is not easy to score), and a high base state, which is a state where the ease of scoring a ball is higher than in the low base state. The high base state is one aspect of the "specific game state" and the "easy ball scoring state."

The specific game control means 270 can set the game state to either a low base state or a high base state.
(1) Low base state In the low base state, which is a state where it is not easy to score a ball (non-time-saving state), when a normal symbol lottery (also called an "opening lottery") is won and the normal symbol is displayed stopped in a winning state, a short opening of 0.1 seconds is executed to open the normal electric device 90. As a variant, in the low base state, all normal symbol lotteries may be lost and the normal electric device 90 may not be opened.
(2) High Base State In the high base state, when the normal symbol lottery is won and the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state in a winning manner, a 5-second long opening is executed to open the normal electric device 90.

<Change performance settings (custom function for frequency of pre-reading performance)>
The effect setting change, which changes the frequency of execution of a predetermined look-ahead effect, can be executed by the player operating the effect button 109 or the cross key 110. This effect setting change is a so-called custom function that allows the player to freely change the settings of various effects according to their preferences.
For example, if a player changes the setting to relatively lower the frequency of the pre-reading effects, the appearance rate of the pre-reading effects will decrease when the preliminary judgment result is neither a big hit nor a small hit. In this case, the appearance rate of the pre-reading effects when the preliminary judgment result is a big hit or a small hit will not necessarily be reduced, so the proportion of the limited pre-reading effect execution opportunities that correspond to a big hit or a small hit will ultimately increase, and the expectation of special games from the pre-reading effects will increase. Such a presentation mode that increases the expectation by reducing the frequency of the pre-reading effects will be referred to as the "pre-reading chance mode" below.

Figure 40 shows an example of a guide screen for the custom function. Figure 40(a) is an example of the first customization guide screen, Figure 40(b) is an example of the second customization guide screen, and Figure 40(c) is an example of the standby demo screen. The first customization guide is displayed when 5 seconds have passed since the symbol fluctuations stopped and the machine is not in play. The first customization guide displays a message that the effect settings can be changed by pressing the effect button 109, but does not display information on how to adjust the volume or brightness. The first customization guide is semi-transparent, so the decorative symbols can be seen even if they overlap the display of the first customization guide. Furthermore, by pressing the effect button 109 while the first customization guide is displayed, the actual machine customization function (changing the effect settings) can be executed.

After the first customization guide is displayed, if 70 seconds have passed in the non-play state, i.e., 75 seconds have passed since the non-play period began, the second customization guide will be displayed. In addition to the display format of the first customization guide, the second customization guide displays volume adjustment guide images and light intensity adjustment guide images at the bottom of the display area, i.e., below the first customization guide. The second customization guide is translucent, just like the first customization guide.

After the second custom guide is displayed, if 165 seconds have passed in the non-play state, i.e., 240 seconds have passed since the non-play period began, the standby demo screen will be displayed. On the standby demo screen, the first and second custom guide displays are erased, and a story display, etc. is displayed. The standby demo screen is not translucent, and if the standby demo screen display and decorative symbols are displayed overlapping each other, the decorative symbols will be invisible or difficult to see (the display area of the decorative symbols will be smaller than that of the standby demo screen display, the decorative symbols will be displayed in a layer behind the standby demo screen display, etc.). If the volume adjustment prohibition flag is on, the second custom guide will not display anything related to the on adjustment.

Figure 41 shows an example of a screen for changing the pre-read chance mode. Figure 41(a) is an example of a screen for selecting the target for which settings are to be changed when changing the effect settings. The player can switch the target for which settings are to be changed by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110. The example shown in the figure shows a state in which "pre-read chance mode" is displayed as the target for setting changes. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the selection of "pre-read chance mode" is confirmed.

Figure 41 (b) is an example of a screen for setting the "Predictive Chance Mode" on or off. The player can switch the "Predictive Chance Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right button on the directional pad 110. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the on or off setting of the "Predictive Chance Mode" is confirmed. Note that the Predictive Chance Mode change screen can be displayed not only when the value is stopped from changing (waiting to play), but also when the value is changing. The player can switch the setting for which they want to change the setting by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110, and can switch the "Predictive Chance Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right button on the directional pad 110. Note that when the value is changing, the on or off setting may be confirmed when the "Predictive Chance Mode" is switched on or off by pressing the left or right button on the directional pad 110, without the need to press the effect button 109. Additionally, a cross key dedicated to effect customization, separate from the cross key used to adjust the volume and light intensity, may be provided; in such a configuration, it will be possible to switch the "Prediction Chance Mode" on and off while adjusting the volume and light intensity.

Please note that even if you set the frequency of pre-reading effects to be lower, the stage and background image will not change. The only visual difference with a setting that increases the frequency of pre-reading effects is, for example, whether or not a custom name is displayed on the edge of the screen. Effects settings can be changed not only while waiting to play, but also while the patterns are changing (however, this does not include reach effects such as Super Reach).

Here, while a look-ahead effect such as a hold change effect is being executed, the look-ahead effect in progress flag is turned on, indicating that a look-ahead effect is being executed. A hold change effect is an effect in which a change in the hold lamp image indicates that the preliminary judgment result of a new ball entering the ball corresponds to a high expectation effect. The look-ahead effect in progress flag that has been turned on remains on until the end of the pattern change corresponding to the hold that was the target of the hold change effect.

While the look-ahead effect in progress flag is on, even if a new ball enters the first starting gate 11 or the second starting gate 12, the execution of a normal look-ahead effect based on advance information related to the new ball entering the first starting gate 11 or the second starting gate 12 is restricted. For example, while the look-ahead effect in progress flag is on, control may be exercised to prevent advance information related to the new ball entering the first starting gate 11 or the second starting gate 12 from being read out, or advance information may be read out but a determination may not be made as to whether a high-expectation effect based on that advance information can be executed, or a determination may be made as to whether a high-expectation effect related to the new ball entering the first starting gate can be executed but the execution of a new look-ahead effect based on that determination result may be restricted. This is because if multiple look-ahead effects are executed simultaneously, the reliability of the look-ahead effect displayed first may be compromised, or the look-ahead effect executed later may have a higher expectation level. In this case, it is conceivable that a player may ignore the look-ahead effect executed earlier and suspend play in anticipation of the look-ahead effect executed later.

<Special prediction effect when the ball goes in>
The special ball entry pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect that indicates immediately after a ball has entered the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12 that there is a high probability of a special game being executed if the advance information regarding the ball entry corresponds to a predetermined result (a big win or a small win). The special ball entry pre-reading effect outputs a loud notification sound when a new ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, and executes a winning flash effect (also referred to as a "winning flash") that causes the decorative lamp 111 to emit intense light. Unlike normal pre-reading effects that are executed at a predetermined timing based on the start of a pattern change effect, the special ball entry pre-reading effect is executed when a new ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, and is therefore realized in a way that catches the player off guard at a timing unrelated to the pattern change effect currently being executed.

In this embodiment, the on/off of the special look-ahead effect mode, which can execute the special look-ahead effect when the ball scores, i.e., whether or not the special look-ahead effect when the ball scores, can be set to the player's preference by changing the effect settings. The player can change the effect settings to turn the special look-ahead effect mode on/off by operating the effect button 109 or the directional pad 110. Such an effect mode, which is set to execute the special look-ahead effect when the ball scores, is hereinafter referred to as the "goal look-ahead mode."

Figure 42 shows an example of a screen for changing the goal-goal prediction mode. Figure 42(a) is an example of a screen for selecting the target for which settings are to be changed when changing effect settings. The player can switch the target for which settings are to be changed by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110. The example shown in the figure shows the state in which "goal-goal prediction mode" is displayed as the target for setting changes. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the selection of "goal-goal prediction mode" is confirmed.

Figure 42 (b) is an example of a screen for setting the "Goal Prediction Mode" on or off. The player can switch the "Goal Prediction Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right button on the directional pad 110. When the player presses the effect button 109 in this state, the on or off setting of the "Goal Prediction Mode" is confirmed. Note that the Goal Prediction Mode change screen can be displayed not only when the game is stopped (waiting to play) but also when the game is changing. The player can switch the setting for which they want to change the setting by pressing the up or down button on the directional pad 110, and can switch the "Goal Prediction Mode" on or off by pressing the left or right button on the directional pad 110. Note that when the game is changing, the on or off setting can be confirmed when the player presses the left or right button on the directional pad 110 to switch the "Goal Prediction Mode" on or off, without needing to press the effect button 109. Additionally, a cross key dedicated to effect customization, separate from the cross key used to adjust the volume and light intensity, may be provided; in such a configuration, it will be possible to switch the "ball entry pre-reading mode" on and off while adjusting the volume and light intensity.

The probability of a big hit or small hit occurring when the special ball-entering special pre-reading effect is executed may be set to 100%, or it may be set to less than 100%. If it is set to less than 100%, it may be executed even when a ball enters that does not actually correspond to a big hit or small hit. Also, even if the special ball-entering special pre-reading effect mode is set to on, the special ball-entering special pre-reading effect may not be executed even if a ball enters that corresponds to a big hit or small hit.

<Changes to stage background and production settings>
43 shows the relationship between whether or not a stage background image is displayed and whether or not the effect settings can be changed. In a low base state, a stage background image corresponding to the current effect stage can be displayed, including during a normal reach effect (normal reach period 670). During the normal reach period 670, in which a stage background image corresponding to the current effect stage is displayed before the development into a predetermined high-expectation reach effect (for example, a so-called super reach effect), the effect settings can be changed in response to a player's operational input.

On the other hand, if the game develops into a specified high-expectation reach performance, the stage background image is hidden during that developed high-expectation reach performance (Super Reach period 672). While the stage background image is hidden after the game develops into a specified high-expectation reach performance, it is not possible to change the performance settings. While a Super Reach performance or the like is being executed, the Super Reach performance image is displayed across the entire screen as a priority, replacing the stage background image corresponding to the current performance stage, and no performance setting changes are made so as not to interfere with the Super Reach performance.

Furthermore, during the specific period (stop display period 674) during which the stage background image is displayed after the development into a specified high-expectation reach effect, execution of effect setting changes is restricted. The stop display period 674 is the period during which, when the Super Reach effect ends with a miss, the screen goes black, returns to the normal stage background image, and the special symbol is displayed still. The stop display period 674 is the period during which the stage background image is displayed from the end of the Super Reach until the special symbol stops, but effect setting changes are not executed, and even if the player operates the directional pad 110 during this period to instruct a change to the effect setting, the change to the effect setting will not be reflected in the effect until the next change.

Note that even during periods when effect setting changes are not possible, the player can press the cross key 110 to display the effect setting change screen and can give instructions to change the effect settings, but the effect setting change will not actually be reflected until the next change. Note that during periods when effect setting changes are not possible, the effect setting change screen will not be displayed even if the player presses the cross key 110, and it may be configured so that it is not possible to give instructions to change the effect settings.

In a modified example, effect setting changes can be made even while a special game is being played (while a unit game is being played). However, if a player achieves 10 or 20 consecutive jackpots (a series of consecutive wins), a video celebrating the achievement can be displayed. In this case, to draw attention to the congratulatory video, the effect setting changes cannot be made while the congratulatory video is being displayed, as this is an invalid period. Also, if an effect setting change is already being made when the invalid period for effect setting changes arrives, the effect setting change screen can be hidden and the effect setting change can be forcibly made. For example, if a super reach effect occurs at the moment the cursor is positioned to input "Yes" on a screen that asks "Do you want to change effect settings?", "Yes" can be forcibly selected and the effect setting change can be reflected.

The decorative symbols include normal decorative symbols that are displayed as the main symbols on the performance display device 60 at least when a special symbol has stopped, and simple decorative symbols that are displayed in a simplified display form than the normal decorative symbols at least when the normal decorative symbols are difficult to see. The normal decorative symbols are symbols that are displayed in a larger size than the simple decorative symbols. The normal decorative symbols are made up of three symbols, and as a general rule, they stop one by one in order after the variable display. The simple decorative symbols are also made up of three symbols, but all three stop simultaneously after the variable display. The combinations of symbols that are displayed for the simple decorative symbols are the same as the combinations of symbols that are displayed for the normal decorative symbols.

A button image resembling the effect button 109 can also be displayed. This button image appears before the reach state or during the Super Reach effect. When the player actually operates the effect button 109 while this button image is displayed, an effect other than the button image is displayed. For example, when a button image is displayed before the reach state and effect button 109 is operated, a dialogue preview effect (in which the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the dialogue content and color of the speech bubble) is displayed. When a button image is displayed during the Super Reach effect (at the end of the second half) and effect button 109 is operated, a cut-in effect (in which a cut-in screen of an ally character is displayed, and the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the type of character displayed in the cut-in and the color of the cut-in) is executed. Here, a button image that is not a normal color is more likely to display an effect with a higher likelihood of a jackpot (a dialogue preview effect that is red rather than blue in the dialogue preview effect, and a cut-in effect that is red rather than blue in the cut-in effect) when effect button 109 is operated. Note that the effect of displaying a button image to instruct (encourage) the player to perform an operation is referred to as an operation instruction effect (button effect).

Furthermore, this embodiment includes a button appearance teaser, which is a teaser that indicates whether or not the operation instruction performance (button performance) will begin. In this button appearance teaser, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the performance button 109 is displayed on the screen in advance, creating anticipation that a button image resembling the performance button 109 will subsequently appear (i.e., the operation instruction performance will begin). If the silhouette image of the performance button 109 gradually changes into a button image during this button appearance teaser, the teaser is successful. On the other hand, if the silhouette image of the performance button 109 fades out of the screen during this button appearance teaser, the teaser is unsuccessful. Note that when a button image is displayed, it is not necessary to execute this button appearance teaser; the button image may be displayed immediately without first going through the button appearance teaser. Here, the button appearance teaser may have multiple display modes. In such a configuration, for example, a button appearance teaser with a red effect may be configured to be more likely to change into a button image than a button appearance teaser with a blue effect. As another variation, when a button appearance prompting effect is executed, it may always change to a button image. In such a configuration, a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect may be configured to have a higher expectation of a jackpot than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect, or multiple types of button images may be provided (such as a blue button image and a red button image, where a high expectation preview effect is more likely to be executed with a red button image than with a blue button image; for example, a red dialogue preview effect is more likely to be executed than a blue dialogue preview effect), and a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a red effect may be configured to have a more specific button image (for example, a red button image) than a button appearance prompting effect accompanied by a blue effect. If the button appearance prompt always changes to a button image when it is executed, other than the above, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a longer (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompt has a higher probability of winning than a shorter (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompt, or a longer (e.g., 4 seconds) button appearance prompt has a specific button image (e.g., a red button image) than a shorter (e.g., 2 seconds) button appearance prompt. Furthermore, if multiple types of button appearance prompt display modes are provided, the button appearance prompt may be configured so that a more promising button appearance prompt is more likely to be executed in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach) than in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach). Alternatively, the button appearance prompt may not be executed in the first half of the variable display (a specific timing before the reach), and may be executed only in the latter half of the variable display (a specific timing after the reach).

While the operation instruction effect is being executed, a valid operation period (valid input time) is set during which operation of the effect button 109 is valid. The valid operation period is the period during which operation of the effect button 109 is validly accepted. "Validly accepting operation of the effect button 109" means that when the effect button 109 is operated, the operation of the effect button 109 is validly accepted by the sub-board 300, and a predetermined process is performed based on that valid operation. Note that the predetermined process corresponds to the process of proceeding with the dialogue preview effect in response to operation of the effect button 109. During this valid operation period, the effect button 109 (the LED element built into the effect button 109) is illuminated, and a button image resembling the effect button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining valid operation period are displayed on the screen to notify the user that operation of the effect button 109 is valid or to encourage operation input. In addition, a circular effect image emitting sparks (referred to as a "specific image") is displayed around the button image on the screen. This specific image gradually expands as the valid operation period elapses. If the effect button 109 is operated during the valid operation period, the effect progresses to a dialogue preview effect. When the effect button 109 is operated, the display mode of the specific image is forcibly changed to its final display mode. The final display mode of the specific image is the display mode when the specific image is displayed at its maximum enlargement. This operation instruction effect (button effect) is an effect (button effect pattern A) in which the specific image is displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the valid operation period), but other button effects (button effects other than the operation instruction effect) in this embodiment are effects (button effect pattern B) in which the specific image is not displayed while the button image and indicator image are displayed (during the valid operation period).

When a dialogue preview effect is performed in which one of multiple characters (the aforementioned ally characters and enemy characters) appears and speaks a specific line, a specific image is continuously displayed around the character in its final display mode. In this dialogue preview effect, the expected probability of a jackpot is indicated depending on the display mode (display color) of the line spoken by the character. In this embodiment, three colors are set as the display colors for the lines: "blue," "red," and "giraffe pattern." The expected probability of a jackpot increases by one level in the order of "blue" < "red" < "giraffe pattern." When the dialogue preview effect is initiated (when the effect button 109 is operated), the button image and indicator image are hidden, but the specific image is continuously displayed. As a variation of this embodiment, the dialogue preview effect may be configured as a step-up type effect. This step-up effect divides the preview effect display process into multiple stages, with the number of displayed stages being variable so that the greater the number of stages, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. In this embodiment, it is an evolving type of effect in which the presentation style (characters and dialogue) changes in stages according to a predetermined order, and the level of likelihood of a jackpot is suggested or indicated according to the number of stages that evolve. For example, the step-up effect may be configured with two presentation steps (Step Up 1, Step Up 2), with the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in Step Up 1, the first presentation step, being different from the presentation style (characters and dialogue) displayed in Step Up 2, the second presentation step.

The flow of the performance is as follows:
(A) When the button appearance promotion effect starts, a silhouette image representing the silhouette of the promotion button 109 is displayed on the screen. When this silhouette image gradually changes into a button image and promotion is successful, the operation instruction effect starts.
(B) When the operation instruction effect starts, the effective operation period of the effect button 109 is set, the effect button 109 is illuminated, and a button image imitating the effect button 109 and an indicator image visually indicating the remaining effective operation period are displayed on the screen. In addition, a specific image (effect image) in the shape of a ring emitting sparks is displayed around the button image. This display encourages the user to operate the effect button 109 within the effective button operation period.
(C) As the valid button operation period elapses, the display mode (remaining period) of the indicator image changes, and the specific image is enlarged and displayed around the button image. At this time, if the effect button 109 is operated within the valid operation period, the operation instruction effect is switched to the dialogue preview effect. At this time, the button image and indicator image are hidden. Meanwhile, the effect image is forcibly changed to the final display mode and continues to be displayed as is.
(D) When the line preview effect begins, a character and the line "This is your big chance" are displayed on the screen, and the color of the line indicates the likelihood of a big win. A specific image continues to be displayed around the character and line in the final display mode. By displaying the specific image across the operation instruction effect and the line preview effect in this way, it is possible to suggest to the player that the line preview effect will occur when the effect button 109 is operated (it is suggested that the current button effect is a line preview effect).

As a variation of the above-described embodiment, the execution of the button appearance prompt effect may be determined by lottery, and the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable display may be relatively higher when the button appearance prompt effect is executed than when it is not executed. Alternatively, the longer the execution time of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image), the relatively higher the likelihood of a jackpot in the variable display, or a highly accurate indication of whether or not a jackpot has occurred may be generated in response to button operation. In this case, if the line preview effect (button appearance prompt effect) is executed at the timing of the win/loss branch (a specific timing after the reach, which is the latter half of the variable display described above), it is preferable that the duration of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image) be set longer than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. Conversely, the duration of the button appearance prompt effect (the display time of the silhouette image) may be set shorter than the effective period of operation of the effect button 109. As another variation, multiple types of button image display modes (for example, blue button image, red button image, rainbow button image, large button image, small button image, etc.) may be prepared. In this case, the possibility of executing the button appearance prompting effect and the duration of the effect if executed may be varied depending on the display mode of the button image scheduled to be executed subsequently.

In a further variation, the dialogue preview effect can be executed (button images can be displayed) even during one or more variable display cycles before the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (pre-reading variable display that is a variable before the target), and the likelihood of a button appearance teaser effect being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (the relevant variable display), or the likelihood of a high-expectation button appearance teaser effect (such as a button appearance teaser with a red effect as described above or a long-lasting button appearance teaser (for example, 4 seconds)) being executed can be lower during the execution of the pre-reading variable display than during the execution of the variable display when the pending activation ball that is the subject of the pre-reading is consumed (the relevant variable display). In other variations, when a button appearance prompting effect is not executed in the first half of the changing display (a predetermined timing before the close) (or a low-expectation button appearance prompting effect is executed instead of a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect), and a button appearance prompting effect is executed in the second half of the changing display (a specific timing after the close) (or a high-expectation button appearance prompting effect is executed instead of a low-expectation button appearance prompting effect), the longer the period between the predetermined timing before the close, which is the first half of the changing display, and the specific timing after the close, which is the second half of the changing display, is (for example, 90 seconds rather than 60 seconds), the higher the expectation of a jackpot may be, or the button image in the specific timing after the close, which is the second half of the changing display, may be more likely to be an image with a high expectation (for example, a red button image rather than a blue button image). Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which button appearance pattern A is used in the first half of the changing display (a predetermined timing before the close), and button appearance pattern B is used in the second half of the changing display (a specific timing after the close). Furthermore, although details will be described later, timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display, may start from the start of the variable display, and timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may start from the start of a specific effect (normal reach effect or super reach effect), and the timing for displaying a button image at a specific timing after the reach, which is the second half of the variable display, may be configured to be longer than the timing for displaying a button image at a predetermined timing before the reach, which is the first half of the variable display.

In addition, during the execution of a special game in this embodiment, based on the detection of a ball entering the large prize opening during the special game, a count-up effect can be executed on the screen of the effect display device 60, which counts up the total number of prize balls (for example, if the currently acquired number of prize balls is "2000" and there are 15 prize balls, the effect of counting up by one is 2000 → 2001 → 2002 → ... 2015). Furthermore, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display reaches a specific number, a highlight display can be executed to emphasize that the specific number has been reached (for example, when the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display reaches 2500, a display of "2500" is displayed in a larger size than the number of prize balls displayed in the count-up display, separate from the display in the count-up effect). The specifications described below may be adopted for these effects and displays. When the large prize opening 20 opens during one unit game, it closes when nine game balls enter it (note that the prize balls for one ball entering it are "15"). In this way, the number of game balls that is the end condition for a unit game (the condition for closing the large prize opening 20) is referred to as the specified count number.

(1) If an over-entry (a ball that exceeds the specified count) occurs while a count-up effect corresponding to the entry of game balls within the specified count number (particularly a count-up effect corresponding to the ninth count, which is the specified count number) is being performed and the count-up of 15 balls has not yet been completed, it is desirable that the count-up effect corresponding to the over-entry be configured to start after all count-up effects that have not yet completed the count-up of 15 balls have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted). Here, if the over-winning is detected just before the end of the interval period (the pause time from when the end of each unit game is set until the setting of the next unit game or end demo begins), the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning will overlap with the execution period of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed). However, even if a ball enters the large prize opening 20 during the execution of the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning that is executed during the execution of the next round (the next round that starts after the interval period has elapsed), if the ball enters while the count-up effect corresponding to the over-winning is being executed and 15 balls have not yet been counted up, it is preferable that the count-up effect corresponding to the ball entering the large prize opening 20 in the next round will start after all 15 balls of the count-up effect that have not yet been counted up have been completed (after 15 balls have been counted up).

(2) The count-up time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to "0.03 seconds," meaning that the count-up is performed in increments of "0.03 seconds." The execution time of the count-up effect is calculated by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize slot 20, and the execution time of the count-up effect is "15 (unit number of prize balls) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds." However, even when a special game is being played, the count-up effect is configured not to be executed during the execution of the opening demo or the closing demo. Furthermore, the execution time of the count-up effect is set to be shorter than the interval time (also referred to as the "interval period") set after the end of each unit game. The interval time is the waiting time set between each unit game or between the final unit game and the ending demo. It is the unit game waiting time or ending demo waiting time during which the special prize opening 20 remains closed from the start of its closing operation, and is set to 2 seconds for all round games. Furthermore, by configuring the count-up effect time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the interval time (2 seconds), even if a count-up effect is performed based on a game ball entering the special prize opening 20 just before the end of a unit game, the count-up effect will be completed within the interval time after the end of that unit game. This reduces the possibility that the count-up effect will extend beyond the interval period and continue into the next unit game or the ending demo (if an over-entry occurs, the interval period may be exceeded), and the division between each unit game or the division between the final unit game and the ending demo can be clearly defined.

(3) The count-up presentation time is set to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo. As mentioned above, the count-up presentation time is set to 0.45 seconds. The execution time of the end demo is set to 20 seconds, common to all jackpot types (jackpot presentations). The execution time of the end demo is the waiting time from when the interval time after the end of the final unit game in the special game has elapsed until the end of the special game. In other words, the execution time of the end demo does not include the interval time set after the end of the final unit game. That is, the interval time after the end of the final unit game is set as the remaining time (grace time) of the unit game during which it is possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 20 (i.e., it is detected as a target for a prize ball payout, and is not determined to be an illegal entry), but the execution time of the end demo is set as a preparation time for a game (presentation mode) after the end of a special game separated from the unit game, during which it is not possible that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 20. By configuring the count-up presentation time (0.45 seconds) to be shorter than the execution time of the end demo (20 seconds), even if the count-up presentation is performed based on a game ball entering the large prize opening 20 just before the end of the final unit game, or even if an over-entry occurs in the final unit game, or even after the large prize opening 20 is closed after the final unit game (even during the end demo period), if the count-up presentation is performed (even during the end demo period), the count-up presentation will be completed within the end demo period. As a result, the count-up effect does not extend beyond the end demo period and into the variable display after the special game ends, making it possible to clearly distinguish between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

(4) When a specified number of game balls enter the jackpot opening 20 in one unit game, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of game balls in this one unit game (the count-up presentation for the number of prize balls that can be won in one unit game) is configured to be shorter than the execution time of the jackpot end demo. Specifically, the total time of the count-up presentation for the specified number of game balls is "0.45 seconds (count-up presentation time) x 10 balls (specified count) = 4.5 seconds." On the other hand, as mentioned above, the execution time of the jackpot end demo is set to "20 seconds" for all jackpot types (jackpot in-game presentations). In this embodiment, the total time for the count-up effect for the specified number of counts (4.5 seconds) is shorter than the execution time for the jackpot end demo (20 seconds). This means that even if multiple count-up effects are performed consecutively based on multiple game balls consecutively entering the large prize entry port 20 near the end of the final unit game, or even after the large prize entry port 20 closes after the final unit game (even during the jackpot end demo period), the count-up effect will be completed within the jackpot end demo period. Therefore, the count-up effect will not extend beyond the jackpot end demo period and extend into the variable display after the special game ends, clearly defining the boundary between the end of the special game and the start of the variable display for the first spin.

<Suppression notification effect>
In this embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with a suppression function. Details will be described later, but this function stops the game and issues an alert when a predetermined count value "MY" reaches a predetermined specified value. The MY counter is a counter for counting MY. "MY" is calculated as MY = number of safes (number of expected winning balls) - number of outs (number of balls already played), and is a count value based on the difference in the number of balls between the number of safes and the number of outs, and is an index showing the number of game values (balls held by the player or balls dispensed by the gaming machine) awarded to the player.

The device is equipped with a suppression function activation flag, which indicates that the count value of the MY counter has reached a predetermined threshold (the specified value of "95,000" described below), i.e., that the suppression function activation conditions described below have been met. The suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the suppression function activation conditions are met. The suppression function activation flag is also turned OFF when power is turned on with RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). The MY counter is updated (added or subtracted) when a game ball enters each winning slot or outlet. Specifically, the safe number is added to the count value of the MY counter. The "safe number" refers to the number of game balls (safe balls) that are expected to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering each winning slot, i.e., the planned number of prize balls. In other words, the safe number is not the actual number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout device, but the planned number of prize balls that have been determined to be paid out. When one game ball enters the first start port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when one game ball enters the first start port. When one game ball enters the second start port, the MY counter adds "1" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the second start port. When one game ball enters the general prize port, the MY counter adds "3" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the general prize port. When one game ball enters the special prize port, the MY counter adds "15" as the number of safes (planned number of prize balls) scheduled to be paid out when a game ball enters the special prize port. The MY counter also subtracts the number of outs from the count value of the MY counter. The "number of outs" refers to the number of game balls (out balls) that have been launched into the game area and used in play, i.e., the number of game balls (out balls) that have entered each winning slot (first starting slot, second starting slot, general winning slot, large winning slot, etc.) in the game area or the out slot and been ejected to the back side of the game board. The MY counter subtracts "1" from the number of outs each time a game ball enters an out slot (referred to as an out ball or played ball). However, if the MY counter is "0," the MY counter is not subtracted even if an out ball (played ball) is detected. In other words, the count value of the MY counter does not become a number less than "0" (a negative number). Even if an out ball (played ball) occurs when the MY counter's count value is "0," the number corresponding to the number of outs is not subtracted, and the MY counter's count value remains "0." Each time the MY counter is updated, an effect command (called a "ball difference signal") is generated and output to specify the count value of the MY counter. Based on this ball difference signal, the suppression function-related effects (pre-alert effect, suppression notification effect) described below are executed.

The suppression function is activated when the MY counter count reaches a predetermined threshold (referred to as the "predetermined value"). That is, the condition for the suppression function (referred to as the "suppression function activation condition") is that the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value. The predetermined value is set to "95,000," and the suppression function activation condition is met when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000." As mentioned above, when the suppression function activation condition is met, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. Furthermore, when the MY counter count reaches the predetermined value of "95,000" and the suppression function activation condition is met, the MY counter count is not updated (added or subtracted) even if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the suppression function is deactivated (until the suppression function activation flag is turned OFF), and the MY counter count remains at the predetermined value of "95,000." In other words, the upper limit value of the MY counter is "95000", and even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". Additionally, even if MY falls below "95000" after reaching or exceeding "95000", the value of the MY counter will not be updated from "95000". In other words, before MY reaches "95000", the MY counter will be updated in conjunction with the update of MY. As a variant, even if MY exceeds "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to exceed "95000", or even if MY reaches or exceeds "95000" and then falls below "95000", the value of the MY counter may also be updated in conjunction, i.e., updated to fall below "95000". Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated. As another variation, when MY exceeds "95000", the MY counter value can be set to "95000" and then switched to "0" (initialized (cleared)), and the MY counter can be configured not to be updated (fixed at "0"). Even with this configuration, the suppression function activation flag is turned ON when the MY counter reaches "95000", so the suppression function can be reliably activated.

When the suppression function is activated, the game transitions to a game stop state, and the game progress is halted. As an example, when the suppression function is activated, special symbol win/loss determination, symbol determination, and variation pattern determination are not performed, and high base states and special games are also not executed. Furthermore, when the suppression function is activated, the operation of the launching device is restricted, and the launching of game balls is halted regardless of how the launching device is operated. However, even when the suppression function is activated, if there are game balls to be paid out (prize balls based on winnings before the suppression function was activated), the payout operation is permitted, and the game balls are paid out without delay. In other words, since the MY counter is incremented based on the planned number of prize balls to be paid out, rather than the actual number of prize balls actually paid out, even in a situation where all of the prize balls corresponding to the planned number of prize balls have not been paid out, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to the increment of the planned number of prize balls, the suppression function will be activated (because the suppression function activation condition is naturally met), but even in that case, the remaining part of the planned number of prize balls (the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out when the suppression function starts to operate) will be paid out to the end. Therefore, as will be described in detail later, even while the suppression function is operating, a prize ball error (payout error) may occur in the gaming machine due to the payout of game balls while the suppression function is operating, and in that case, an error notification corresponding to the prize ball error will be executed. Even when a special game is not being played, if the MY Counter's count reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, when the MY Counter's count is 94,998 and a game ball enters the general prize slot, three prize balls are paid out), the prize balls that cause the MY Counter's count to exceed the specified value of 95,000 (the remaining one prize ball in the above example) will be paid out until the end (however, of course, no prize balls will be paid out based on subsequent wins). When the suppression function is activated, the game stops and the firing stops, but this configuration is not limited to this; the suppression function may be configured to enter the game stop state but not the firing stops.

In addition, the timing of the suppression function activation differs between when the MY counter count value reaches the specified value "95000" while special play is not being played (when the suppression function activation conditions are met) and when the MY counter count value reaches the specified value "95000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation conditions are met).

If the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played, the suppression function will activate simultaneously or approximately simultaneously when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied. In other words, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played, the timing when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied and the activation of the suppression function will be substantially the same. If the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a special game is not being played and a changing pattern is being displayed, the suppression function will activate when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied (when the MY counter count value reaches the specified value of "95,000"), regardless of whether the changing pattern is a losing or winning changing pattern. Therefore, if the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied while a changing pattern is being displayed, the suppression function will activate when the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, without waiting for the changing pattern to be displayed as still (even before the changing pattern is displayed as still), and the changing pattern will be forcibly terminated midway. Therefore, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the jackpot variable display, the player will not be able to enjoy the special game that would normally be played after the variable display ends, and will not be able to acquire the profits (prize balls) that would be obtained in the special game. The reason for this is that even if the game is forcibly stopped during the jackpot variable display, the player will not know the result of the game (that he or she has won the jackpot) at this point, so even if the game suddenly stops during the variable display, the player is unlikely to feel dissatisfied or distrustful. Furthermore, even if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a prize ball entering the second start port while the second start port is open once every 5 seconds in the high base state, or if the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" due to a prize ball entering another general prize port, it is preferable to forcibly close the second start port (even if the open time remains) when the specified value is reached.

On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game, the suppression function will not activate until the special game (jackpot end demo) ends, and will activate after the special game (jackpot end demo) ends. In other words, if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game, it is possible to continue playing from the time the suppression function activation conditions are met until the special game ends, and the timing when the suppression function activation conditions are met and the activation of the suppression function are substantially different. The reason for this is that if the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of a special game, even if the special game is continued without immediately stopping, the player will only win a limited number of prize balls in the remaining round of play (unit play), and the player will not gain excessive profits (there will be no sense of unfairness with other players). Furthermore, if the suppression function is suddenly activated during the execution of a special game and game play is stopped, it may cause distrust and dissatisfaction among the player. As a modified example, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the end of the final round of the special game, and then be activated after the end of the final round. Alternatively, if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may not be activated until the start of the jackpot end demo for the special game, and then be activated after the start of the jackpot end demo. As a further modified example, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game (even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), if a safe ball or an out ball occurs until the end of the special game (until the suppression function is activated), the count value of the MY counter may be updated. In this case, even if the count value of the MY counter falls below the specified value "95000" after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (even if it returns to the state before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), a configuration can be applied in which the suppression function is activated after the end of the special game. In other words, once the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a special game, the suppression function may be guaranteed to be activated when the special game ends, even if the count value of the MY counter increases or decreases from the specified value of "95000" until the special game ends. Note that even in this modified example, after the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied during the execution of a special game, prize balls can be paid out based on game balls entering the large prize slot, etc., until the special game ends.

Next, we will explain how to deactivate the suppression function. If the suppression function is activated, it can be deactivated by clearing the RAM when the power is turned on. That is, if the suppression function is activated, the suppression function activation flag can be switched from ON to OFF by turning off the power to the gaming machine and then restoring power with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), thereby deactivating the suppression function. Here, a power restoration with a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch) refers to a power restoration that transitions the gaming machine to "RAM clear mode" as the transition mode when the power is turned on (when the power is restored). Furthermore, a power restoration without a RAM clear refers to a power restoration that transitions the gaming machine to "game mode" as the transition mode when the power is turned on (when the power is restored). Note that if the suppression function is activated and the power is restored without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch), the suppression function activation flag will not be switched from ON to OFF, and the suppression function will not be deactivated. In this case, the suppression function will remain activated even after the power is restored, and the game and firing states will remain suspended. Furthermore, if the suppression function activation conditions are met while a special game is being played (if the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), and the power is turned off before the special game is finished and power is restored with RAM cleared (RAM clear switch operated), the suppression function activation flag will switch from ON to OFF when power is restored, and the suppression function will not be activated even if the special game resumed after power is restored has finished. On the other hand, if the suppression function activation conditions are met while a special game is being played (if the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), and the power is turned off before the special game is finished and power is restored without RAM clearing (RAM clear switch operated), the suppression function activation flag will not switch from ON to OFF when power is restored, and the suppression function will be activated when the special game resumed after power is restored has finished.

Next, we will explain how to initialize the MY counter. If the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on before the suppression function activation conditions are met (when the suppression function activation flag is OFF), the MY counter will be cleared (the MY counter will become "0") when power is restored, whether the power is restored with or without a RAM clear (operation of the RAM clear switch). In other words, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared (the count value before the power was cut off) when the gaming machine is powered on, regardless of whether the RAM clear switch was operated when the power was turned on. Therefore, before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter will be cleared when power is restored, regardless of whether the transition mode when power is restored (when power is turned on) is the RAM clear mode or the game mode described above. On the other hand, if the gaming machine is powered off and then powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is not cleared upon power restoration, and the count value before power restoration (95,000) is retained. Furthermore, if the gaming machine is powered off and powered back on after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (when the suppression function activation flag is ON), and the power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the MY counter is cleared upon power restoration (the count value before power restoration is erased). As a variant, the MY counter may be configured to be initialized (cleared) when its count value reaches a specified value of "95,000," i.e., when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied. As a further variant, an operating means (referred to as a "count continuation switch") for prohibiting initialization of the MY counter may be installed. For example, if the power is cut off before the suppression function activation conditions are met during the execution of the advance notification effect described below and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, if the power is restored while the count continuation switch is operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when the power is restored, and the count value before the power was cut off will continue.

Next, we will explain external information signals related to the suppression function. External information signals (also referred to as external signals or external information) related to the suppression function include a suppression function pre-activation signal and a suppression function activation signal. The suppression function pre-activation signal indicates that the suppression function is scheduled to activate soon. The suppression function pre-activation signal is output continuously for a fixed period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) at a predetermined trigger before the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000." The predetermined trigger is when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specific value (e.g., any number greater than or equal to 90,000 and less than 95,000 can be applied). For example, the specific value is "94,500," which is 500 times before the specified value of "95,000." Therefore, the timing at which the suppression function pre-activation signal starts to be output is not the same as or approximately the same as (not substantially the same as) the timing at which the advance notification effect described below starts to be executed. As a variant, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000," a suppression function pre-activation signal may be output, and the output timing of the suppression function pre-activation signal may be the same or approximately the same as the execution timing of the advance notification effect described below (they may be substantially the same timing). The suppression function activation signal is an external information signal indicating that the suppression function is activated. The suppression function activation signal is output continuously from the time the suppression function is activated until the activation of the suppression function is deactivated. In other words, the suppression function activation signal begins to be output when the suppression function is activated, and stops being output when power is restored accompanied by RAM clearing (operation of the RAM clear switch). Therefore, the output timing of the suppression function activation signal is the same or approximately the same as the time when the suppression function starts to activate (they are substantially the same timing).

<Pre-announcement performance>
Next, the content of the suppression function-related effects will be explained. The suppression function-related effects include advance notification effects (notification effects before the suppression function is activated) and suppression notification effects (notification effects when the suppression function is activated). The advance notification effects are executed before the suppression function is activated, and suggest or notify that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon. The advance notification effects are executed when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value. In other words, the execution condition for the advance notification effect (referred to as the "advance notification condition") is met when the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value. "90000" is set as the predetermined value. The predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("95000") that is the execution condition for the suppression notification, may be referred to as the first predetermined value, and the predetermined value, which is the count value of the MY counter ("90000" in this case) that is the advance notification condition, may be referred to as the second predetermined value. The predetermined value is not limited to "90000" and can be set arbitrarily by the administrator (however, it is preferable that the predetermined value be "90000" or less). In other words, the execution conditions for the advance notification effect (advance notification conditions) are set as variable conditions (fluid conditions) that can be set arbitrarily by the administrator. On the other hand, the specified value is limited to "95000" and cannot be set arbitrarily by the administrator. In other words, the activation conditions for the suppression function (suppression function activation conditions) are set as fixed conditions that cannot be set arbitrarily by the player. The "administrator" refers to a person who manages gaming machines, and typically corresponds to a store clerk at a gaming parlor or an employee of a gaming machine manufacturer. The advance notification effect includes an advance notification display effect and an advance notification sound output effect. It should be noted that, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the term "advance notification effect" refers to either "advance notification display effect only" or "advance notification effect and advance notification sound output effect."

The advance notification display includes, as image displays, a first message display stating, "When today's ball output reaches 95,000, the suppression function will be activated. After activation, play will end and firing will stop," and a second message display stating, "Approximately **** balls remaining until activation." Note that "****" indicates the MY value remaining until the suppression function is activated. This "****" value is updated based on the ball difference signal. The first and second message displays will continue to be displayed from the time the advance notification conditions are met until the suppression function is activated (except when the MY counter count value falls to the specified lower limit of "89,000," described below). The first message display is always a fixed message display while this advance notification display (advance notification display display) is being executed, regardless of whether the MY counter increases or decreases (the first message display does not change). On the other hand, the second message display is updated and displayed every time the count value of the MY counter increases by 500, starting from when the advance notification condition is satisfied (when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "90000"). In other words, the second message display is a message display that depends on the count value of the MY counter, and the "****" portion is updated and displayed every time "500" is added from the specified value "90000". Specifically, first, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90,000," the second message display displays the message "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "90,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,000," the second message display switches to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation," and when the count value of the MY counter reaches "91,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation," and similarly, the second message display switches every time the count value of the MY counter is increased by "500," and finally, when the count value of the MY counter reaches "94,500," the second message display switches to "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation." Although the second message display is updated in units of 500, this configuration is not limited and the display may be updated in units of a different number (for example, in units of 1, 10, 100, 1000, etc.). Furthermore, the advance notification display effect does not have a dedicated background image, and a background image corresponding to the current game status (stage background image, reach background image, jackpot background image) is displayed behind the first message display and second message display.

The display priority of this advance notification display effect (layer priority, and the priority of whether it is displayed in the front or back compared to other images) is set higher than the display priority of the background image and normal decorative patterns, and lower than the priority (layer priority) of the right-hit notification image (text effect suggesting the recommended firing position, such as "right hit"), simple decorative patterns, and variable rights display (an icon display indicating a hold, which can display up to four hold icons corresponding to up to four holds, and a variable icon, which is an icon display that appears when the hold is consumed and the first hold icon moves, and can display only one icon indicating that a change is in progress). Furthermore, when a player performs a volume adjustment operation or a light intensity adjustment operation, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the volume adjustment screen (a screen that shows the current volume level, a screen in which the display mode of the image indicative of the volume level changes in response to the volume adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a musical note mark image is accompanied by one of the number images 1 to 5 indicating the current volume level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the volume adjustment operation) and the light intensity adjustment screen (a screen that shows the current light intensity level, a screen in which the display mode of the image indicative of the light intensity level changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation, for example, a screen in which a light bulb mark image is accompanied by one of the number images 1 to 5 indicating the current light intensity level, and the number in the number image changes in response to the light intensity adjustment operation). Furthermore, when a predetermined error occurs in a gaming machine, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect is set lower than the display priority (layer priority) of the error notification image (an image that notifies the user that an error has occurred and is displayed in a manner that allows the user to determine the type of error currently occurring; for example, if magnetism is detected, a text image of "Magnetic Error" is displayed; if a door opening is detected, a text image of "Door Open Error" is displayed; and if prize ball payout has stopped, a text image of "Prize Ball Error" is displayed). Note that while normal decorative symbols can be superimposed on advance notification display effects, it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification display effect be set higher. Therefore, when an advance notification display effect is executed while the normal decorative symbol fluctuation start action, temporary stop action, reach formation action, or swing action is being executed, the display of each action and the advance notification display effect are superimposed, but the advance notification display effect is displayed in the foreground because of its higher display priority (layer priority). However, it is preferable that simple decorative symbols not be superimposed on the advance notification display effects. Also, the standby demo effect (a screen that is displayed when the fluctuation has stopped and there are no reserved reels for a predetermined period of time, such as 255 seconds, and indicates that the game is on standby) can be superimposed on the advance notification display effects, but it is preferable that the display priority (layer priority) be set higher for the advance notification display effects. It is also preferable that the volume adjustment screen, light intensity adjustment screen, and right-hit notification image not be superimposed on the advance notification display effects.

The pre-alarm sound output effect is an effect in which a predetermined pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker. The pre-alarm sound may be, for example, "The suppression function will be activated with **** shots remaining." Note that "****" represents the remaining MY (number of balls remaining) value until the suppression function is activated, and corresponds to the "****" in the second message display. This pre-alarm sound is output from the speaker one or more times when the MY counter count reaches "90000," "90500," "91000," "91500," "92000," "92500," "93000," "93500," "94000," or "94500," i.e., when the second message display is updated. While this pre-alarm sound is being output, i.e., while the first and second message displays are being displayed and the pre-alarm sound is being output, other audio effects (such as background music and sound effects) are muted. After the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) are restored. As a variation, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be simultaneously played. In such a configuration, while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is being output, the volume of the other sound effects (such as background music or sound effects) may be reduced to make the advance warning sound easier to hear (after the advance warning sound is output, i.e., while the first and second wording displays are displayed and the advance warning sound is not being output, the original volume is restored).

This advance notification effect ends when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" (when the suppression function activation conditions are met). In other words, when the suppression function activation conditions are met, the advance notification effect switches to the suppression notification effect. However, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while special play is being played (when the suppression function activation conditions are met), the advance notification effect will continue to be executed until the end of the special play, and when the special play ends, the advance notification effect will end and the suppression notification effect will begin. As a modified example, when the count value of the MY counter reaches a specified value of "95,000" during the execution of a special game (when the suppression function activation condition is satisfied), the MY counter's count value reaching the specified value of "95,000" may be triggered by the occurrence of the trigger, and the pre-announcement display effect may be switched to a special message stating, "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so the game will end after the special game ends and ball firing will stop." This special message may be configured to continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. This special message is also a type of pre-announcement effect and may be referred to as a special pre-announcement effect (special pre-announcement display effect). As a further modified example, the pre-announcement effect may be configured not to be executed during the execution of a special game. In other words, if a special game starts during the execution of a pre-announcement effect, the pre-announcement effect being executed may be interrupted when the special game starts, and the interrupted pre-announcement effect may be resumed when the special game ends. In such a configuration, it is preferable to resume the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the special game has ended. Also, if the advance notification conditions are met during the execution of a special game, the advance notification effect may be configured not to start during the execution of the special game (by waiting to execute the advance notification effect until the end of the special game), and to start the advance notification effect after the end of the special game. In such a configuration, it is preferable to start the advance notification effect in a display mode based on the counter value of the MY counter after the end of the special game.

The advance notification effect also ends when the MY counter count value falls to a predetermined lower limit (e.g., "89000"). In other words, even if the advance notification effect is initiated when the MY counter count value reaches the predetermined value "90000," if the MY counter count value falls below the predetermined lower limit "89000" without reaching the predetermined value "95000," the advance notification effect ends without progressing to a suppressed notification effect. Here, even if the MY counter count value falls below the predetermined value "90000" without reaching the predetermined value "95000" when the advance notification effect is initiated, the advance notification effect continues to be executed until it falls below the predetermined lower limit "89000." Note that if the MY counter count value falls to the predetermined lower limit "89000," the advance notification effect will not be executed again, even if the MY counter count value again reaches the predetermined value "90000." However, if a special condition is satisfied after the count value of the MY counter has fallen to the predetermined lower limit of "89000" and before the count value of the MY counter again reaches the predetermined value of "90000", the advance notification effect may be executed again when the count value of the MY counter again reaches the predetermined value of "90000". For example, if the count value of the MY counter has fallen to the predetermined lower limit of "89000", the special condition may be satisfied when the count value of the MY counter subsequently falls to "80000", which is a value even smaller than the predetermined lower limit of "89000", and when the count value of the MY counter then reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, the advance notification effect may be executed again. As another variation, if the MY counter count value falls to a predetermined lower limit of "89000," the MY counter may subsequently fall to its initial value of "0" (reach the bottom value where MY is not subtracted even if an out ball is hit, or be cleared), which may satisfy a special condition, and when the MY counter count value again reaches the predetermined value of "90000," a pre-announcement effect may be executed again. Furthermore, if the MY counter count value falls below the predetermined value of "90000" and then breaks the winning streak (the winning streak ends) before falling to the predetermined lower limit of "89000," the pre-announcement effect may be canceled even if the MY counter count value has not fallen to the predetermined lower limit of "89000."

As a further variant, without requiring any special conditions, when the count value of the MY counter falls to a predetermined lower limit value of "89000", if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" again, a pre-announcement effect may be executed again. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the second message display is updated (by adding "500" to the difference between the thresholds) every time the count value of the MY counter reaches each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display, but conversely, the second message display is also updated (by subtracting "500" from the difference between the thresholds) when the count value of the MY counter falls below each threshold (90000, 90500, 91000, 91500, 92000, 92500, 93000, 93500, 94000, 94500) that triggers an update to the advance notification display. For example, if the MY counter is decremented from "91,000" to "90,999," the second message display is updated (decremented) from "Approximately 3,500 shots remaining until activation" to "Approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation." However, even if the MY counter count falls below the specified value of "90,000," the second message display will not be updated and will continue to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" until it drops to the specified lower limit of "89,000." In other words, even if the MY counter count is decremented from "90,000" to "89,999," the second message display will continue to display "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" (until it drops below the specified lower limit of "89,000").

As a variant, when the count value of the MY counter falls below one of the thresholds (90,000, 90,500, 91,000, 91,500, 92,000, 92,500, 93,000, 93,500, 94,000, 94,500) that trigger an update of the advance notification effect, the second message display may not be updated, and the current display (original display) may continue. For convenience, in the following explanation, 500 MYs, which are the update cycle for the second message display, are considered as one unit, and the advance notification effect that occurs when the MY counter count value is between "90,000" and "90,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 5,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) among the series of advance notification effects may be referred to as the "first unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "90500" and "90999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "second unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91000" and "91499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 4000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "third unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "91500" and "91999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fourth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92000" and "92499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 3000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "fifth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "92500" and "92999" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "sixth unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is performed when the count value of the MY counter is between "93000" and "93499" (the advance notification effect when "approximately 2000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "seventh unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "93,500" and "93,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "8th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,000" and "94,499" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 1,000 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "9th unit notification effect." Furthermore, the advance notification effect that is displayed when the MY counter count value is between "94,500" and "94,999" (the advance notification effect when "Approximately 500 shots remaining until activation" is displayed) may be referred to as the "10th unit notification effect."

The suppression notification effect is an effect that suggests or notifies that the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of "95,000," i.e., that the suppression function has been activated and the game has transitioned to a stopped state. This suppression notification effect is executed when the suppression function is activated. Specifically, if the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is not being played, the suppression notification effect is executed when the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000." If the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95,000" while a special game is being played, the suppression notification effect is executed after the special game ends. The suppression notification effect includes a suppression notification image display effect and a suppression notification sound output effect. Note that, while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the frame lamp (the lamp located on the frame) is fully lit (or fully flashing) in red, and the board lamp (the lamp located on the game board) is turned off, although this is not shown in the figure. The suppression notification display effect displays a dedicated screen (suppression screen) to notify players that the suppression function has been activated. This suppression screen includes special message display and a special background image. The special message display includes a message such as, "Today's ball output has reached 95,000. The suppression function has been activated. Today's game will end. Please be careful not to forget to remove your cards." The special background image is a special background image displayed behind the special message display, and is composed of, for example, a blackout image. The display priority of this suppression screen is set higher than the display priority of any other effect image (i.e., it is set as the highest priority layer). When this suppression screen is displayed, all other effect images (normal game screens) become invisible or difficult to see. Note that if a specified error (e.g., an error of high priority or importance) occurs, an error notification image corresponding to the specified error may be displayed in front of the suppression screen. The suppression notification sound output effect outputs a suppression notification sound from a speaker. The suppression notification sound is, for example, a sound saying, "The suppression function has been activated." This suppression notification sound output effect repeatedly outputs the suppression notification sound while the suppression function is operating. The suppression notification sound output effect may also be configured to output a specific error sound for a short period of time, followed by the repeated output of the suppression notification sound. The suppression notification effect ends when the suppression function is deactivated. That is, performing a RAM clear operation when the power is turned on deactivates the suppression function and terminates the suppression notification effect. The suppression notification display effect continues until the suppression function is deactivated, while the suppression notification sound output effect may continue for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) after the suppression function is activated. In this case, if a power outage occurs before the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the suppression notification effect was executed and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), it is preferable that the suppression notification display effect continue to be executed after power is restored, but the suppression notification sound output effect is not executed (even if there is time remaining in the predetermined time).

When a special game is not being played (when the symbol variation display is in progress), if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of 95,000 (for example, reaching the specified value of 95,000 upon winning a prize at the general prize slot), a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated. The game state immediately before this suppression function is activated is a high base state, and activation of the suppression function ends the high base state. Therefore, when the suppression function is activated, the flag indicating the high base state is turned OFF, and if the second start port is open, it is forcibly closed in the middle of the process, forcibly ending the variation display in the high base state (the variation display currently being executed). Furthermore, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during a round of play in a special game, the suppression function will not be activated until the special game (jackpot end demo) ends, and the advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect) will continue to be executed until the special game (jackpot end demo) ends. Note that if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value "95000" during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter will not be updated even if safe balls (the number of expected winning balls) and out balls (played balls) occur until the special game ends (the count value of the MY counter will maintain the specified value "95000"). Furthermore, if the conditions for activating the suppression function are met while a special game is being played (if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000"), the most recent advance notification effect (10th unit notification effect: approximately 500 balls remaining until activation) will continue to be displayed until the end of the special game, but this configuration is not limited to this, and for example, it is also possible to display a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends," or, as mentioned above, the advance notification display effect may be switched to a special message saying "Today's payout has reached 95,000 balls, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may continue to be displayed until the end of the special game. When configured in this manner, the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed even in the tenth round (final round). However, this is not limited to a configuration in which the advance notification effect (tenth unit notification effect) continues to be executed. For example, a message saying "The suppression function will be activated after the jackpot ends" may be displayed, or, as described above, the advance notification display may be switched to special message saying "Today's ball output has reached 95,000, so play will end after the special game ends and firing will stop," and this special message may be displayed continuously until the special game ends. Thereafter, when the special game ends, a suppression notification effect is executed, suggesting or informing the player that the suppression function has been activated.

The cumulative prize ball count display area displays the cumulative number of prize balls (cumulative prize ball count) won up to the present time based on game balls entering the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, and this cumulative prize ball value (cumulative prize ball display) is updated and displayed by executing the prize ball count-up effect (also simply referred to as the count-up effect). The prize ball count-up effect is an effect in which, when a game ball enters the large prize slot during special games during consecutive wins, the value of the cumulative prize balls displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is added to the value of the number of prize balls paid out based on the game ball entering the large prize slot. Since the system is designed so that "10" prize balls are paid out when one game ball enters the large prize slot (the unit prize ball count for the large prize slot is 10), when a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in units of "10" (a prize ball count-up effect is performed in which "10" is added to the cumulative prize ball value). Here, the cumulative prize ball count display area can display five-digit numbers, and more specifically, the cumulative prize ball count display can display 100,000 numbers from "0" to "99,999." Therefore, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display is "99,999." In this case, if the cumulative prize ball count display has reached the upper limit of "99,999," even if a game ball enters the large prize slot, the cumulative prize ball count display does not change and maintains the upper limit of "99,999." In this way, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display, "99999," is set to a value greater than the specified value of "95000," which is the upper limit of MY. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count display when the upper limit of "99999" is reached can be greater than the specified value of MY of "95000" notified in advance in the advance notification effect. This allows accurate notification that the number of prize balls won by the player has exceeded the specified value of MY of "95000," thereby giving the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment. Furthermore, since the cumulative prize ball count display is a value that does not take into account outgoing balls and can be a value that exceeds the specified value of MY of "95000," it is preferable to configure it to be able to display up to the upper limit of "99999." As a variant, even if the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," a pseudo prize ball count-up effect (variable display of the cumulative prize ball count display) may be executed when a game ball enters the large prize slot. A pseudo prize ball count-up effect may be, for example, 99999 → 91111 → 92222 → 93333 → ... → 98888 → 99999, where the initial value (99999) and the final value (99999) are the same, but the values between them are displayed randomly, making it appear as if the cumulative prize ball count is being counted up. As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," if a new prize ball is paid out (when a gaming ball enters a big prize), "FFFFF" may be displayed as the cumulative prize ball count display to suggest or notify that the cumulative prize ball count display has exceeded the display limit (is in an overflow state). As a further variation, when the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," or when a new prize ball payout occurs after the cumulative prize ball count display reaches the upper limit of "99999," the display may be switched to "FFFFF" (without displaying "99999" thereafter), and the "FFFFF" display may be maintained regardless of whether a new prize ball payout occurs thereafter. As a further variation, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "94999," which is the number just before the MY default value of "95000." When this number is exceeded, a text image "Limit Reached" may be displayed, and thereafter the cumulative prize ball count display may not be updated, but the text image "Limit Break" may continue to be displayed. As a variation, when this number is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. Similarly, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to "95,000," which is the same as the MY default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even in this configuration, if the value is exceeded, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden, and instead the text image "Limit Breaking" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. As a further variation, in order to prevent players from being overly gambling-minded, the upper limit of the cumulative prize ball count display may be set to a value (e.g., "50,000") sufficiently smaller than the default value of "95,000." If the value is exceeded, the text image "Limit Reached" is displayed, and the cumulative prize ball count display is not updated thereafter, but the text image "Limit Breaking" continues to be displayed. Even with this configuration, if the number exceeds that value, the cumulative prize ball count display may be hidden and instead a text image of "Limit Break" may be displayed in the display area where the cumulative prize ball count display was previously displayed. In this way, the display conditions for "Limit Break" can be set as appropriate, but while "Limit Break" is displayed, it is preferable not to highlight the cumulative prize ball count (a display that notifies the player that the cumulative prize ball count has reached a predetermined specific value when a game ball enters the big prize slot during the execution of a special game) even if the cumulative prize ball count is a specific value.

The highlight effect is a display that notifies the player that the cumulative number of prize balls has reached a predetermined value when a game ball enters the large prize slot during a special game. The specific value corresponds to a multiple of the specified number of prize balls (2,500) and is set in increments of 2,500, such as "2,500," "5,000," "7,500," "10,000," "12,500," etc. The specified number of prize balls, "2,500," is set to a value smaller than the difference value "5,000" obtained by subtracting the specified value "90,000" from the MY specified value "95,000." As a result, between the time the MY counter count reaches the expected value "90,000" and the time it reaches the specified value "95,000," i.e., between the time the advance notification effect is initiated and the time the suppression function is activated, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value (a multiple of the specified number of prize balls) at least once, and the highlight effect will be executed at least once. This ensures that at least one highlight effect will be executed even if the suppression function is about to be activated, and gives the player a sense of satisfaction and accomplishment.

Even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95,000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect during special play and the suppression function activation condition is met, the prize ball count-up effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is met during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special play, and the special play will continue as is. Therefore, the prize ball count-up effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a second game ball entering the first large prize slot (a prize that triggers the MY counter's count value to reach the specified value of 95,000) while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the MY counter's count value has reached the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Note that although the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" is "a game ball entering the large prize slot," this is not limited to this configuration, and the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the specified value of "95000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize slot."

When a special game is being played, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90000" during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification condition is met, the prize ball count-up effect in progress is not interrupted and the ongoing prize ball count-up effect is continued. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is met during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (the advance notification effect has started to be executed), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game continues as is. Therefore, the ongoing prize ball count-up effect is not interrupted midway, and the ongoing prize ball counter-up effect is completed (executed to the end). Although details will be described later, if a subsequent prize ball count-up effect is executed based on a game ball entering a second large prize entry slot (a prize that triggers the count value of the MY counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000") while a previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first large prize entry slot, the previous prize ball count-up effect and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as continuous and integrated count-up effects. Therefore, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of the prize ball count-up effect, the currently executing prize ball count-up effect can be continued without interruption. This allows the player to see the prize ball count-up effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's motivation to play even after the count value of the MY counter has reached the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY Counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so there is no real harm caused by allowing the execution of the prize ball count-up effect. On the contrary, if the execution of the prize ball count-up effect is hindered, the player's motivation to play may be reduced. When the prize ball count-up effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. Note that the winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" is "a game ball entering the large prize entry slot," but this configuration is not limited thereto. The winning combination that triggers the count value of the MY Counter to reach the predetermined value "90,000" may also be "a game ball entering the general prize entry slot."

Even if the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000 during the execution of an emphasis effect during a special game and the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect will continue without being interrupted. In other words, even if the suppression function activation condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), the suppression function will not be activated (the suppression screen will not be displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game will continue as is. Therefore, the emphasis effect will not be interrupted midway, but will be completed (executed to the end). This allows the player to see the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the MY counter count reaches the specified value of 95,000. In other words, if the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000" while a special game is being played, the game will not be immediately stopped (the suppression function will not be immediately activated), but the special game will continue as is, so even if the execution of the emphasis effect is permitted, no real harm will occur. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced.

During the execution of a special game, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000" during the execution of an emphasis effect and the advance notification condition is satisfied, the emphasis effect in progress is not interrupted and the emphasis effect in progress continues. In other words, even if the advance notification condition is satisfied during the execution of an emphasis effect (the advance notification effect has begun), the suppression function is not activated (the suppression screen is not displayed) until the end of the special game, and the special game continues as is. Therefore, the emphasis effect in progress is not interrupted midway, but is completed (executed to the end). This allows the player to see the emphasis effect to the end without interruption, thereby maintaining the player's desire to play even after the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value "90,000." In other words, even if the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" during the execution of a special game, the special game will continue as is until the suppression function is activated, so no actual harm will occur even if the execution of the emphasis effect is allowed. On the contrary, if the execution of the emphasis effect is hindered, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will be reduced. Furthermore, when the emphasis effect and the advance notification effect are displayed overlapping each other, the display priority (layer priority) of the advance notification effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the emphasis effect, and the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the emphasis effect.

The count-up display time for one prize ball (the time required to count up from "N" to "N+1") is set to 0.03 seconds. In other words, the cumulative prize ball count displayed in the cumulative prize ball count display area is counted up in increments of 0.03 seconds. Therefore, the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect, which is performed when one game ball enters the large prize opening, is calculated by multiplying the time required to count up one prize ball by the number of prize balls (unit prize ball number) awarded when one game ball enters the large prize opening. In other words, the execution time of this prize ball count-up effect (the time from the start to the end of one prize ball count-up effect) is 15 (unit prize ball number) x 0.03 seconds (count-up interval) = 0.45 seconds. The execution time of the highlighting effect is the time value from the start to the end of the display of the highlight image (enlarged image) of the cumulative prize ball count. The execution time of the highlighting effect is set to "3 seconds" regardless of which specific value the cumulative prize ball count reaches (2500, 5000, 7500, 10000, etc.). The execution time of this highlighting effect (3 seconds) is set longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening. Therefore, when the cumulative prize ball count reaches a specific value triggered by the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening, the prize ball count-up effect and the highlighting effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously. However, by setting the execution time of the highlighting effect longer than the execution time of the prize ball count-up effect executed in response to the entry of one game ball into the large prize opening, the highlighting effect with a high rarity can be made to stand out even when the highlighting effect and the prize ball count-up effect are executed simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, thereby further enhancing the player's sense of satisfaction and accomplishment when the highlighting effect is activated. When the highlight effect and the prize ball count-up effect are superimposed, the display priority (layer priority) of the highlight effect is higher than the display priority (layer priority) of the prize ball count-up effect, and the highlight effect is displayed in front of the prize ball count-up effect. The inter-round time (the time during which the special prize opening closes upon the completion of the Nth round of play and remains closed until the N+1th round of play begins) may be set to a time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) longer than the execution time (0.45 seconds) of the prize ball count-up effect corresponding to the entry of one game ball into the special prize opening, but shorter than the execution time (3 seconds) of the highlight effect.

The execution time of a pre-announcement effect is the time value from the start to the end of one pre-announcement effect, and is the time value from when the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" to when it reaches the specified value of "95000". However, this execution time of the pre-announcement effect does not include the execution time of the pre-announcement effect when the MY counter reaches the specified value of "90000" but then falls below the specified lower limit value of "89000" without reaching the specified value of "95000". In other words, the execution time of the pre-announcement effect here is the execution time when the pre-announcement effect is completed by reaching the specified value. The execution time of this advance notification effect is the time it takes for the MY counter count to increase by 5,000 (95,000 - 90,000 = 5,000) from the predetermined value of 90,000. This 5,000 increase requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple special games (for example, approximately 1,500 balls x 3 or more in the case of a 10R jackpot). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple special games from the start to the end of one advance notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the advance notification effect is significantly longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the advance notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed simultaneously, the advance notification effect, which is a continuous display, is prioritized over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, thereby increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effect. This allows the player to reliably understand the current game situation (that the suppression function is scheduled to be activated soon). The advance notification effect described here is an advance notification display effect, but it has a similar relationship when compared with the execution time of the advance notification sound output effect (e.g., 5 seconds of audio output). Furthermore, as mentioned above, the advance notification effect is updated and displayed each time the MY counter count value is incremented by 500 from the predetermined value "90000," progressing in the order of the first unit notification effect → the second unit notification effect → the third unit notification effect → ... → the tenth unit notification effect. The execution time of any of the unit notification effects from the first unit notification effect to the tenth unit notification effect that make up this advance notification effect is longer than the execution time (3 seconds) of the emphasis effect. In other words, the execution time of each unit notification effect is the time value until the MY counter count value increases by 500. This increase of 500 balls requires the number of prize balls obtained through multiple rounds of play (e.g., approximately 150 balls x 3 or more rounds). Therefore, it basically takes the execution time of multiple rounds of play from the start to the end of one unit notification effect. Therefore, the execution time of the unit notification effect is longer than the execution time of the emphasis effect (3 seconds). Therefore, even if the unit notification effect and the emphasis effect are executed at the same time, the unit notification effect, which is a continuous display, is made to stand out preferentially over the emphasis effect, which is a temporary display, and the player's attention to the unit notification effect can be increased, so that the player can reliably know how many shots are left until the suppression function is activated each time the unit notification effect (second message display) changes. Note that because the highlighting effects are executed in units of 2500 earned prize balls, the highlighting effects are executed at most once (although at most one type of highlighting effect is displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500), but because the unit notification effects are executed in units of 500 MY, the unit notification effects can be executed multiple times (multiple types of unit notification effects can be displayed per special game) during one special game (for example, a 10R special game: number of earnable prize balls = approximately 1500). This allows the player to see multiple types of unit notification effects during one special game, further increasing the player's attention to the advance notification effects.

When the first game ball enters the large prize opening and the large prize opening switch (also called the large prize detection device) detects the entry of the first game ball, a prize ball count-up effect based on this first entry (called the "previous prize ball count-up effect") begins. If a second game ball (a new game ball) enters the large prize opening while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and the large prize opening switch detects the entry of the second game ball, the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and a prize ball count-up effect based on the second entry (called the "later prize ball count-up effect") begins. Specifically, in a previous prize ball count-up effect, if a count-up display from "1000" to "1015" is originally scheduled, and a new game ball enters the special prize entry slot while the previous prize ball count-up effect is being executed and is detected by the special prize entry slot switch, the previous prize ball count-up effect being executed will be terminated midway (for example, the count-up display will be interrupted at "1010"), and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect will begin. Then, in the subsequent prize ball count-up effect, the remaining portion of the previous prize ball count-up effect (the count-up display from "1011" to "1015") will be omitted, and the count-up display will continue from the final value "1015" and continue from "1016" to "1030". Note that although some of the count-up displays of the previous prize ball count-up effect (count-up displays from "1011" to "1015") are omitted, the end (interruption) of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect are seamlessly connected, and these previous and subsequent prize ball count-up effects are configured as a continuous and integrated count-up display. In this way, of the two prize ball count-up effects, the later prize ball count-up effect is set to have a higher priority than the previous prize ball count-up effect, and if the end of the previous prize ball count-up effect and the start of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect overlap in time, the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted and the subsequent prize ball count-up effect is given priority. Therefore, even when game balls successively enter the large prize entry slot and two prize ball count-up effects are executed consecutively, the first and second prize ball count-up effects can proceed smoothly without interruption. This prevents a timing discrepancy between the entry of game balls into the large prize entry slot and the execution of the prize ball count-up effect (which would cause a player to feel uncomfortable), and allows the prize ball count-up effect to be properly completed during the execution of the special game (round game). As a variant, when the execution of the previous prize ball count-up effect is interrupted, the count-up display can be forcibly switched to the final value "1015" (i.e., if it is interrupted at "1010," the count-up display can be switched immediately from "1010" to the final value "1015"), and the count-up display of the subsequent prize ball count-up effect (a count-up display from "1016" to "1030") can be started from this final value.

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specific situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches the specified value of "95000." Specifically, in a specific situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "94,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. On the other hand, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "95,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 94,998 + 2 = 95,000), thereby satisfying the suppression function activation condition (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON). In this particular situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is cut off and then restored (power restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from the initial value "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power cut reaches the specified value "95,000" when one more game ball enters the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from the initial value "0," and even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the specified value "95,000," and the suppression function activation conditions will not be satisfied (the suppression function activation flag will not be turned ON). However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0", if you continue playing after the power is restored and the MY counter's count value reaches the specified value of "95000", the suppression function activation condition will be met (the suppression function activation flag will be turned ON).

If one more game ball enters the large prize opening during the execution of a special game, the cumulative number of prize balls will reach a specific value (a multiple of 2500). However, if one game ball enters the general prize opening before one more game ball enters the large prize opening, there is a situation (referred to as a "specified situation") in which the cumulative number of prize balls does not reach the specific value and the count value of the MY counter reaches a predetermined value of "90000." Specifically, in a predetermined situation where the cumulative number of prize balls is "97,485" during the execution of a special game and the count value of the MY counter is "89,998," if one more game ball enters the large prize opening (if 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97,500" and an emphasis effect will be executed, whereas if one game ball enters the general prize opening before the last game ball enters the large prize opening (if three prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will not reach the specific value of "97,500," and the count value of the MY counter will reach the specified value of "90,000" (number of safes = 3, number of outs = 1, difference in number of balls = 3 - 1 = 2, MY = 89,998 + 2 = 90,000), thereby satisfying the advance notification condition. In this predetermined situation, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was running at the time of the power outage will resume after power is restored. When the special game resumes, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching a specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, if the power is turned off and then restored (without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on), and after the power is restored, the MY counter will start counting again from its initial value of "0." Therefore, even if the count value of the MY counter at the time of the power outage would reach the predetermined value of "90,000" with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart from its initial value of "0." Therefore, even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the count value of the MY counter will not reach the predetermined value of "90,000," and the advance notification condition will not be satisfied. However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if the game is continued after the power is restored and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90,000," the advance notification condition will be satisfied. As a modified example, in the case where the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation condition is satisfied and then power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the advance notification effect may not be resumed immediately after power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off while the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999") and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (without clearing the RAM), the MY counter is not initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is not resumed immediately after power is restored, and then, when the MY counter count value reaches "91,000," the advance notification effect may be resumed from the third unit notification effect (approximately 4,000 shots remaining until activation). As a further variation, when the aforementioned "count continuation switch" is installed, if the power is turned off before the suppression function activation conditions are met and then power is restored while the count continuation switch is being operated (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, but the advance notification effect will not resume immediately after power is restored. For example, if the power is turned off while the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) is being executed (power is turned off when the MY counter count value is between "90,500" and "90,999"), and the count continuation switch is operated to restore power (power is restored without clearing the RAM), the MY counter will not be initialized (cleared) when power is restored, and the second unit notification effect (approximately 4,500 shots remaining until activation) will resume immediately after power is restored.

During the execution of a special game, after the suppression function activation condition is satisfied (after the suppression function activation flag is turned ON), there is a situation (referred to as "Situation A") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize opening. Specifically, in Situation A, during the execution of a special game, if the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "95000" and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the predetermined specific value of "97500," when one more game ball enters the large prize opening (15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500" and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation A, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, in Situation A, if power is restored without clearing the RAM (if power is restored without clearing the RAM after the suppression function activation conditions are met), the MY counter will not be initialized when power is restored (the MY counter's count value of 95000 will not be cleared), and the suppression function activation flag will remain ON. Therefore, when the special game (jackpot end demo) resumed after power is restored ends, the suppression function will be activated, and at the same time or almost at the same time, the suppression notification effect will be executed.

During the execution of a special game, after the advance notification conditions are satisfied, i.e., after the advance notification effect has begun, there is a situation (referred to as "Situation B") in which the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of 2500) when one more game ball enters the large prize slot. Specifically, in Situation B, during the execution of a special game, the count value of the MY counter has already reached the specified value of "90000" (however, it is preferable that the count value of the MY counter be "90000" or "90500" or the like, with some margin before reaching the specified value of "95000"), and the cumulative number of prize balls is "97485," which is 15 balls less than the specified value of "97500." When one more game ball enters the large prize slot (and 15 prize balls are paid out), the cumulative number of prize balls will reach the specific value of "97500," and an emphasis effect will be executed. In this situation B, if a power outage occurs in the gaming machine and power is restored without clearing the RAM (operating the RAM clear switch), the special game that was being played before the power outage will resume. However, after the special game is resumed, even if one more game ball enters the jackpot slot, the cumulative prize ball count will not reach the predetermined value of "97,500," and the highlight effect that was scheduled before the power outage (the highlight effect that was scheduled to be played when the cumulative prize ball count reached "97,500") will not be executed. In other words, when power is restored, the effect information related to the cumulative prize ball value that was held at the time of the most recent power outage is erased (for example, the cumulative prize ball counter is cleared to zero). Therefore, even if the special game (the jackpot effect) is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative prize ball count display will be displayed again from the initial value of "0," and the execution conditions for the highlight effect (the conditions for reaching the specific value) will be reset from the beginning. Therefore, even if the cumulative number of prize balls at the time of power outage was in a situation where it would reach a specific value with one more game ball entering the large prize slot, when the special game is resumed after power is restored, the cumulative number of prize balls display will be restarted from the initial value of "0," so even if one more game ball enters the large prize slot, the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed before the power outage (the highlighting effect that was scheduled to be executed when the cumulative number of prize balls reached "97,500") will not be executed. However, even if the cumulative number of prize balls returns to the initial value of "0," if play is continued after power is restored and the cumulative number of prize balls reaches a specific value (a multiple of "2,500"), the highlighting effect will be executed each time the cumulative number of prize balls reaches the specific value (a multiple of "2,500"). Furthermore, even if the pre-alarm conditions are met, if the power is turned off and then restored (power is restored without clearing the RAM) before the suppression function activation conditions are met, the MY counter is initialized when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Therefore, when special gameplay is resumed after the power is restored, the MY counter will restart counting from its initial value of "0." Therefore, after the power is restored, the pre-alarm conditions are returned to a state where they are not met, and after the power is restored (special gameplay resumed after the power is restored), the pre-alarm effect that was being executed at the time of the most recent power outage will not be resumed (the pre-alarm effect will not be executed). However, even if the MY counter returns to its initial value of "0," if gameplay continues after the power is restored, and the count value of the MY counter reaches the predetermined value of "90000" (if the pre-alarm conditions are met), the pre-alarm effect will be executed.

The system is configured so that volume and light intensity adjustments are disabled while the suppression function is activated (while the suppression notification effect is being executed). In other words, when the suppression function is activated and the game transitions to a stopped state, the volume level does not change (the volume operation is disabled) even if a volume adjustment operation is performed. Therefore, even if a volume adjustment operation is performed while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the volume level of the suppression notification sound (the voice saying "The suppression function has been activated") does not change, and the suppression notification sound is always output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume). As a variant, the suppression notification sound may be configured to be output in an output mode corresponding to the set volume level. Similarly, when the suppression function is activated and the game transitions to a stopped state, the light intensity level does not change (the light intensity operation is disabled). Therefore, even if a light intensity adjustment operation is performed while the suppression notification effect is being executed, the light intensity of the frame lamp related to the suppression notification when fully lit does not change. However, even if the suppression function activation conditions are met, if a special game is being played, the suppression function is not activated (the suppression notification effect is not being executed), so volume and light intensity adjustments are possible during the special game. Note that if a pre-notification effect is being played, whether it is during a variable or special game, performing a volume adjustment operation will change the volume level (the volume operation will be activated), and performing a light intensity adjustment operation will change the light intensity level (the light intensity operation will be activated). The pre-notification sound output effect may be configured to always be output at a constant volume (a predetermined constant volume) rather than in an output mode corresponding to a set volume level, or it may be configured to be output in an output mode corresponding to a set volume level.

The relationship between various effects (standby demo effects, effect button operations, and specified operations of normal decorative patterns) and the suppression function is as follows: The standby demo effect can be executed (can be started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the pre-announcement effect can be executed (can be started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) even while a standby demo effect is being executed, but the standby demo effect will be forcibly terminated. Note that the effect button operation can be executed (can be started) even while a pre-announcement effect is being executed, but the effect button operation will not be executed (started) while a suppression notification effect is being executed. Note that the pre-announcement effect can be executed (can be started) even while a effect button operation is being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but the suppression notification effect can be executed (can be started) even while a effect button operation is being executed, but the effect button operation will be forcibly terminated. Furthermore, while the advance notification effect is being executed, the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols (actions at the start of fluctuation, action at temporary stop, action when reach is achieved, and shaking action) can be executed (started), but the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are not executed (started) while the suppression notification effect is being executed. Furthermore, the advance notification effect can be executed (started) even while the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are being executed, and can be executed in parallel, but while the suppression notification effect can be executed (started) even while the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are being executed, the predetermined actions of the normal decorative symbols are forcibly terminated.

<ECO Pachinko Machine>
44 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko machine in the first mode that adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko machine. When realizing an ECO pachinko machine, it is roughly divided into the pachinko machine and an ECO unit EU installed outside the pachinko machine (each configured to be separately attachable and detachable from the gaming parlor equipment), and the pachinko machine is roughly divided into a game board side and a game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be attachable and detachable from the gaming parlor equipment, and the game board side is configured to be attachable and detachable from the game machine frame side).

The gaming machine frame of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation unit 1050. The operation unit 1050 is composed of a touch panel interface 1052, a ball count display unit 54, sub-input buttons SB (effect buttons), etc. The touch panel interface 1052 is configured to display and use the gaming machine's game status information and gaming medium information recorded on an IC card (gaming medium recording medium) inserted into the ECO unit EU (described below) through touch operations (either contact or contactless) by the player. The touch panel interface 1052 also has an effect display function and is configured to be able to execute game-related effects in response to commands from the sub-main. The ball count display unit 54 displays the number of balls held (the number of game balls that can be used in play (fired into the game area)). The sub-input buttons SB are a device for operating the effects provided by the sub-main through player operation.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is connected to the payout control board and the operation unit 1050. By inserting an IC card (membership card, general card) containing the player's personal gaming status information (especially information on the number of gaming media owned), the gaming status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the operation unit 1050. The operation unit 1050 can also be used to access the gaming status information, control loans, and manage the loan of electronic money, etc. The ECO unit EU is also connected to the hall computer via a network and is configured to output gaming-related information. Authentication of gaming machine frames and game boards is also performed via the ECO unit EU. The ECO unit EU is powered by a power source separate from the gaming machine and is also connected to the operation unit 1050, which is configured to receive power from the ECO unit EU.

Figure 45 shows an image of the processing between the ECO unit and the prize ball payout control board (particularly the process of adding, subtracting, and transferring the number of balls held). Note that in this figure, the prize ball payout control board is always sending information about the number of balls held (information related to the number of game balls that can be used in play (fired into the game area)) to the number of balls held display unit 1054, and the number of balls held display unit 1054 is repeatedly updating the number of balls held. Also, an example is shown of a case where no errors occur in each process.

<Pitch count addition process>
First, we will explain the ball lending process as an example of the ball count addition process. First, when a ball lending operation is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 sends (2) "ball lending operation information" to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "ball lending operation information," consumes the balance on the IC card in the ball lending control process in (3) and sends (4) a "request to add the number of balls held" to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to add the number of balls held," adds the number of gaming media equal to the consumed balance in the ball count addition process in (5). When the process in (5) is completed, the payout control board sends (6) "addition completion information" to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "addition completion information," sends (7) a "ball lending completion display instruction" to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052 that has received the "ball lending completion display instruction" executes the ball lending completion display (8), and the ball lending process ends.

<Pitch count subtraction process>
Next, we will explain the ball consumption process (particularly the process related to the cart service) as an example of the ball count subtraction process. First, when an operation to use the cart service is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 sends the "ball consumption operation information" in (2) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "ball consumption operation information," sends the "request to subtract the number of balls held" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to subtract the number of balls held," subtracts the number of game media to be consumed in the cart service from the current number of balls in the ball count subtraction process in (4). When the process in (4) is completed, the payout control board sends the "subtraction completion information" in (5) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU that has received the "subtraction completion information" transmits a "ball consumption completion display instruction" (6) to the touch panel interface 1052. Next, the touch panel interface 1052 that has received the "ball consumption completion display instruction" executes a (7) wagon service usage completion display, and the ball consumption process ends.

<Pitch count transfer process>
Next, we will explain the IC card return process as an example of the ball count transfer process. First, when a return operation (IC card return operation) is performed on the touch panel interface 1052 in (1), the touch panel interface 1052 sends "return operation information" in (2) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, having received the "return operation information," sends a "request to return the number of balls" in (3) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, having received the "request to return the number of balls," stops the game (e.g., stops the firing of game balls) in the ball count transfer process in (4), and confirms that there are no game balls (floating balls) floating down the game board surface (e.g., waits until the counter value of the enclosed game ball counter 3313 reaches its initial value) in the ball count transfer process in (5), and then sends "ball count information" in (6) to the ECO unit EU. Next, the ECO unit EU, which has received the "number of balls held" temporarily stores the number of balls held based on the received information in the return control process (7), and sends a "request to clear number of balls held" to the payout control board (8). Next, the payout control board, which has received the "request to clear number of balls held," clears the current number of balls held (to zero) in the ball number transfer process (9), and sends "information on completion of clearing number of balls held" to the ECO unit EU (10). Next, the ECO unit EU, which has received the "information on completion of clearing number of balls held," adds the number of balls temporarily stored in the process (7) to the number of saved balls stored on the IC card inserted in the ECO unit in the return control process (11). Next, in the return control process (12), the ECO unit EU ejects (returns) the IC card from the IC card return slot and sends a "instruction to display return completion" to the touch panel interface 1052 in (13). Next, the touch panel interface 1052, which has received the "return completion display instruction," executes the return completion display (14), and the IC card return process between the touch panel interface 1052 and the ECO unit EU is completed. Also, upon completion of the process (12), the ECO unit EU transmits "return completion information" (15) to the payout control board. Next, the payout control board, which has received the "return completion information," cancels the game suspension executed in the process (4) and returns to the playable state (16), and the IC card return process between the ECO unit EU and the payout control board is completed.

<About the game ball circulation mechanism>
Next, we will explain the circulation of game balls. In this pachinko game machine, a game can be played by circulating a certain number of game balls (for example, 100 balls) within the pachinko game machine (hereinafter, the circulated game balls may be referred to as enclosed game balls), and the game can be played without supplying game balls from outside the game machine or discharging (paying out) game balls to outside the game machine.

First, enclosed game balls are stored in an enclosed game ball tank within the enclosed game ball count management means. The enclosed game balls in the enclosed game ball tank are sent to the launch device by a ball feed solenoid mechanism, and the launch control device launches the game balls toward the play area on the play board side. Next, the game balls launched into the play area enter one of the ball entrances, which are game peripherals, and flow from the play board side to the game machine frame side. The enclosed game balls that have flowed in are detected by prize ball permission sensors and out ball detection sensors corresponding to the ball entrances provided in the play area, and are stored again in the enclosed game ball tank. Then, while the enclosed game balls are circulating inside the pachinko machine in this way, if a game ball is fired towards the game area on the game board, or if it enters a ball entry port that is eligible for prize ball payout, the payout control board will award the prize ball to the player (by adding or subtracting from the ball data).

In addition, because the machine is designed to circulate game balls, players are unable to touch them; specifically, it does not have the upper or lower trays found in the underlying technology. This configuration prevents fraudulent activities such as mixing in illegal game balls, such as game balls with smaller diameters than normal, balls with string attached, or balls brought in from other stores. It also makes it difficult to remove game balls circulating within the machine and prevent them from performing properly, making it an effective fraud prevention measure.

A backup power supply for supplying power to the backup area is provided on the payout control board. This backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit E (power supply board) and receives power. Even if a power outage occurs and power is cut off from the power supply unit E, power can be supplied from the backup power supply to the backup area, and the ball count counter, history, and various flags can be stored, making it possible to retain various payout information that is important for playing.

A backup power supply is provided on the payout control board to supply power to the backup area for holding ball count counters, etc. This configuration allows it to function as a dedicated backup power supply for holding ball count counters, etc. Even if a harness connected to the payout control board is broken or disconnected, it can provide stable power without being affected, thereby increasing the reliability of the backup. Furthermore, by supplying power only to the backup area for holding ball count counters, etc., the backup time can be extended even if the backup power supply is made smaller, and the payout control board can be made smaller, resulting in space savings. A dedicated backup power supply for holding ball count counters, etc. may also be provided in the power supply unit E. By providing it in the power supply unit E, the payout control board can be made even smaller and lighter.

In addition, the backup power supply for maintaining the ball holding counter, etc. may be shared with the backup power supply for the main board provided in the power supply unit E. By sharing the backup power supply provided in the power supply unit E, the configuration related to the backup power supply can be simplified.

Furthermore, volatile memory is used as the RAM that stores the ball count counter and other data. Using volatile memory makes it cheaper, but it is necessary to provide a backup power source to back up the volatile memory in case of a power outage. In contrast, non-volatile memory can be used as the RAM that stores the ball count counter and other data. For example, flash memory can be used as non-volatile memory. By configuring it in this way, the backup power source can be omitted, making it possible to make the device smaller and lighter overall.

With this configuration, prize balls are awarded to the player only when a ball is detected by both the ball entry detection device on the game board and the prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, and when the winning information (e.g., information related to the winning slot type and number of prize balls) transmitted from the main board matches the basic prize ball count information stored on the payout control board. This prevents the acquisition of prize balls through fraudulent activities. Furthermore, by providing prize ball permission sensors on the game machine frame, the cost of the game board can be reduced (since pachinko machine models are replaced primarily by replacing only the game board, and the game machine frame is often reused). Furthermore, for winnings that award prize balls to the player, the prize slot type and number of prize balls can be displayed on a specified display (e.g., a prize information display device). This allows the player to easily understand which winning slot the ball entered and how many prize balls they received, resulting in a user-friendly game machine.

The payout control means also includes a temporary payout processing-related information storage means for temporarily storing information related to winning balls. This temporary payout processing-related information storage means further includes winning counters for counting the number of winning balls at each winning slot received from the main board, a ball counter for counting the player's current ball count (the number of game media available for play), and an enclosed game ball counter for counting the number of game balls (enclosed game balls) currently present within the gaming machine frame. Here, the ball counter stores the player's current ball count (the number of game media available for play). As a player progresses through the game, the ball counter may reach zero, or in other words, the player's current ball count may become zero. In such cases, it is necessary to stop the launch of game balls. In other words, when the ball counter reaches zero, it is necessary to control the system so that game balls are not launched even if the player operates the launch handle. The launching device has a launching motor and a ball feeding device (not shown), and the operation of the launching motor and ball feeding device is controlled by a launching control board, which is the launching device's control circuit. The launching of game balls can be stopped by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of a drive signal to the launching motor. The launching control board can also stop the launching of game balls by interrupting (prohibiting) the supply of a control signal to the ball feeding device.

<Total score display device>
In the gaming machine according to this example, loaned gaming balls and gaming balls obtained by entering a designated winning slot may be treated as pseudo gaming media capable of computation, and the gaming balls to be launched may be actual gaming balls. In such a configuration, a total score display device capable of displaying the total number of gaming balls available for launch may be provided. The total score display device has nine display units formed by 7-segment LEDs and is located in a position easily visible to the player (e.g., near the sub-input button SB). The nine (9-digit) display units are composed of five (5-digit) display units for displaying total score information, two (2-digit) display units for displaying acquired score information, and two (2-digit) display units for displaying error information. The total number of gaming balls available for launch, displayed on the total score display device, is configured to increase when gaming balls are loaned or when prize balls are obtained by entering a designated winning slot. The total number of gaming balls available for launch, displayed on the total score display device, is stored in a storage device such as RAM. The storage device can be, for example, a RAM built into the CPU of the main board. In addition, the total score display device can also be configured to have a separate storage device such as RAM so that information related to the total number of game balls that can be shot can be stored on both the main board and the total score display device. In this way, the total score display device of the gaming machine according to this example can not only display the total number of game balls but also store it.

The total score display device can also display the following information:
(1) Total score information: The total score information indicates the total number of points that can be shot. Note that the number of balls that can be shot is sometimes referred to as a score (1 ball = 1 point), and the total number of balls that can be shot is sometimes referred to as the total score.
(2) Acquired Score Information Acquired score information is information indicating the score (also called prize balls) obtained by a single ball entering a predetermined winning slot.
(3) Error Information: Information indicating an abnormality in the main board and/or payout control board. As described above, the total score display device has five (5-digit) display sections for displaying total score information, two (2-digit) display sections for displaying acquired score information, and two (2-digit) display sections for displaying error information, for a total of nine display sections. The display section for displaying acquired score information and the display section for displaying error information may be shared. In this case, if an error occurs while displaying acquired score information, the displayed acquired score information is switched to error information. For example, when an error occurs, different error types are displayed, such as "E1,""E2,""E3," etc., depending on the type of error. If "E1" is displayed to indicate an error when power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, for example, when eight balls are being paid out and "*8" (the "*" indicates an off state) is displayed, if a power outage occurs and power-off recovery cannot be performed normally, "E1" is displayed, and if power-off recovery is performed normally, "*8" is displayed. The number of display sections can be changed as appropriate; for example, there may be four display sections for displaying total score information, allowing up to four digits of information to be displayed, or there may be six display sections for displaying total score information, allowing up to six digits of information to be displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of firing 100 game balls per minute, if the payout rate is 2 after one hour of continuous ball firing, the payout rate will be "In: 100 x 60 = 6,000, Out: 12,000." If the gaming center's business hours are 14 hours, the payout rate will be "In: 84,000, Out: 168,000." In such a case, the total score displayed on the total score display device at the end of the gaming center's business hours will be approximately "168,000 - 84,000 = 84,000." Therefore, in this configuration, it is preferable that the total score display device have five display sections for displaying total score information, and that they be able to display information up to five digits.

Among the various types of errors, when an unrecoverable error occurs that cannot be recovered from without executing the RAM clear process when changing settings (an error that cannot be recovered from the situation immediately before the error occurred), the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared when recovering, but as described above, information regarding the total score is not cleared, thereby preventing a disadvantage to the player (for example, this can prevent a situation where an unrecoverable error occurs when the total score is 2000 and the total score becomes 0 when recovering from the unrecoverable error). Even if the RAM area (address) containing information regarding the total score is also cleared, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage to the player by storing information regarding the total score in the CR unit and configuring the connection terminal board to transmit information regarding the total score to the main board and/or payout control board when recovering from an unrecoverable error. Furthermore, if the total score display device is equipped with RAM, storing information regarding the total score in that RAM can prevent a disadvantage to the player even when an unrecoverable error occurs and the unrecoverable error is recovered from. In other words, if there is a means for backing up total score information (a storage area for backing up total score information) even when a power outage occurs or when the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged even when an irrecoverable error occurs (the total score information may be configured to be stored in a storage area within the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board and in a backup storage area, or it may be configured to be stored only in a storage area (a backup storage area) that is not erased even when the RAM of the main board and/or payout control board is cleared).

<Information about the difference in balls>
The gaming machine according to this example may be configured to enable confirmation of the difference in the number of game balls (scores) (the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of game balls fired from the number of game balls paid out) over a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period from when the player started playing). For example, a display unit that displays the difference in the number of game balls may be provided in a position that is always visible to the player, or the machine may be configured to display the difference in the number of game balls on the performance display device. Note that, if the performance display device is configured to display a display regarding the difference in the number of game balls, the display regarding the difference in the number of game balls may be configured to be always displayed in a partial display area of the performance display device, or the display regarding the difference in the number of game balls may be configured to be displayed on the performance display device on a menu screen that is displayed by operating the sub-input button SB during the operation valid period (or by operating the sub-input button SB again on the menu screen) (if the player wishes to check the difference in the number of game balls, the player may be able to check the difference in the number of game balls at any time by operating the sub-input button SB). The difference in the number of balls may be the increase or decrease in the total score from a predetermined timing such as the start of the game, and for example, if the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 2500 points (balls), the difference in the number of balls may be +500 points (balls), and if the total score at the start of the game is 2000 points (balls) and the current total score is 1500 points (balls), the difference in the number of balls may be -500 points (balls). Also, when the difference in the number of balls is displayed on a predetermined display unit (for example, an effect display device), the display color (display mode) may be different depending on the value of the difference in the number of balls, such as displaying in black if the difference in the number of balls is a positive value or 0, and displaying in red if the difference in the number of balls is a negative value.

In addition, the information regarding the difference in number of balls, such as information about the current difference in number of balls and information about the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current difference in number of balls from a predetermined number, may be measured and calculated by the main board and stored on the main board. Also, the information regarding the difference in number of balls, such as information about the current difference in number of balls and information about the number of game balls obtained by subtracting the current difference in number of balls from a predetermined number, may be measured and calculated by a board other than the main board (for example, the payout control board KH) and stored on the main board. Also, the main board may be configured to be able to send the information it has stored to the sub-board. Also, information regarding the difference in number of balls may be received from another device so that the main board can grasp it.

In addition, the difference in the number of balls may be configured as follows.
(1) When the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined number, the progress of the game is stopped. For example, the game balls may not be shot even if the player operates the shooting handle, the balls entering the winning slot may be invalid, or various lotteries on the main board may not be executed.
(2) Information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be electromagnetically recorded on a predetermined recording medium, and furthermore, when a player starts playing, the information stored on the recording medium may be read, and the information regarding the difference in the number of balls may be inherited and the game may proceed. In such a configuration, even if a player plays on multiple gaming machines in one day, the difference in the number of balls can be inherited and measured, and the difference in the number of balls for that player in one day may be known. Furthermore, when the difference in the number of balls for a player in one day reaches a predetermined number, the game may be stopped as described above, and information indicating that the difference in the number of balls has reached the predetermined number for stopping the game may be recorded on the recording medium, and the player may be unable to play (or may not borrow game balls) for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the next business day). Furthermore, if a player plays on multiple gaming machines in one day, it is preferable to configure the system so that it is possible to know which player played.For example, it is preferable to record identification information on the recording medium that can identify which player is playing, and to refer to the identification information when starting play so that information on the difference in the number of balls for that day can be read out.

In addition, when the progress of the game is stopped, the device may be configured to be able to send information that the progress of the game has been stopped to another control board, such as a sub-board.For example, when information is sent to a sub-board, it is possible to control the display of a specified display or change the display mode of a display of a currently running performance, etc., based on the sent information, as follows.
(1) When the progress of the game is stopped, the effect display device may be configured to display, as a message that the progress of the game has been stopped, (1-1) in a layer in front of the currently displayed effect, a message that the game has been stopped, taking up more than half of the display area of the effect display device, (1-2) in a layer in front of the currently displayed effect, a predetermined warning image (for example, a message saying, "Pachinko is a game that should be enjoyed in moderation"), or (1-3) erase the currently displayed effect and display a message that the progress of the game has been stopped over the entire display area of the effect display device. Also, when displaying the message that the progress of the game has been stopped, a sound dedicated to that display may be output (for example, "The game is ending. Be careful not to get addicted"), or a game effect lamp may be lit in a lighting mode dedicated to that display.
(2) If the difference in the number of balls reaches the predetermined number during a jackpot, during the start of a demo, or during a pattern change related to the jackpot pattern, (2-1) the process to stop the game progress is not executed, and the game progress is stopped when the difference in the number of balls decreases by more than the number of game balls that increased in the jackpot, or (2-2) the game progress is stopped, and the game progress can be resumed only by an operation that is not possible for the player (for example, an operation that can only be performed by the game center manager), or the game cannot be resumed unless the RAM is cleared when the settings are changed.

In addition, the main board may be configured to transmit information regarding the difference in the number of balls between the balls when the predetermined number at which game progress will be stopped has not been reached. In this configuration, the sub-board may be configured to display or output a sound on the display device to indicate that game progress is about to be stopped when the difference in the number of balls between the balls is reduced by a certain number to the predetermined number at which game progress will be stopped (for example, when the predetermined number is reached by firing 100 more balls). Furthermore, for example, if the predetermined number is -2500 points (balls), the sub-board may be configured to execute a preview effect (e.g., a conversation effect) more frequently during symbol change when the difference in the number of balls between the balls is relatively far from the predetermined number (for example, +1000 balls) than when the difference is relatively close to the predetermined number (for example, -2000 balls).

<What happens when the total score reaches the upper limit>
Furthermore, while the total score may increase when a game ball is paid out, an upper limit may be set for the total score, and the total score may not increase once the total score reaches that predetermined value. For example, if the memory area for the total score is 2 bytes, the total score that can be stored ranges from 0 to 65,535, and the upper limit for the total score is 65,535. In this configuration, if the total score is 65,510 and a game ball enters the large prize slot and 15 balls are paid out, 15 points (balls) are added to the total score, making the total score 65,525. On the other hand, if the total score is 65,530 and a game ball enters the large prize slot and 15 balls are paid out, adding 15 points (balls) to the total score would exceed the upper limit of 65,535, so 5 points (balls) are added to the total score, making the total score the upper limit of 65,535. Furthermore, when the total points are at the upper limit, even if information to increase the total points is received from the CR unit CRU (sometimes referred to as the ECO unit), the total points may be configured not to increase (for example, inserting banknotes into the CR unit CRU is disabled, or operation of a button provided on the CR unit CRU for lending points is disabled). Furthermore, when a win causes the total points to reach (exceed) the upper limit, an error may occur and the progress of the game may be stopped. Furthermore, when a win causes the total points to reach (exceed) the upper limit, the total points may be displayed by changing the display format, such as by displaying the upper digits in hexadecimal, or by scrolling or switching the display.

<Configuration of gaming value information>
The gaming machine may be configured to transmit information indicating that one gaming ball or one point of score is worth a first value (e.g., 4 yen) and information indicating that one gaming ball or one point of score is worth a second value (e.g., 1 yen) lower than the first value from a connection terminal board, which is a terminal board provided within the gaming machine, to a main board (hereinafter, the main board may also be referred to as a payout control board). The information indicating the first value and the information indicating the second value may sometimes be referred to as gaming value information. In such a configuration, the main board may be configured to store whether the information indicating the first value or the information indicating the second value has been received. The main board may be configured to check whether the game value information stored therein matches the game value information received from the connection terminal board, and the timing of this check may be (1) to check whether they match at all times, (2) every time a predetermined number of game balls are fired (e.g., by counting the number of balls fired by measuring the number of balls ejected), (3) every predetermined period (e.g., every hour), (4) after power is restored after a power outage, or (5) after a RAM clear process related to a setting change is executed. Furthermore, if it is determined that the game value information stored in the main board and the game value information received from the connection terminal board do not match after checking whether they match, for example, if the game value information stored in the main board is a first value and the game value information received from the connection terminal board is a second value, the game may be stopped, game balls may not be fired, balls may not enter the winning slot, or the score (total score) settlement process may be disabled until the game value information matches.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the main board is configured to transmit information indicating that the game has been stopped from the main board to the sub-board when the game progress is stopped, (1) when the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is executed, whereas when the main board stores game value information, which is the second value, and the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is not stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is not executed. (2) when the main board stores game value information, which is the first value, and the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value, the game progress is stopped and a presentation indicating that the game progress has been stopped is executed. (3) when the main board stores game value information that is the first value, if the difference in the number of balls reaches a predetermined value (e.g., -2500 balls), the game progress is stopped and a presentation that the game progress has been stopped is executed, and when the main board stores game value information that is the second value, if the difference in the number of balls reaches a specific value (e.g., -10000 balls) that is less than the predetermined value, the game progress is stopped and a presentation that the game progress has been stopped is executed. Note that while the device is configured to be able to execute a presentation that the game progress is stopped based on the difference in the number of balls, the device is not limited to this, and it may also be configured to execute a presentation related to the stop of the game progress based on information regarding the loan amount of points (game value, game balls, points) that can be calculated based on the difference in the number of balls and game value information. Furthermore, the presentation mode when an effect related to the difference in the number of balls is executed when the main board is storing game value information, which is the first value, may be different from the presentation mode when an effect related to the difference in the number of balls is executed when the main board is storing game value information, which is the second value. By configuring it in this way, the presentation mode can be based on the amount of money the player is using, making it possible to appropriately prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

<Configuration of game ending operation>
The machine may also be configured to have a settlement button, and when the player operates the settlement button, score-related information can be sent from the main board to the connection terminal board (this operation allows the game to end). If a power outage occurs while the score-related information is being sent, after power is restored, the machine may be configured as follows: (1) the main board sends score-related information to the connection terminal board again, or (2) the connection terminal board sends a request signal to the main board requesting that information regarding the excess score be sent again, and then the main board sends score-related information to the connection terminal board again.

Also, if the settlement button is operated while the door unit is open, (1) the process related to the score settlement may be executed, or (2) the process related to the score settlement may not be executed. Also, if the door unit is opened immediately after the settlement button is operated, the process related to the score settlement may be configured to continue without interruption.

When the settlement button is operated in the setting confirmation state, (1) the process related to score settlement is executed when the setting value can be confirmed, (2) the process related to score settlement is executed when the setting value cannot be confirmed, (3) the process related to score settlement is not executed when the setting value can be confirmed, or (4) the process related to score settlement is not executed when the setting value cannot be confirmed.

When the settlement button is operated in setting change mode, (1) the process related to score settlement is executed while remaining in setting change mode, (2) the setting change mode is ended and the process related to score settlement is executed, (3) the process related to score settlement is not executed while remaining in setting change mode, or (4) the setting change mode is ended and the process related to score settlement is not executed.

When the settlement button is operated while the main gaming symbols are changing, (1) the process related to the settlement of points is executed while the main gaming symbols are changing, or (2) the process related to the settlement of points is not executed while the main gaming symbols are changing.

If the settlement button is operated during a big hit (or a small hit), the system may be configured to (1) execute the process related to the score settlement while the big hit (or small hit) is still in progress, or (2) not execute the process related to the score settlement while the big hit (or small hit) is still in progress.

As described above, even if an unintended event (power outage, error) occurs while score-related information is being sent or received between the main board and the connection terminal board, score-related information can be sent or received accurately. In addition to or in conjunction with the above configuration, the sending side may be configured to (1) include data indicating that transmission has ended in the score-related information (for example, include end bit information in the case of serial communication), or (2) send information indicating the end after sending the score-related information. Furthermore, the receiving side may be configured to send reception completion information to the sending side after receiving the transmitted score-related information, indicating that the information has been received.

Figure 46 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko gaming machine in the second mode, which adopts the specifications of an ECO pachinko gaming machine. The difference from Figure 44 is the configuration of the operation unit device 1050. Specifically, the operation unit device 1050 is equipped with a ball count display device MU and an ECO unit operation panel ES.

Next, Figure 47 is a diagram showing details of the operation unit device 1050 in Figure 46. The ball count display device MU is provided with a ball count display section 1501, a settlement number setting display section 1502, an information display section 1503, a full settlement button 1504, a partial settlement button 1505, and a settlement unit number setting button 1506, and the ECO unit operation panel ES is provided with a settled display section 601, a replay button 602, a card balance display section 603, a loan button 604, a card return button 605, and a status display section 606.

The ball count display 1501 is, for example, a 6-digit, 7-segment LED and can display up to 999,999 balls stored (stored) in the gaming machine. The settlement number setting display 1502 is, for example, a 4-digit, 7-segment LED and can display up to 9,999 balls, the unit number of game balls used when settling a portion of the ball count. The unit settlement number can be set for each digit by operating the up or down button on the settlement unit number setting button 1506, which corresponds to each digit. The information display 1503 is, for example, an LED capable of displaying English characters (not shown), and can display error information and settlement confirmation information (described below) when an error occurs. Specifically, if there is a communication error between the payout control board and the ball count display 1501, "E1" is displayed. If there is a communication error between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, "E2" is displayed. It is preferable that the ball count display section 1501 be configured so that information other than the ball count (such as error information) is not displayed. Note that the number of digits listed above is merely an example, and can be changed without any problems.

The full settlement button 1504 is made up of a mechanical switch or the like, and is a button that is operated when settling the game balls (held balls) stored (held) on the gaming machine side, and is configured so that its operation surface is the largest of all the held ball count display devices MU. Note that in order to prevent erroneous operation, it is configured so that the full settlement process is performed by operating it multiple times. The partial settlement button 1505 is made up of a mechanical switch or the like, and is a button that is operated when settling some of the game balls (held balls) stored (held) on the gaming machine side, and is configured so that its operation surface is smaller than the above-mentioned full settlement button 1504. Note that in order to prevent erroneous operation, as with the full settlement process, it is configured so that the partial settlement process is performed by operating it multiple times.

Next, we will explain the ECO unit operation panel ES. The settled ball display 601 is, for example, composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the ball count display 1501, and can display up to 999,999 balls owned by the player, as managed by the ECO unit. The card balance display 603 is, for example, composed of a 3-digit 7-segment LED and can display the balance (points) recorded on the IC card. The loan button 604 is, for example, composed of a mechanical switch or the like, and is operated when loaning game balls within the balance (points) recorded on the IC card. The card return button 605 is, for example, composed of a mechanical switch or the like, and is operated by the player when removing the IC card. The replay button 602 is, for example, composed of a mechanical switch or the like, and is operated by the player to make available the settled game balls displayed on the settled ball display 601. As will be explained in more detail below, control in response to various button inputs on the ECO unit operation panel ES, display control, etc., are carried out by the control unit on the ECO unit side.

Figure 48 shows the general electrical configuration of a pachinko gaming machine. The pachinko gaming machine is equipped with a CPU that performs various arithmetic processing, a ROM that stores in advance programs that define the CPU's arithmetic processing, and a RAM that temporarily stores data handled by the CPU (such as various data generated during play and computer programs read from the ROM).The pachinko gaming machine is also equipped with a payout control board that controls the firing of game balls and the addition and subtraction of ball data that corresponds to the consumption of game balls by awarding and firing prize balls, a ball count display device MU that is provided with various display units such as the ball count display unit 1501 mentioned above and various input operation units such as the total settlement button 1504, an ECO unit connection terminal board that relays information sent and received between the payout control board and the ECO unit EU, and an ECO unit operation panel ES that is provided with various display units such as the card balance display unit 603 mentioned above and various input operation units such as the loan button 604.The ECO unit connection terminal board enables communication of information with the ECO unit EU, which is installed outside the pachinko gaming machine and is provided with appropriate control functions. Although the ECO unit EU is sometimes described as part of the pachinko gaming machine throughout this specification, it will be described here as a separate device from the pachinko gaming machine.

<Dispensing control board>
The payout control board is configured to control the operation of balls held in the game (addition, subtraction, etc.) based on information from the main board and ECO unit EU (mainly information that is used to add to the player's balls), the launch detection sensor, or the ball feed sensor described below (mainly information that is used to subtract from the player's balls), and is also configured to control the display of the ball information and the operation of the launch device (launch handle, launch motor, ball feed device, etc.).

The payout control board also has a transmission/reception control means for transmitting and receiving information related to prize balls, a payout control means for managing the processes related to the payout of prize balls, a launch control means for managing the processes related to the launch of game balls, and a power outage/power restoration initial processing control means for managing the processes when power is lost on the payout control board side.

Here, the transmission/reception control means includes a reception control means for controlling the reception of information, and a transmission control means for controlling the transmission of information. The reception control means also includes a main-side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the main board, and an ECO unit-side reception information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information received from the ECO unit EU.

Next, the payout control means has a payout processing related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information related to prize balls. This payout processing related information temporary storage means further has winning counters for counting the number of winnings at each winning slot received from the main board, a ball count counter for counting the number of balls the player currently has (the number of gaming media available for play), and an enclosed game ball count counter for counting the number of game balls (enclosed game balls) currently present within the gaming machine frame.

Next, the launch control means has a launch control-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing information related to the launch control of gaming balls.

Next, the power interruption/recovery initial processing control means includes a power interruption information temporary storage means for temporarily storing (backing up) information at the time of power interruption. Although not shown, a backup power supply for supplying power to the power interruption information temporary storage means is provided on the payout control board. This backup power supply is connected to the power supply unit and receives power. Even if power from the power supply unit is cut off during a power interruption, the backup power supply can supply power to the power interruption information temporary storage means. This allows the number of unpaid balls and held balls (e.g., the value of the held ball counter, the enclosed game ball counter, etc.) and various flags stored in the payout control board at the time of power interruption to be stored and maintained even during a power interruption, thereby enabling various payout information important to gameplay to be maintained. The value of the enclosed game ball counter may be cleared when power is restored. Needless to say, the power interruption information temporary storage means can be configured using a RAM shared with the payout processing-related information temporary storage means, or can be configured by temporarily storing the payout processing-related information temporary storage means itself.

<ECO unit>
Next, the ECO unit EU is similar to the card unit R and is connected to the ECO unit operation panel ES via the ECO unit connection terminal board. By inserting an IC card (membership card, general card) on which the player's personal status information (for example, card balance and number of gaming media held) is recorded, the status information recorded on the IC card can be displayed on the ECO unit operation panel ES. In addition, by operating the input operation section (loan button 604, card return button 605) of the ECO unit operation panel ES, it is possible to control the lending of gaming balls using the card balance and number of gaming media held recorded on the IC card, and to perform control processing based on various information transmitted from the gaming machine.

<ECO unit connection terminal board>
The ECO unit connection terminal board, details of which will be described later, is a board for connecting the dispensing control board and the ECO unit EU, and the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and various signals are sent and received via this ECO unit connection terminal board.

Note that although the ECO unit connection terminal board is illustrated as receiving bidirectional input signals from the dispensing control board, ECO unit operation panel ES, and ECO unit EU, it is merely configured so that the ECO unit EU controls the ECO unit operation panel ES; the dispensing control board is not configured to receive status information related to the ECO unit operation panel ES.

<Pitch count display device>
Next, the ball count display device MU has a ball count display section 1501 for displaying the number of balls held, a settlement number setting display section 1502 for displaying the number of game balls to be settled for partial settlement, which will be described later, an information display section 1503 that can display error information when an error occurs, and an input operation section that can be operated by the player.The input operation section of the ball count display device MU has a full settlement button 1504 for settling all acquired game balls, a partial settlement button 503 for settling a portion of acquired game balls, and a settlement unit number setting button 1506 for setting the number of game balls to be partially settled.

<ECO unit operation panel>
Next, the ECO unit operation panel ES has a settled display section 601 that displays the number of game balls that have been settled, a card balance display section 603 that displays status information (e.g., card balance) recorded on the IC card (membership card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU, a status display section 606 that displays an error message if a communication abnormality occurs between the ECO unit EU and the ECO unit operation panel ES, and an input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel.The input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel ES has a replay button 602 that is operated to play again using settled game balls, a loan button 604 for loaning game balls, and a card return button 605 for removing the IC card (membership card, general card) inserted into the ECO unit EU.

Next, we will explain the information (e.g., information and signals) that is sent and received. First, we will explain the information that is sent and received between the pachinko gaming machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU. As mentioned above, information is sent and received between the gaming machine (payout control board) and the ECO unit EU via the ECO unit connection terminal board.

Specifically, the signals (information) sent from the ECO unit EU to the pachinko gaming machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) include an operation panel drive signal to operate the ECO unit operation panel ES, a loan request signal to loan gaming balls, a unit RDY signal indicating that the ECO unit is able to receive information from the gaming machine (is in a ready state), and status information managed by the ECO unit, such as an error status on the ECO unit side. On the other hand, signals (information) sent from the gaming machine (ECO unit connection terminal board) to the ECO unit EU include gaming machine information (setting value information, feature ratio information for each setting, ball entry status information, external output information (jackpot signal, probability change signal, symbol change signal, winning signal, prize ball signal, loan signal, etc.), ball count information, etc.), operation information (settlement information) from the input operation unit of the ball count display device, a gaming machine RDY signal indicating that information can be received from the ECO unit EU (that the device is ready), and an operation signal from the input operation unit of the ECO unit operation panel ES. The loan request signal and unit RDY signal are input to the payout control board, and the gaming machine information, settlement information, and gaming machine RDY signal are output from the payout control board.

Next, we will explain the information sent and received between the ECO unit operation panel ES and the ECO unit EU via the ECO unit connection terminal board. An operation signal is sent from the ECO unit operation panel ES to the ECO unit EU indicating that the loan button 604 on the input operation section of the ECO unit operation panel ES has been operated, and that the card return button 605 has been operated. Meanwhile, an operation panel drive signal is output from the ECO unit EU to the ECO unit operation panel ES to drive the display sections such as the settled display section 601, card balance display section 603, and status display section 606, and various information (e.g., card balance information) recorded on the IC card inserted in the ECO unit EU is displayed on the corresponding display section (e.g., card balance display section 603) of the ECO unit operation panel ES.

Next, we will explain the information sent and received between the payout control board and the ball count display device MU. The payout control board sends to the ball count display device MU ball count information (for example, information from the ball count counter stored in the payout processing related information temporary storage means) and abnormality information for displaying error information on the information display unit 1503 of the ball count display device MU. The ball count display device MU sends input operation information for the input operation unit of the ball count display device MU (full settlement button 1504, partial settlement button 1505, settlement unit number setting button 1506) to the payout control board.

In addition, if the full settlement button 1504 and partial settlement button 1505 are pressed simultaneously (if the pressing of both the full settlement button 1504 and partial settlement button 1505 is detected in a single timer interrupt process), the partial settlement process is configured to take priority. Also, if one button is pressed after the other, the earlier press is considered valid and processing is performed.

Furthermore, if the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 are pressed simultaneously during a single timer interrupt process, neither process may be performed. By configuring in this manner, for example, when there are balls remaining and it becomes necessary to clean the ball count display device MU of the operation unit device 1050, the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 can be kept pressed simultaneously while wiping or otherwise cleaning, thereby preventing the accidental pressing of either the full settlement button 1504 or the partial settlement button 1505. In this case, it is desirable to perform neither process upon detecting the pressing of the full settlement button 1504 and the partial settlement button 1505 during a single timer interrupt process. However, this is not the only criterion for determining simultaneous pressing. If the pressing of one button is detected within a predetermined time (e.g., 500 ms) of the detection of the pressing of the other button, it may be considered to be simultaneous pressing. Needless to say, it would be easy to adopt a similar configuration for the lending button 604 and return button 605 on the ECO unit operation panel ES.

In this way, in the full settlement process, the first operation of the full settlement button 1504 displays a settlement confirmation message (for example, a message displaying "Are you sure you want to settle the full amount?" using the information display unit 1503, etc.), and the second operation of the full settlement button 1504 executes the full settlement. The settlement confirmation message displayed by the first operation disappears after a predetermined time (for example, three seconds), and if the full settlement button 1504 is operated after it has disappeared, the settlement confirmation message will be displayed again. In other words, full settlement is only executed if the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (for example, three seconds) after the first operation. This ensures that full settlement is immediately executed even if the full settlement button 1504 is operated by mistake, preventing gameplay from being interrupted. To prevent accidental operation of the full settlement button 1504, the full settlement process can also be executed only if the full settlement button 1504 is continuously operated for a certain period of time (for example, if it is continuously on for three seconds or more).

Furthermore, in the event of a gaming machine malfunction due to a communication error process or the like (for example, an abnormality that causes game progress to stop), it is desirable to configure the system so that the settlement information is stored in a specific memory area and cannot be deleted by the normal clear process. Furthermore, when such an abnormality occurs, it is desirable to configure the system so that the settlement number information cannot be resent to the ECO unit unless special maintenance operations are performed. This makes it possible to deter fraudulent activities that take advantage of communication abnormalities.

In this way, in the partial settlement process, in order to settle the partial settlement number set by operating the settlement unit number setting button 1506 (the settlement number displayed in the settlement number setting display unit 1502), the first operation initiates a settlement confirmation request process (e.g., a process displaying "Are you sure you want to settle the partial settlement?" on the information display unit 1503, etc.), and the second operation executes the partial settlement. The settlement confirmation display displayed by the first operation is cleared after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds). If the partial settlement button 1505 is operated after it has been cleared, the settlement confirmation display will be displayed again. In other words, partial settlement is only executed if the second operation is performed within a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the first operation. This prevents the player from accidentally operating the partial settlement button 1505 when they have few balls, which would result in immediate settlement and stoppage of play. Furthermore, since the player can freely set the partial settlement number and the set value can be reflected at the time of the second settlement, efficient partial settlement can be achieved.

In addition, as a process to prevent accidental operation of the partial settlement button 1505, it is also possible to execute the partial settlement process on the condition that the partial settlement button 1505 has been operated continuously for a certain period of time. It is also desirable to disable input from the settlement unit number setting button 1506 for a certain period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the partial settlement button is operated for the first time, so that the partial settlement number cannot be changed. Furthermore, it is also preferable to set a default value (e.g., 100) for the partial settlement number before the player first operates the settlement unit number setting button 1506, so that a certain amount of partial settlement can be executed without the player having to set the partial settlement number.

Here, we will describe some variations on how to set the partial settlement amount.

(Multiple settlement unit numbers are predefined, for example, 250, 500, 750, 100
0, etc.)
(1) A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of settlement units (for example, 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.) are set in advance, and when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to each settlement unit is operated, the settlement number can be set according to that unit. Specifically, when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "250" is operated, "250" is added to the display in the settlement number setting display unit 1502, and when the settlement unit number setting button 1506 corresponding to the settlement unit "500" is operated, "500" is added to the display in the settlement number setting display unit 1502, etc.
(2) In the case where the settlement unit number is preset in multiple types (e.g., 250, 500, 750, 1000, etc.), if the minimum settlement unit is set as the settlement number when the number of balls held is less than the minimum settlement unit, the system is configured to settle the full amount. Specifically, if the number of balls held is "249" and the minimum settlement unit of "250" is set, the system is configured to settle "249", and if the number of balls held is "2400", partial settlement can be set up to "2250".

(Multiple settlement unit numbers are predefined, for example, 100, 200, 300, etc.)
If the number of balls held is 99 or less, settlement is only possible with full settlement. Alternatively, if the number is set to 100 or more, settlement is configured to be based on the number of balls held. For example, if the number of balls held is 1,850, partial settlement can be set up to 1,800.

(Configuration in which the number of settlement units corresponding to the number of prizes exchanged at each gaming parlor is prepared)
For example, if an amusement parlor has determined that balls can be exchanged for drinks at 40 balls and cigarettes at 150 balls, the corresponding settlement unit numbers can be set on the multiple settlement unit number setting buttons 1506 (e.g., button 1 = 40 balls, button 2 = 150 balls, etc.). By configuring it in this way, the number of balls corresponding to the desired prize can be partially settled with a single input or a small number of operations without having to set the number of balls, so smooth prize exchange can be expected. Note that the prize and the number of exchange balls do not necessarily have to be displayed as a set, and only the number of exchanges can be displayed.

In addition, the following configuration can be applied as a display method when subtracting the number of balls displayed in the number of balls display section 1501 by operating the full settlement button 1504 or partial settlement button 1505.
(1) Switching the display of the number of balls in possession For example, if the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the display of the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will switch from "1,000" to "0." If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the value displayed will be the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506. If the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the set partial settlement number was "750," the display of the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will switch from "1,000" to "250."
(2) Decrement display For example, if the ball count display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the ball count display section 1501 will display "1,000" ⇒ "999" ⇒ "998" ⇒ ... "0". If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the number will be decremented to the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506. If the ball count display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the set partial settlement number was "750", the ball count display section 1501 will display "1,000" ⇒ "999" ⇒ "998" ⇒ ... "250".
(3) The number of balls in possession flashes for a predetermined period of time before switching the display. For example, if the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the full settlement button 1504 is operated a second time, the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will flash "1,000" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) before switching to "0." If the partial settlement button is operated a second time, the number of balls in possession will flash, and then the value obtained by subtracting the partial settlement number set by the settlement unit number setting button 1506 will be displayed. If the number of balls in possession display section 1501 shows "1,000" and the set partial settlement number is "750," the number of balls in possession display section 1501 will flash "1,000" for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) before switching to "250."

As such, various configurations can be applied to switch the display of the number of balls held at the time of settlement, but if the display of the number of balls held is switched immediately after the settlement button is pressed (examples (1) and (2) above), the settlement will be made without the player being able to confirm how many balls he or she had, so it is preferable to use a configuration such as (3), which makes it possible to grasp the number of balls held.

As a variation of the display method for subtracting the number of balls held, the following configuration is also possible.
1. The configuration of "(3) flashing the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" in which the number of balls held is lit for a predetermined time and then switching the display does not necessarily have to be flashing, as long as the player can grasp the number of balls held, and for example, it may be configured to be lit for only 3000 ms.
2. The configuration of "(3) flashing the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" or the configuration of "1. lighting the number of balls held for a predetermined time and then switching the display" can also be applied to the configuration of "(2) displaying a decrement." In other words, it is possible to configure the number of balls held to flash or light for a predetermined time (e.g., 3000 ms) and then display a decrement.

As explained above, it is also possible to change the loan request signal (content of the request) from the ECO unit in response to the operation of the loan button 604 or the replay button 602 depending on the situation when the loan button 604 is operated. Specifically, it is assumed that only settled gaming balls are recorded on the IC card, or that both the balance and settled gaming balls are recorded, and in this case, the system may be configured to use the settled gaming balls displayed on the settled display unit 601 rather than using the recorded balance. Furthermore, rather than treating the loan button 604 and replay button 602 as independent input functions for the loan process, it is possible to configure the system so that when the replay button 602 is operated once, it lights up, and if the loan button 604 is operated at this time, it becomes possible to play with the settled gaming balls, and if the loan button 604 is operated again when the replay button 602 is turned off, the balance recorded on the IC card is deducted and gaming balls are loaned out.

Although the term "button" has been used in the explanation, the term "button" does not necessarily refer to a button as a device, but may also refer to a button display as an image. Specifically, each display unit may be configured as a touch panel, and by operating (pressing) the button image displayed on the display unit, it is possible to perform full settlement, partial settlement, set the settlement unit number, etc. Furthermore, while the system is configured to perform settlement (full settlement, partial settlement) with multiple operations, this is not limited to this, and settlement may also be performed with a long press, etc. In this way, by configuring settlement to be performed with multiple operations or a long press, etc., it is possible to perform settlement in accordance with the player's intention, without immediately performing settlement, even if the full settlement button 1504 or partial settlement button 1505 is accidentally operated.

Figure 49 shows the basic structure of the front side of a pachinko machine in the third embodiment, which adopts the specifications of an enclosed pachinko machine. The pachinko machine is an enclosed pachinko machine, and is broadly divided into the pachinko machine itself and a rental unit KU installed outside the pachinko machine (each configured to be separately attachable and detachable to the amusement parlor equipment), and the pachinko machine itself is broadly divided into a game board side and a game machine frame side (the game machine frame side is configured to be attachable and detachable to the amusement parlor equipment, and the game board side is configured to be attachable and detachable to the game machine frame side). Below, we will first explain the structure of the pachinko machine.

First, the pachinko gaming machine has an operation unit device 1050. The operation unit device 1050 is composed of a game ball count display W10, sub-input button SB, cross key SB2, count button W40 (also called a transfer button), etc. The game ball count display W10 displays the number of balls held (the number of game balls that can be used in play (fired into the game area)). The sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 are devices that allow the player to operate the effects on the sub-board. The number of balls held is sometimes referred to as the counter value of the ball count counter. The game ball count display W10 is located in a position that is visible to the player.

Figure 50 shows details of the operation unit device 1050. First, the game ball count display W10 is composed of 6-digit 7-segment numbers aligned horizontally, and is capable of displaying up to 999,999 balls stored (held) on the gaming machine side. The number of balls held is stored using a ball count counter. Details regarding the display of the game ball count display W10 will be described later.

The upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed on the game ball count display W10 is set to "999,999." However, with this configuration, in order to determine whether the upper limit has been exceeded, it becomes necessary to have an area that can store "1,000,000," which is one digit more than "999,999." Therefore, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed may be set to a value that does not change the number of digits displayed even if the number of balls exceeds the upper limit, such as "990,000." With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether the number of balls has exceeded the upper limit with simple processing.

Furthermore, the frame control display (a display consisting of 6-digit 7-segment displays aligned horizontally, capable of displaying the base value (such as a value related to the base in a low base state that can be displayed on the performance display section) and the number of balls held (the counter value of the ball count counter), which is installed on the rear side of the gaming machine and visible from the rear of the gaming machine; in other words, a display that is not visible to the player, unlike the game ball count display W10) can also display the number of balls held, so the upper limit for the number of balls that can be displayed is "999,999". However, just like the game ball count display W10, the frame control display may also set the upper limit for the number of balls that can be displayed to "990,000", or otherwise set the upper limit so that the number of digits displayed does not change even if the number of balls held exceeds this upper limit.

When the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit that can be displayed, one or more of the following configurations may be applied.
(1) The RAM of the main board is not updated. (2) The RAM of the frame control board W (which controls the number of balls held, such as display control of the game ball count display W10, display control of the frame control display, and control of communication with the lending unit KU) is not updated. (3) The lending device KU does not lend game balls. (4) It becomes impossible to fire game balls. (5) Even if a game ball enters the winning hole, no prize ball is generated. (6) The number of balls held is counted by operating the counting button W40. (7) The special game is not executed.

In addition, if the number of balls held exceeds a predetermined value (a value smaller than the upper limit of the number of balls that can be displayed, for example, 40,000), an error notification may be issued, or a notification urging the player to count the number of balls held may be issued. As a specific example, if the number of balls held exceeds 40,000, an error notification may be issued using a lamp or the like on the main board, a notification urging the player to count using a lamp or the like on the main board, a message "Please count" may be displayed on the performance display device SG on the sub-board, or a message "Please count" may be issued by a speaker on the sub-board. By configuring in this way, even if the system is configured so that no prize balls are awarded even if game balls enter the winning slot when the number of balls held exceeds the upper limit, the player will be able to recognize that they should count at 40,000, a value smaller than the upper limit, and the player will not be disadvantaged by not receiving any prize balls.

When configured in this way, the error relating to the number of balls held exceeding the predetermined value can be cleared, or the counting notification can be terminated (by terminating the notification using a lamp or the like on the main board, by hiding the message "Please perform counting" on the performance display device SG on the sub-board, by terminating the voice message "Please perform counting" from the speaker on the sub-board, etc.) on the condition that the number of balls held falls below a predetermined value (40,000 in this example).

The condition for clearing the error or ending the count-related notification may also be set to a specific value (e.g., 37,000 balls) that is smaller than a predetermined value for the number of balls held. This configuration eliminates the annoyance of frequent errors occurring and being cleared (notifications being issued and terminated) due to the number of balls held repeatedly exceeding and falling below the predetermined value (40,000 balls in this example).

Next, the count button W40 is a button for outputting the number of balls held to the lending unit KU. Note that outputting the number of balls held to the lending unit KU is sometimes referred to as counting the number of balls held or settling the number of balls held. The detailed action of operating the count button will be described later.

A display unit may be provided that displays the number of game balls counted by operating the counting button. For example, when the counting button is operated, the number of game balls counted may be displayed on a four-digit, seven-segment LED for a predetermined period of time.

The sub-input button SB and cross key SB2 are similar to those described above and are connected to the sub-board. By operating the sub-input button SB or cross key SB2, you can progress through the preview button effects, select and confirm items on the menu screen, and adjust the volume and light intensity.

In this example, the game ball count display W10 and the frame control display are configured to display the counter value of the ball count counter as the number of balls the player has. Note that the counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as ball count data, and in this case, the ball count data is also numerical data. The counter value of the ball count counter is sometimes referred to as the number of balls held. The game ball count display W10 is sometimes referred to as the first display unit, and the frame control display is sometimes referred to as the second display unit.

When the gaming machine is turned on with the game ball count clear button turned on (operated), the game ball count clear process is executed. The game ball count clear button is located on the back of the gaming machine and is configured so that it cannot be operated by the player. By having a game ball count clear button and being able to execute the game ball count clear process, even if the gaming parlor closes with a non-zero ball count (such as when a player leaves one ball), the game ball count clear process can be executed before the opening of the next day, preventing a situation where the parlor opens with balls remaining.

When the gaming machine is turned on with the ball removal button turned on (operated), it transitions to the ball removal state. The ball removal button is located on the back of the gaming machine and cannot be operated by the player. When the machine transitions to the ball removal state, gaming balls inside the gaming machine can be removed from the machine (for example, part of the flow path through which the ball passes after entering the ball entrance is opened). In the ball removal state, gaming balls can be fired, but the progress of the game is stopped (entry into the prize entrance is invalidated, no pattern change is performed, no jackpot is executed, etc.). Note that invalid entry into the prize entrance may mean that when a gaming ball enters the prize entrance, the entry of the gaming ball is not detected, or may mean that the entry of the gaming ball is detected but no prize balls are generated based on the entry.

The characteristic features of this embodiment are listed below.
<Configuration 1>
The normal hold image 506 in FIG. 30 includes a first hold image indicating a normal hold and a second hold image indicating a high expectation of transition to a special game. The first hold image is, for example, a hold image that lights up in white. The second hold image is a hold image that lights up in a different color to distinguish it from the first hold images (first normal hold image 506a, second normal hold image 506b, fourth normal hold image 506d), as in the third normal hold image 506c in FIG. 30(a). In particular, it lights up in a noticeable color, such as red or rainbow, to indicate a high expectation. The normal hold image 506 is also referred to as a hold icon.

A screen deformation effect can be executed as a special effect while the pattern change corresponding to the first reserved image (a pattern change that is executed when the reserve corresponding to the first reserved image is consumed) is being displayed. Furthermore, a screen deformation effect can also be executed as a special effect while the pattern change corresponding to the second reserved image (a pattern change that is executed when the reserve corresponding to the second reserved image is consumed) is being displayed. Note that the screen deformation effect is the effect described in Figures 32, 33, etc., and is an effect in which a frame image included in the displayed video is deformed, along with the frame image arranged around it, by enlarging, reducing, moving, distorting, shaking, tilting, cracking, color inversion, color conversion, etc. The frame images that are subject to this deformation include the normal reserved image 506 that corresponds to the remaining reserve. Note that when simply referring to a "reserved image," this refers to the normal reserved image 506.

<Configuration 2>
When a hold occurs corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning slot, the normal hold image 506 is not displayed suddenly, but is displayed with a predetermined animation that gradually appears to indicate the hold. After the normal hold image 506 begins to be displayed with a predetermined animation, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display (e.g., an animation display in which the normal hold image 506 sways back and forth, rotates 360 degrees clockwise, or flashes for 0.2 seconds after 1.8 seconds has elapsed) can be displayed in a loop. The animation display state of the normal hold image 506 is maintained by repeatedly displaying the specific animation display multiple times in a loop. The predetermined animation display is the portion of the animation process in which the normal hold image 506 gradually appears until it is fully revealed. The specific animation display is a short animation pattern portion in which the normal hold image 506, which has fully appeared in the predetermined animation display, sways back and forth. A specific animation display is repeatedly displayed in a loop, whereby an animation in which the normal reserved image 506 continuously swings from side to side is expressed, and this animation continues until a pattern change corresponding to the normal reserved image 506 starts.

At least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed even while a special screen transformation effect is being performed (i.e., animation display can be performed even if a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being performed), and at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed when the normal hold image 506 is the target of transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., the normal hold image 506 is displayed in a deformed state, and animation display can be performed in a manner synchronized with that deformed state; specifically, if the normal hold image 506 is displayed at an angle, the animation display will also be performed in a manner with the normal hold image 506 at an angle). This allows the screen transformation effect to have a sense of unity across the entire screen. It is desirable that the predetermined animation display for the first hold image and the predetermined animation display for the second hold image have different display modes (e.g., the former is an animation that gradually appears from the bottom, and the latter is an animation that gradually expands and appears), and a hold image generation sound corresponding to the first hold image (e.g., a "pico" sound with an output period of 0.5 seconds and output at a low volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display for the first hold image starts to be executed, and a hold image generation sound corresponding to the second hold image (e.g., a "boom!" sound with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display for the second hold image starts to be executed. Alternatively, a hold image generation sound may not be output even when the predetermined animation display for the first hold image starts to be executed (no hold image generation sound corresponding to the first hold image is provided), and a hold image generation sound corresponding to the second hold image (e.g., a "boom!" sound with an output period of 1 second and output at a high volume) may be output when the predetermined animation display for the second hold image starts to be executed. Additionally, it is desirable for the specific animation display in the first reserved image and the specific animation display in the second reserved image to have the same display format (for example, an animation that swings back and forth from side to side), but they may also have different display formats (for example, the former is an animation that swings back and forth from side to side, and the latter is an animation that rotates 360 degrees clockwise). Note that no sound effects are output in response to the execution of the specific animation display (there is no sound effect triggered by the start of the loop display of the specific animation display).

<Configuration 3>
When a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is not being executed, a first hold image can be displayed as normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the first hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. When a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, a first hold image can be displayed as normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the first hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. On the other hand, when a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is not being executed, a second hold image can be displayed as normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, and at that time, the second hold image can be displayed accompanied by at least one of a predetermined animation display and a specific animation display. However, when a new hold occurs while a screen transformation effect is being executed, a second hold image is not displayed as normal hold image 506 corresponding to the hold that has occurred, that is, the second hold image is not displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed. This allows screen transformation effects to be executed with priority so that situations that should be noticed do not overlap.

<Configuration 4>
The winning effect can be executed when the first reserved image and the second reserved image are both displayed. The winning effect can be, for example, a predetermined lighting effect (e.g., a red light from the frame lamp or the board lamp, which continues for 5 seconds or until the reserved time that triggered the lighting is consumed) and a winning flash effect (also called a "winning flash effect") that generates a sound output (e.g., a "Zubabababa!" sound, output at a high or extra-high volume for a 3-second output period). The winning effect can be, for example, the special ball-entry prediction effect described in FIG. 42 , and is preferably an effect that outputs a loud notification sound and causes the decorative lamp 111 to light up brightly when a new ball is entered into the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12.

When the first pending image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, it does not involve the execution of the winning effect. This allows the screen transformation effect to be executed with priority so that situations that should be noted do not overlap. As a variation, if the winning effect and the special winning pre-reading effect are different effects, when the first pending image starts to be displayed while the screen transformation effect is being executed, it may be configured so that it does not involve the execution of the winning effect, but the special winning pre-reading effect can be executed.

<Configuration 5>
If a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 may be transformed in the screen transformation effect and display the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the new hold. On the other hand, even if a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the hold number display (simple hold image 507 in FIG. 30) is not transformed in the special effect (i.e., it is not transformed like the screen transformation effect) and is updated and displayed. For example, if a new hold occurs when the hold number display is 0, the hold number display is updated from 0 to 1. More specifically, if a screen transformation effect is executed when there are two holds and a new hold occurs during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the normal hold image 506 corresponding to the third hold is transformed (e.g., enlarged or tilted) and displayed, while the hold number display is updated from 2 to 3 without being transformed (e.g., enlarged or tilted).

The execution time of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 is longer than the update time of the hold number display, and the execution time of the screen transformation effect is longer than the execution time of the animation display of the normal hold image 506. The execution time of the screen transformation effect varies depending on the period for which the transformed state is maintained, but as an example, it is desirable that it be a minimum of 5 seconds and a maximum of 60 seconds. The update time of the hold number display is, for example, the time equivalent to one frame of video display (if the video frame rate is, for example, 30 fps, one frame is 1/30 seconds). The execution time of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 is, for example, 0.3 to 1 second. The execution time of the screen transformation effect is, for example, 5 seconds. Therefore, the relationship is: update time of the hold number display < execution time of the animation display of the normal hold image 506 < execution time of the screen transformation effect (the time for which the frame image deformation is maintained).

<Configuration 6>
In the first presentation pattern in which a screen transformation presentation is executed, there is a higher possibility that a predetermined high-expectation presentation (such as a super reach presentation or a high-expectation movable role presentation described later) in which the normal reserved image 506 is not displayed during the pattern change will be executed than in the second presentation pattern in which a screen transformation presentation is not executed. The pattern change presentation pattern when the first presentation pattern is executed is (or is likely to be) a high-expectation pattern change presentation pattern (a winning or losing variation in which a super reach presentation is executed after a reach occurs), such as a pattern change presentation pattern in which a super reach presentation is executed. Also, the pattern change presentation pattern when the second presentation pattern is executed is (or is likely to be) a normal losing pattern change presentation pattern (a losing variation that ends in a short time without a reach occurring).

When a specified high-expectation effect is being executed, the normal hold image 506 is hidden, but the hold number display can be displayed. This allows the screen transformation effect to have a sense of unity across the entire screen, while also allowing for a period of time during which a high-expectation effect will be executed in subsequent developments, and does not prevent the player from understanding the current game state even in such a situation.

<Configuration 7>
In a specific symbol change that is executed when the result of the hit/miss determination is a specific result (miss) different from a predetermined result (hit), and that involves the execution of a predetermined high-expectation effect, a screen transformation effect can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before the development into the predetermined high-expectation effect. The display of the stage background image before the development into the predetermined high-expectation effect is the normal reach period 670 described in FIG. 43. On the other hand, the screen transformation effect is not executed while the stage background image that is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high-expectation effect in the specific symbol change is displayed. The period during which the stage background image is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high-expectation effect is the stop display period 674 described in FIG. 43. In this way, by varying whether or not the screen transformation effect is executed before and after the execution of a high-expectation effect, such as a super reach effect, it is possible to focus attention on only the first half of the situation, building anticipation for the subsequent developments, while preventing the afterglow of the loss from being hindered in the second half. During the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, the normal hold image 506 can be displayed, the hold number can be displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed, and the simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed, but during all or at least part of the period in which a predetermined high expectation effect is executed (super reach period 672), the normal hold image 506 is not displayed, the hold number can be displayed, the normal decorative pattern 502 is not displayed, and the simple decorative pattern 504 can be displayed. Also, even if a new hold occurs during the normal reach period 670 and the stop display period 674, the first hold image can be displayed with a predetermined animation display or a specific animation display, but the second hold image is not displayed with a predetermined animation display or a specific animation display (it is never displayed in the first place).

<Configuration 8>
The normal decorative pattern 502 can be displayed in a second display mode (e.g., a mode swinging from side to side, a mode in which the numbers or characters are facing diagonally) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display of the changing pattern in the first display mode (e.g., a stationary mode, a mode in which the numbers or characters are facing forward) has stopped. The first display mode is the pattern changing mode of the normal decorative pattern 502, and is the process from the start of the change of the normal decorative pattern 502 to the stop of the change. The second display mode is, for example, a display mode in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is oscillated. If the game is in a standby state when a predetermined period of time, for example, 3 seconds, has elapsed since the display of the stopped change of the normal decorative pattern 502 (in other words, if a new changing display has not started because there are no reserved items since the display of the stopped change of the normal decorative pattern 502), the display mode is switched to the second display mode in which the normal decorative pattern 502 is oscillated.

When the normal decorative pattern 502 is in the first display mode, the screen transformation effect can be executed, but when the normal decorative pattern 502 is in the second display mode, the screen transformation effect is not executed. When the normal decorative pattern 502 is moving in a way that indicates a special situation, such as in the second display mode, the visibility of that movement can be prevented from being impeded.

<Configuration 9>
The suppression notification effect in the suppression function described above is an effect (a suppression function activation notification effect) that notifies the end of a game when the count value MY, which is specific information relating to the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "95,000"). If the suppression notification effect is executed because the specific information reaches a predetermined value during the execution of the screen transformation effect, the screen transformation effect is interrupted. When the count value MY, which is specific information, reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "95,000"), the suppression function activation flag is turned ON. This allows the suppression function based on the predetermined value to be appropriately activated and maintained in an appropriate state even after activation, thereby accurately notifying the player. Note that the count value MY may be specified to increment from 0 to reach the predetermined value of 95,000, or to decrement from 95,000 to reach the predetermined value of 0, as long as the upper limit of the count is substantially 95,000.

<Configuration 10>
The suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformation like the screen transformation effect), and no new screen transformation effect is executed while the suppression notification effect is being executed. The suppression notification effect is not displayed, for example, on the effect layer 524 of FIG. 33, and is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformation like the screen transformation effect). The suppression notification effect is displayed, for example, on the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 of FIG. 33, and is preferentially displayed on a layer closer to the front than the effect layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. This allows the suppression function to be appropriately activated based on the specified value, and by maintaining an appropriate state even after activation, it is possible to accurately notify the player.

<Configuration 11>
The advance notification effect in the suppression function described above is an effect (pre-activation notification effect of the suppression function) that indicates that the suppression function will soon be activated when the count value MY, which is specific information, reaches a specific specified value (e.g., "90000"). The advance notification effect is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformation like a screen transformation effect), but a new screen transformation effect can be executed while the advance notification effect is being executed. The advance notification effect is not displayed, for example, on the effect layer 524 of FIG. 33, and is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformation like a screen transformation effect). This allows the advance notification of the suppression function to be activated appropriately and flexibly, and by maintaining an appropriate state even after activation, it is possible to accurately notify the player.

<Configuration 12>
The advance notification effect and the screen transformation effect can be executed simultaneously (the screen transformation effect can start executing while the advance notification effect is being executed, and the advance notification effect can be executed when specific information reaches a specific specified value while the screen transformation effect is being executed), but the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the screen transformation effect. The advance notification effect is displayed, for example, on the game status layer 523 or the error display layer 521 in FIG. 33, and is preferentially displayed on a layer in front of the effect layer 524 on which the screen transformation effect is displayed. This allows the advance notification suppression function to be activated appropriately and flexibly, and by maintaining an appropriate state even after activation, the player can be accurately notified.

<Configuration 13>
The advance notification effect of the suppression function and the display of the number of reserved balls can be executed simultaneously (the advance notification effect can be executed when specific information reaches a specific specified value while the display of the number of reserved balls is being executed), but they are not superimposed on each other. The display of the number of reserved balls is, for example, the simple reserved ball image 507 in the game status layer 523 of FIG. 33, and the advance notification effect can be displayed simultaneously in a position that does not superimpose on the simple reserved ball image 507.

<Configuration 14>
In a special situation where there is a specific hold related to a high-expectation effect variation pattern (e.g., a variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed) that can execute a screen transformation effect, and the difference between the specific information and a predetermined value is one ball away, if there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined one winning ball without a power outage before the specific hold is consumed, the screen transformation effect will not be executed after the winning ball. This is because the suppression function is activated after the winning ball. Note that once the count value MY reaches the predetermined value and the suppression function activation flag is ON, even if the power is turned off and then restored, the suppression function activation flag will not be cleared and will not be turned OFF unless the power is turned off and restored accompanied by a RAM clear. Therefore, the suppression notification effect will also be activated after the power is restored.

On the other hand, in the above special circumstances, if there is a power outage and then a power restoration before a specific reserved ball is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for a specific winning ball, the screen transformation effect may be executed after that winning ball. This is because in the above special circumstances, if there is a power outage and then a power restoration before a specific reserved ball is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for a specific winning ball, the count value MY will be cleared. In this way, if no irregular circumstances occur, priority is given to executing the screen transformation effect, and by leaving the possibility of executing the screen transformation effect even if an irregular situation does occur, the range of effects can be prevented from being narrowed.

<Configuration 15>
In a predetermined situation before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined waiting effect (waiting demo screen, waiting demo effect) indicating that the game is waiting can be executed, and while the predetermined waiting effect is being executed in that predetermined situation, the screen transformation effect is not executed, but the hold number display can be executed. The waiting effect here is, for example, an effect as shown in the screen example of Figure 40 (c), but the hold number display such as the simple hold image 507 may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the waiting effect is displayed.

After (during) the suppression notification effect is executed, none of the specified waiting effects, screen transformation effects, or hold number display will be executed. This is because the suppression function ends the game. In this way, while the player can be appropriately notified of the situation while waiting to play, if the suppression function is activated from that situation, it is possible to realize a notification that does not lead the player to mistakenly believe that they are in a waiting state and does not impair the visibility of the displayed content.

<Configuration 16>
It should be noted that even during the standby effect, it is possible to switch to the suppressed notification effect (to end the standby effect) when the specific information reaches a predetermined specified value. Also, even during the standby effect, it is possible to simultaneously execute the advance notification effect when the specific information reaches a certain specified value.

<Configuration 17>
During the jackpot start demo time, which is the start of the special game, when a launch notification effect is being executed to encourage a shot toward the jackpot entry port, the screen transformation effect is not executed, and the suppression notification effect is not executed even if the specific information reaches a predetermined value. The launch notification effect here is not a small right-hit guide like the guide display 530 displayed on the game status layer 523 of FIG. 33, but rather a full-screen display with a large text string such as "Aim for the attacker!", strongly encouraging the player to select the launch direction. Note that the guide display 530 is also executed simultaneously during the launch notification effect. During subsequent rounds of play (especially the second round and beyond) and during the end demo time, the launch notification effect is not executed, but the guide display 530 is executed. Furthermore, even in a high base state, the launch notification effect is not executed, but the guide display 530 is executed.

On the other hand, when the launch notification effect is being executed during the jackpot start demo effect, the screen transformation effect is not executed, but the advance notification effect can be executed simultaneously when specific information reaches a specific specified value. In other words, the advance notification effect may be displayed on a layer in front of the layer on which the launch notification effect is displayed. In this way, both the execution of the special game, which is an opportunity to earn profits, and the notification that it is time to hit right can be executed reliably and in a manner that does not impede visibility. Note that the advance notification effect and the launch notification effect may be executed simultaneously and displayed superimposed, but it is preferable that the advance notification effect and the guidance display 530 be executed simultaneously but not superimposed (display areas are separate).

<Configuration 18>
It is possible to execute a movable role effect using a movable role object that is driven in accordance with the content of the effect and performs a dramatic action, and it is possible to execute a high-expectation movable role effect as a movable role effect that suggests a high expectation of transition to a special game. The movable role object is, for example, the movable role object 520 in FIG. 34, which, when operated at a predetermined timing, indicates a high expectation of transition to a special game. However, while the movable role objects 520a-d in FIG. 34 operate during the execution of a screen transformation effect, the high-expectation movable role effect referred to in configuration 18 is an effect that is not executed during the execution of a screen transformation effect. For example, an effect that prompts the player to press the effect button 109 at the timing of a win/loss turning point at the end of a super reach effect other than the screen transformation effect is displayed, and a movable role object appears when the player presses the effect button 109 and a jackpot occurs.

High-expectation moving device effects are not executed while the screen transformation effect is being executed (and screen transformation effects are not executed while the high-expectation moving device effect is being executed), but the initial operation of the moving device, which is executed when power is restored after a power outage, can be executed even while the screen transformation effect is being executed. The initial operation of the moving device is the operation of the moving device executed, for example, when power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, and is the operation of putting the moving device into an operating state and then returning it to its initial position. In other words, specifically, there is a situation where the changing display starts during the initial operation when power is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the screen transformation effect starts to be executed at a predetermined timing in the changing display, and the initial operation has not been completed at that predetermined timing.

When a high-expectation movable role performance is in progress, normal decorative pattern 502 and normal hold image 506 are hidden, but simple decorative pattern 504 and simple hold image 507 (hold number display) are displayed. Meanwhile, when the initial operation of the movable role is in progress, normal decorative pattern 502, simple decorative pattern 504, normal hold image 506, and simple hold image 507 (hold number display) can all be displayed. This allows for performance linkage that does not interfere with other image performances during the most exciting performance of the high-expectation movable role performance. Meanwhile, for the initial operation of the movable role, which is the same or similar operation, performance restrictions such as hiding normal decorative pattern 502 and normal hold image 506 can be removed, allowing for flexible performance execution. In other words, the initial operation of the movable role can be executed in parallel with the initialization process after power-on, allowing the performance to proceed while prioritizing recovery from a power outage.

<Configuration 19>
As shown in Figures 40 and 41, a presentation setting change that changes the presentation setting related to the execution frequency of the look-ahead presentation can be executed in response to a player's operation input. When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a first frequency (for example, a frequency of 30% when a jackpot is reserved and a frequency of 1% when a loss is reserved), while when the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a second frequency that is lower than the first frequency (for example, a frequency of 30% when a jackpot is reserved and a frequency of 0.3% when a loss is reserved, or a frequency of 20% when a jackpot is reserved and a frequency of 0.2% when a loss is reserved). By changing the presentation setting on the screens such as Figures 41 and 42, it is possible to set either the first mode (a mode in which the look-ahead chance mode is turned off and the frequency of the look-ahead presentation is normal) or the second mode (a mode in which the look-ahead chance mode is turned on and the frequency of the look-ahead presentation is low).

<Configuration 20>
During the execution of the screen transformation effect, the display frequency of the first pending image when a hold occurs is the same regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set. During the execution of the screen transformation effect, the execution of the look-ahead effect that displays the second pending image may be restricted so as not to interfere with the screen transformation effect. In this way, by standardizing the execution frequency of the look-ahead effect during the execution of the screen transformation effect, it is possible to create a situation in which the focus is on the screen transformation effect that is currently being executed, rather than on whether the look-ahead effect is being executed or not. As a variant example, during a variation in which a screen transformation effect is executed, if a super reach effect is executed after the execution of the screen transformation effect, and a miss is suggested or notified in the super reach effect (for example, the normal decorative pattern 502 is displayed in a display mode other than a doublet, or an effect in which the player is defeated by an enemy character is executed), and the above-mentioned stopped display period 674 occurs, the display frequency of the first pending image when a hold occurs during the stopped display period 674 may also be configured to be the same, and the execution of the look-ahead effect that displays the second pending image may be restricted.

<Configuration 21>
Even while a screen transformation effect is being executed, it is possible to execute a volume setting such as that shown in Fig. 40(b), but it is not possible to execute a change in the effect setting on the screens such as those shown in Fig. 41 and Fig. 42. However, in a modified example, it is also possible to execute a volume setting such as that shown in Fig. 40(b) even while a screen transformation effect is being executed, while it is also possible to execute a change in the effect setting on the screens such as those shown in Fig. 41 and Fig. 42.

<Configuration 22>
The volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 40(b) is not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., it does not undergo transformations like the screen transformation effect), and the effect setting change screens shown in FIGS. 41 and 42 are also not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effect (i.e., they do not undergo transformations like the screen transformation effect). The number of color variations used in the volume adjustment screen is, for example, only one color, such as green, and is fewer than the number of color variations used in the normal decorative pattern 502. The normal decorative pattern 502 uses a large number of colors (e.g., two colors for the numbers, ten colors for the characters associated with the numbers, for a total of 12 colors). The number of color variations (e.g., three colors) used in the effect setting change screen is also fewer than the number of color variations used in the normal decorative pattern 502. The colors used in the effect setting change screen are, for example, two to three colors, such as black text displayed within a white frame.

<Configuration 23>
The content of the effect can be changed by a first operation by the player (for example, pressing the effect button 109 while a specific effect is being executed). Specifically, by pressing the effect button 109 while the button image is displayed (during the valid operation period), the button image is hidden, but an effect triggered by the press (such as the aforementioned dialogue preview effect) occurs. Similarly, as in the light-emitting effect described above, by repeatedly pressing the button, the color of the light emitted by the decorative lamps 111 around the effect display device 60 and the color of the effect display (image color) that mimics light on the effect display device 60 change. The volume can be adjusted by a second operation by the player (for example, pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 40( b) is displayed; this also applies when the volume adjustment screen is not displayed, but pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 causes the volume adjustment screen to be displayed, and then pressing the up and down keys of the cross key 110 again). (The display mode of the image showing the volume level displayed on the volume adjustment screen also changes; that is, it changes to an image showing the changed volume level.) Mode setting can be performed by a third operation by the player (for example, pressing the cross key 110 or the effect button 109 while the effect setting change screen as shown in Figures 41 and 42 is displayed; if a variable display is in progress, there is no need to press the effect button 109; the effect setting change screen can be displayed by pressing the left or right key on the cross key 110, and from there the left or right key on the cross key 110 can be pressed again).

If the first operation is continued (for example, if the effect button 109 is pressed and held while a specific effect is being executed), this is considered to be a continuous input of the first operation, i.e., it is processed as multiple automatic presses in succession. On the other hand, if the second operation is continued (for example, if the up or down key on the directional pad 110 is pressed and held while the volume adjustment screen is displayed), the second operation is not considered to be a continuous input (automatic continuous press), but is processed as a single press of the up or down key. Therefore, even if the up or down key is pressed and held, the volume will not continue to increase or decrease. Similarly, if the third operation is continued (for example, if the directional pad 110 or the effect button 109 is pressed and held while the effect setting change screen is displayed), the third operation is not considered to be a continuous input (automatic continuous press), but is processed as a single press of the directional pad 110 or the effect button 109. Therefore, even if the directional pad 110 or the effect button 109 is pressed and held, the mode setting operation will not be continuously input and the setting will not continue to switch continuously (it will not be repeated as on → off → on → off → ...).

<Configuration 24>
If the second operation continues before power-on and continues after power-on, the volume will not change after power-on. For example, if the cross key 110 is accidentally pressed and held down when power-on, the volume will not be accidentally increased or decreased after power-on, and can remain at the default value. Since the second operation before power-on cannot detect the rising edge of the press signal indicating the button press, even if the press continues after power-on, it is not considered to have been pressed, and the press will not be detected unless the button is pressed again and the press signal rises. In this way, it is possible to prevent unexpected events such as unintended volume changes from occurring.

<Configuration 25>
If the third operation continues before power is turned on and continues after power is turned on, the mode will not change after power is turned on. For example, if the cross key 110 or the effect button 109 is accidentally pressed and held down when power is turned on, the mode will not be accidentally changed after power is turned on, and the default value can be maintained. Since the third operation before power is turned on cannot detect the rising edge of the press signal indicating that the button has been pressed, even if the button continues to be pressed after power is turned on, it is not considered to have been pressed, and the press will not be detected unless it is pressed again and the press signal rises. In this way, it is possible to prevent unexpected situations such as unintended mode changes from occurring.

<Configuration 26>
If the second operation corresponding to increasing the volume is ongoing before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on (for example, when the up key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the volume will not change after the power is turned on. However, if the second operation corresponding to increasing the volume is ongoing after the power is turned on (for example, when the up key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), and a second operation corresponding to decreasing the volume is newly executed (for example, when the down key of the cross key 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected and the volume will change.

If the second operation corresponding to volume down is ongoing before the power is turned on, and continues after the power is turned on (for example, if the down key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), the volume will not change after the power is turned on. However, if the second operation corresponding to volume down is ongoing after the power is turned on (for example, if the down key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), and a second operation corresponding to volume up is newly executed (for example, if the up key of the directional pad 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected, and the volume will change.

In this way, appropriate volume changes can be achieved (preventing unintended changes to the volume in irregular situations), while allowing one type of operation (adjustment) even in irregular situations, allowing some operations to be performed normally even in irregular situations, and allowing for flexible reflection of operations.

<Configuration 27>
If the third operation corresponding to the mode change has been ongoing before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on (for example, when the left key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), the mode will not be changed after the power is turned on. However, if the third operation corresponding to the mode change continues after the power is turned on (for example, when the left key of the cross key 110 is pressed and held), and a different third operation corresponding to the mode change is newly executed (for example, when the right key of the cross key 110 is pressed), the rising edge of the press signal will be detected and the mode will be changed.

If a third operation corresponding to a mode change has been ongoing before power is turned on, and continues after power is turned on (for example, the right key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), the mode will not change after power is turned on. However, if a third operation corresponding to a mode change is continued after power is turned on (for example, the right key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), and a different third operation corresponding to a mode change is newly executed (for example, the left key of the directional pad 110 is pressed), a rising edge of the press signal will be detected, and the mode will be changed.

In this way, by allowing one operation (adjustment) even in irregular situations, some operations can be performed normally even in irregular situations, allowing operations to be reflected flexibly.

<Configuration 28>
Both the second operation (for example, the up and down buttons of the cross key 110 to instruct a volume change) and the third operation (for example, the left and right buttons of the cross key 110 to instruct a mode change) can be pressed and detected simultaneously, and based on this, volume adjustment and mode change can be performed simultaneously in parallel, and a volume adjustment screen and a mode change screen can be displayed simultaneously.

<Configuration 29>
The period during which volume adjustment can be performed during the pattern change is longer than the period during which mode setting can be performed during the pattern change. Also, there are predetermined pattern changes that are pattern changes that are performed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from a predetermined result and are not accompanied by a reach effect (a miss change that ends in a short time without the occurrence of a reach), and specific pattern changes that are pattern changes that are performed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from the predetermined result and are accompanied by a high-expectation reach effect (a miss change in which a super reach effect is executed after the occurrence of a reach), and the difference between the period during which volume adjustment can be performed during the predetermined pattern change and the period during which mode setting can be performed is smaller than the difference between the period during which volume adjustment can be performed during the specific pattern change and the period during which mode setting can be performed. Specifically, in a miss variation (120 seconds) in which a super reach effect is executed after a reach occurs, at least 55 seconds after the start of execution of the super reach effect is a period in which mode setting cannot be executed, and the rest of the time is a period in which mode setting can be executed, while the period from the start of the change to the end of the change (120 seconds) is a period in which volume adjustment can be executed, and in a miss variation (5 seconds) in which a reach does not occur and ends in a short time, the period from the start of the change to the end of the change (5 seconds) is a period in which volume adjustment and mode setting can be executed.As a modified example, since volume adjustment is executable but effect setting changes are not executable during pattern changes accompanied by high expectation reach effects, the difference between the period in which volume adjustment is executable and the period in which effect setting changes are executable during pattern changes accompanied by high expectation reach effects may be configured to be substantially equal to the period in which volume adjustment is executable. In this way, by making it possible to execute an exciting presentation without informing the player of the possibility of a change in presentation tendency, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty grasping the degree of expectation of the presentation, while by relaxing the restrictions on making the exciting presentation easier to perceive audibly, the player can instantly change the way he or she perceives the presentation to suit his or her own preferences.

<Configuration 30>
If the third operation continues before the period in which mode setting cannot be executed (the aforementioned period in which changes to the effect settings are invalid, the period in which changes to the effect settings are not possible), the third operation continues during the period in which mode setting cannot be executed, and the third operation continues after the period in which mode setting cannot be executed (for example, when the left or right key of the directional pad 110 is pressed and held), the mode will not be changed during the period in which mode setting can be executed, which is the period after the period in which mode setting cannot be executed.

<Configuration 31>
If a third operation (for example, pressing the right key) for giving a second instruction to change the performance settings is newly executed after switching to the period in which the performance setting change is executable while the third operation (for example, long pressing of the left key) for giving a first instruction to change the performance settings is continued from before the period in which the performance setting change is not executable, the rising edge of a press signal is detected and the performance setting change based on the second instruction is executed.

<Configuration 32>
While a high-expectation device performance is being executed, volume adjustment can be performed and a setting screen for volume adjustment can be displayed, but mode setting is not performed and the setting screen for mode setting is not displayed. However, during the initial operation of a movable device, which is executed when power is restored after a power outage, volume adjustment can be performed and a setting screen for volume adjustment can be displayed, mode setting can be performed and a setting screen for mode setting can be displayed. In this way, during the most exciting performance of a high-expectation movable device performance, the possibility of changes in the performance trend is not presented to the player, preventing it from making it difficult to grasp the level of expectation, while relaxing the restrictions on making the exciting performance easier to hear, allowing the player to instantly change the way they perceive the performance to suit their own preferences.

<Configuration 33>
In the high base state, a period during which mode setting is not possible is provided, and if power is interrupted and restored during the period during which mode setting is not possible, and then the system transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may differ from the mode set before the period during which mode setting is not possible in the high base state.On the other hand, if power is not interrupted during the period during which mode setting is not possible in the high base state, and then the system transitions from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state is the same as the mode set before the period during which mode setting is not possible in the high base state. For example, if the super reach period 672 and the stop display period 674 in the high base state are set as an unexecutable period, and the pre-read chance mode was set to on before the unexecutable period, and if a power outage and power return occurs during the unexecutable period, and the high base state is restored and then the high base state is transitioned from the high base state to the low base state upon satisfaction of a specified condition (the specified number of stays in the high base state has elapsed, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that triggers a transition to the low base state has been played, etc.), the pre-read chance mode will be set to off in the low base state rather than on, whereas if a power outage does not occur during the unexecutable period and the high base state is transitioned from the low base state upon satisfaction of a specified condition (the specified number of stays in the high base state has elapsed, a jackpot game or a small jackpot game that triggers a transition to the low base state has been played, etc.), the pre-read chance mode will be set to on in the low base state. In this way, even if the game state changes and the mode setting is not applied and the mode setting cannot be changed, the mode can be forcibly set by powering down and restoring the power, and even in such a situation, if the power is not restored, the high base state will end and the most recent mode setting will be automatically adopted.

<Configuration 34>
The device is equipped with a transfer instruction means that accepts a player's operation to instruct the transfer of stored ball count information to an external unit. The transfer instruction means is, for example, the count button W40 in Figures 49 and 50. The count button as a transfer instruction means may also be referred to as a "transfer button." When stored ball count information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball count transfer sound can be output that suggests or notifies the transfer of the stored ball count information. A screen deformation effect can be executed while the ball count transfer sound is being output in response to operation of the transfer instruction means. If a suppression notification effect is executed when specific information reaches a predetermined value during the execution of a screen deformation effect while the ball count transfer sound is being output, the execution of the screen deformation effect is interrupted, but the output of the ball count transfer sound is not interrupted.

<Configuration 35>
If a pre-announcement effect is executed because the specific information reaches a specific predetermined value while a screen transformation effect is being executed while the ball count transfer sound is being output in response to an operation on the transfer instruction means, the execution of the screen transformation effect is not interrupted, and the output of the ball count transfer sound is not interrupted either. In this way, the screen transformation effect is executed without any restrictions so that highly anticipated effects are not missed even during game ball transfer, but even in such a situation, if a situation arises where the game should be ended, the screen transformation effect is forcibly interrupted, making it possible to ensure the fairness of the game and to curb excessive gambling.

<Configuration 36>
The volume can be adjusted even while the ball number transfer sound is being output in response to an operation on the transfer instruction means, and a setting screen for volume adjustment can also be displayed. This allows the player's preferences to be reflected even during game ball transfer.

<Configuration 37>
The mode setting can be executed even while the ball number transfer sound is being output in response to an operation on the transfer instruction means, and a setting screen for mode setting can also be displayed. The player's preferences can be reflected even during game ball transfer.

<Configuration 38>
Even during periods when mode setting is not possible (periods when execution is not possible), the ball number transfer sound can be output in response to operation of the transfer instruction means.

<Configuration 39>
During the stage background after the predetermined high expectation effect has ended (the above-mentioned stop display period 674), the effect sound is muted, but the ball number transfer sound can be output. The volume can be adjusted during this muted period, but mode setting may or may not be possible.

<Configuration 40>
During the pattern change, it is possible to execute a character change effect (the aforementioned dialogue preview effect that is displayed in a partial or entire area of the screen, or a caption effect that displays captions at the bottom of the screen corresponding to the conversation between the ally character and the enemy character that is executed during the super reach effect). There are multiple types of character colors (white, green, red, giraffe pattern, rainbow, in order of expectation level) for a predetermined character change effect (for example, the characters in the dialogue preview effect). Note that the character color in a character effect (character color in the character change effect, character effect during a jackpot, and character effect during an error) is the color of the character itself or the color around the character (the color of the speech bubble, the color of the surrounding line, or the color of the effect around the character).

<Configuration 41>
During the execution of a special game, it is possible to execute a text effect during a jackpot (displaying lines, song titles, and lyrics corresponding to the story unfolding during the execution of the special game). The text color of a predetermined text effect during a jackpot (for example, text in the display of song titles or lyrics) is a different text color (white for lowest expectation/rainbow for highest expectation) from the text color (green or giraffe pattern) for low or very high expectation in a predetermined variable text effect (for example, text in a dialogue preview effect). In other words, it is possible to execute a variable character effect in which predetermined characters are displayed during the variable display, and a jackpot variable character effect in which a specific character is displayed while a special game is being played, and the variable character effect corresponding colors, which are the colors of the characters themselves or the surrounding areas of the characters displayed in the predetermined variable character effect, have a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow), and it is configured so that when the second color is displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect, the expectation of transition to special game is higher than when the first color is displayed, and the expectation of transition to special game is higher when the third color is displayed than when the second color is displayed, and it is possible to display a predetermined color that can be displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect, as the jackpot variable character effect corresponding color, which is the color of the characters themselves or the surrounding areas of the characters displayed in the predetermined jackpot variable character effect, while at least the second color is not displayed. In addition, it may also be applied to the display of the cumulative number of prize balls that are the subject of the count-up effect (the characters used when displaying the prize ball count-up) or the highlighting display (the characters used when the number of prize balls reaches the number that marks the division in units of 2,500).

<Configuration 42>
While predetermined variable character effects (for example, characters in dialogue preview effects) are subject to deformation in the screen deformation effects, predetermined jackpot character effects (for example, characters in song titles or lyric displays) are not subject to deformation in the screen deformation effects (i.e., they are not subject to deformation like the screen deformation effects).

<Configuration 43>
Unlike predetermined variable character effects (for example, characters in song titles or lyric displays), predetermined jackpot character effects (for example, characters in dialogue preview displays) can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball count display and highlight display that are the subject of the count-up display, but at least they are not superimposed on the cumulative prize ball count display that is the subject of the count-up display (they may or may not be superimposed on the highlight display).

<Configuration 44>
During an error, it is possible to execute specified error text effects (such as the full tank detection error text "Please remove the ball" displayed when a full tank is detected, the door open error text "Door is open" displayed when the door is opened, the magnetic detection error text "Magnetic field detected" displayed when magnetism is detected, and the setting value error text "Setting value error" displayed when a setting value error occurs), but the color of the text is a different color (white for lowest expectation/red for medium expectation) from the color of the text (green or giraffe pattern) for low or very high expectation in specified variable text effects (for example, text in dialogue preview effects) In other words, it is possible to execute a variable character effect in which a predetermined character is displayed during a variable display, it is configured to be able to determine multiple types of errors, it is possible to execute an error character effect in which a specified character is displayed when an error occurs, it has a first color (e.g., white), a second color (e.g., green, giraffe pattern), and a third color (e.g., rainbow) as a variable character effect corresponding color which is the color of the character itself or the color of the surrounding area of the character displayed in the predetermined variable character effect, it is configured so that when the second color is displayed as the variable character effect corresponding color in the predetermined variable character effect, the expectation of transition to a special game is higher than when the first color is displayed, and it is configured so that when the third color is displayed, the expectation of transition to a special game is higher than when the second color is displayed, and it is possible to display a predetermined color which can be displayed as a variable character effect corresponding color in a predetermined variable character effect as an error character effect corresponding color which is the color of the character itself or the color of the surrounding area of the character displayed in the predetermined error character effect, but it does not display at least the second color.

<Configuration 45>
Certain variable character effects (for example, characters in dialogue preview effects) are subject to deformation in screen deformation effects, but certain error character effects (for example, full tank detection error characters) are not subject to deformation in screen deformation effects (in other words, they do not undergo deformation like screen deformation effects).

<Configuration 46>
Certain error character effects (for example, magnetic detection error characters) are not subject to transformation in the screen transformation effects (i.e., they are not transformed like the screen transformation effects).

<Configuration 47>
The error character effects include a first error character effect (full tank detection error character displayed when a full tank is detected, and a door open error character displayed when the door is opened) and a second error character effect (magnetic detection error character displayed when a magnetic field is detected, and a setting value error character displayed when a setting value error occurs).

<Configuration 48>
The first error character effect differs from a predetermined variable character effect (for example, characters in a dialogue preview effect) in that it can be displayed simultaneously with the cumulative prize ball count display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect, but is displayed superimposed on at least one of the cumulative prize ball count display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect (the first error character effect has a higher display priority). On the other hand, when the second error character effect is executed, the cumulative prize ball count display and highlighting that are the subject of the count-up effect are not executed simultaneously.

<Configuration 49>
The first error character effect can be executed simultaneously with a predetermined variable character effect (for example, characters in a dialogue preview effect) and a predetermined jackpot character effect (for example, characters in a song name or lyric display), but the second error character effect is not executed simultaneously with either the predetermined variable character effect or the predetermined jackpot character effect (only the second error character effect is executed during the second error).

<Configuration 50>
Operation of the effect button 109 can trigger the execution of a predetermined variable character effect (for example, a character effect in a dialogue preview effect that can be executed by operating the effect button), but does not trigger the execution of other predetermined character effects (a predetermined jackpot character effect, a predetermined error character effect). Operation of the cross key 110 can trigger the execution of a predetermined jackpot character effect (for example, a character effect in the display of the song name or lyrics of a song output during a jackpot game that can be switched to by operating the cross key), but does not trigger the execution of other predetermined character effects (a predetermined variable character effect, a predetermined error character effect). Neither operation of the effect button 109 nor operation of the cross key 110 triggers the execution of a predetermined error character effect (for example, a full tank detection error character) (operation of the effect button or cross key is not involved in any way as an execution trigger). In other words, the game device is capable of executing a variable character effect that displays predetermined characters during the variable display, is capable of executing a jackpot character effect that displays specific characters during a special game, is configured to be able to determine a plurality of types of errors, is capable of executing an error character effect that displays specified characters when an error occurs, has a first operation means (e.g., an effect button) and a second operation means (e.g., a cross key) as operation means that can be operated by a player, is configured to be able to execute a predetermined variable character effect when triggered by operation of the first operation means, but is not configured to execute a predetermined variable character effect when triggered by operation of the second operation means, is not configured to execute a predetermined jackpot character effect when triggered by operation of the first operation means, but is configured to execute a predetermined jackpot character effect when triggered by operation of the second operation means, and is not configured to execute a predetermined error character effect when triggered by operation of the first operation means,

<Configuration 51>
The specific color (e.g., giraffe pattern) in a specified variable text effect (e.g., dialogue preview effect) is composed of multiple colors (yellow and brown), and this specific color is also used in other preview effects (e.g., full-screen previews such as stage change previews), but the fineness of the color differs from that of the specified variable text effect (the variable text effect may have a narrower yellow and brown gradation width, or if it is composed of a brown pattern on a yellow background, the brown pattern may be smaller, etc.).

The techniques described in the examples and variants may be specified in the following ways:

[First aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected probability of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed in the pattern change before the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
The special effect can be executed even during the display of a pattern change corresponding to either the first reserved image or the second reserved image,
After the reserved image starts to be displayed with the predetermined animation display, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display can be displayed in a loop,
A pinball game machine characterized in that at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed even while the special effect is being executed, and that at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display can be displayed after the reserved image becomes the subject of transformation in the special effect.

[Second aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected probability of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed in the pattern change before the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
After the reserved image starts to be displayed with the predetermined animation display, a specific animation display that is different from the predetermined animation display can be displayed in a loop,
A pinball game machine characterized in that when a hold occurs during the execution of the special effect, if the hold image corresponding to the hold that occurred is the first hold image, the first hold image can be displayed with at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display, but if the hold image corresponding to the hold that occurred is the second hold image, the second hold image is not displayed with at least one of the predetermined animation display and the specific animation display.

[Third Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
a performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected probability of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed in the pattern change before the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
It is an effect that can be executed in response to the occurrence of a hold, and has a winning effect as an effect that can be executed at the start of displaying the first hold image and the start of displaying the second hold image,
A pinball game machine characterized in that when the first reserved image is started to be displayed during the execution of the special effect, the winning effect is not executed.

[Fourth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
When displaying the reserved image, the display can be started with a predetermined animation display,
There are a plurality of types of the specific performance, and the expected probability of transition to a special game in the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance differs depending on the type of the specific performance that is executed in the pattern change before the pattern change related to the reservation that triggered the execution of the specific performance,
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When a new reservation occurs during the execution of the special effect, the reservation image can be displayed as a reservation image corresponding to the new reservation after being subject to deformation in the special effect, while the reservation number display is updated and displayed without being subject to deformation in the special effect,
The execution time of the predetermined animation display of the reserved image is longer than the update time of the reserved number display, and the execution time of the special effect is longer than the execution time of the predetermined animation display of the reserved image,
In the first effect pattern in which the special effect is executed, the possibility of a predetermined high expectation effect being executed is higher than in the second effect pattern in which the special effect is not executed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, while the predetermined high expectation effect is being executed, the reserved image is not displayed but the reserved number display can be displayed.

[Fifth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
A stage background image set according to the production stage can be displayed,
When the performance develops into a predetermined high expectation performance, the stage background image is hidden during the developed predetermined high expectation performance,
A pinball game machine characterized in that a pattern change is executed when the result of a win/loss judgment is a specific result different from a predetermined result, and in a specific pattern change which is a pattern change accompanied by the execution of the predetermined high expectation effect, the special effect can be executed while the stage background image is displayed before the development into the predetermined high expectation effect, but the special effect is not executed while the stage background image which is redisplayed after the end of the predetermined high expectation effect in the specific pattern change is displayed.

[Sixth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The display device has decorative patterns which are patterns that show the result of the pass/fail judgment in a dramatic way, and the decorative patterns include normal decorative patterns which are displayed as main patterns on the performance display device, and simple decorative patterns which are displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative patterns,
The normal decorative pattern can be displayed in a second display mode when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the pattern variable display was stopped in a first display mode,
A pinball game machine characterized in that the special effect can be executed when the normal decorative pattern is in the first display mode, while the special effect is not executed when the normal decorative pattern is in the second display mode.

[Seventh Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect and the suppression notification effect is executed, the special effect is interrupted,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, and the special effect is not newly executed while the suppression notification effect is being executed.

[Eighth aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect and the suppression notification effect is executed, the special effect is interrupted,
The suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, and the special effect is not newly executed during the execution of the suppression notification effect,
The advance notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, but the special effect can be newly executed during the execution of the advance notification effect,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the advance notification effect and the special effect can be executed simultaneously, while the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the special effect.

[Ninth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
a performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image that can be displayed on the effect display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
A pinball game machine characterized in that in a special situation where there is a specific hold that is a hold related to a variation pattern that can execute the special effect, and there is one ball left until the specific information reaches the predetermined specified value, if there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined winning ball without a power outage before the specific hold is consumed, the special effect will not be executed after the winning ball, but if there is a power outage and then a power recovery before the specific hold is consumed and there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined winning ball, the special effect may be executed after the winning ball.

[Tenth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
If it is a predetermined situation before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined standby effect indicating that the game is on standby can be executed, and while the predetermined standby effect is being executed in the predetermined situation, the special effect is not executed but the hold number display can be executed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that after the suppression notification effect is executed, none of the predetermined waiting effect, the special effect, and the hold number display is executed.

[Eleventh Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
In a situation where a launch notification effect for encouraging a launch toward the large winning opening is being executed in a jackpot start demo effect executed at the start of the special game, the special effect is not executed, and the suppression notification effect is not executed, while the advance notification effect can be executed at the same time.

[Twelfth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The display device has decorative patterns which are patterns that show the result of the pass/fail judgment in a dramatic way, and the decorative patterns include normal decorative patterns which are displayed as main patterns on the performance display device, and simple decorative patterns which are displayed in a display form that is simpler than the normal decorative patterns,
It is possible to perform a movable role production using a movable role that is driven in accordance with the performance content and performs a dramatic action,
As the movable role effect, it is possible to execute a high expectation movable role effect that suggests or notifies that the expectation of transition to the special game is high,
While the high expectation movable role performance is not executed during the execution of the special performance, the initial operation of the movable role that is executed in response to the power recovery after the power outage can be executed even during the execution of the special performance,
A pinball game machine characterized in that while the high-expectation movable device performance is being performed, the normal decorative pattern and the reserved image are not displayed, but the simple decorative pattern and the reserved number display are displayed, and while the initial operation is being performed, any of the normal decorative pattern, the simple decorative pattern, the reserved image, and the reserved number display can be displayed.

[Thirteenth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The types of the reserved images include at least a first reserved image and a second reserved image having a higher expectation of transition to a special game than the first reserved image,
When the first mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a first frequency, while when the second mode is set, the display frequency of the second reserved image is a second frequency that is lower than the first frequency;
A pinball game machine characterized in that, during the execution of the special effect, the frequency of displaying the first hold image when a hold occurs is the same regardless of whether the first mode or the second mode is set.

[14th Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that variably displays a pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
a performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
If the first operation is continued, it is regarded as a continuous input of the first operation, whereas if the second operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the second operation, and if the third operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the third operation;
If the second operation is continued before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that, if the third operation is continued before power is turned on and the third operation is continued after power is turned on, the mode is not changed after power is turned on.

[15th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
If the first operation is continued, it is regarded as a continuous input of the first operation, whereas if the second operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the second operation, and if the third operation is continued, it is not regarded as a continuous input of the third operation;
If the second operation is continued before the power is turned on and continues after the power is turned on, the volume does not change after the power is turned on,
If the third operation has been continued before power-on and has been continued after power-on, the mode is not changed after power-on,
This pinball game machine is characterized in that, if the second operation corresponding to volume up continues before power is turned on and the second operation corresponding to volume up continues after power is turned on, the volume does not change after power is turned on, but if the second operation corresponding to volume down is executed in a situation where the second operation corresponding to volume up after power is turned on continues, the volume changes.

[16th Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
The period during which the volume adjustment can be performed during the pattern change is relatively longer than the period during which the mode setting can be performed during the pattern change,
The game has a predetermined pattern change which is a pattern change that is executed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from the predetermined result, and is a pattern change that is a pattern change that does not involve a reach effect, and a specific pattern change which is a pattern change that is executed when the result of the win/loss determination is a specific result different from the predetermined result, and is a pattern change that involves a high expectation reach effect, and the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be executed and the period during which the mode setting can be executed during the predetermined pattern change is smaller than the difference between the period during which the volume adjustment can be executed and the period during which the mode setting can be executed during the specific pattern change,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, if the third operation is continued before the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, the third operation is continued during the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, and the third operation is continued after the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed, the mode is not changed during the period in which the mode setting can be executed, which is the period after the period in which the mode setting cannot be executed.

[17th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
It is possible to perform a movable role production using a movable role that is driven in accordance with the performance content and performs a dramatic action,
As the movable role effect, it is possible to execute a high expectation movable role effect that suggests or notifies that the expectation of transition to the special game is high,
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
During the execution of the high-expectation movable role performance, the volume adjustment can be performed, and the setting screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed, but the mode setting is not executed, and the setting screen for the mode setting is not displayed,
A pinball game machine characterized in that, during the execution of the initial operation of the movable device, which is executed when power is restored after a power outage, the volume adjustment can be performed, a setting screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed, the mode setting can also be performed, and a setting screen for the mode setting can also be displayed.

[18th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
As a state relating to the ease of a ball entering a predetermined winning hole, there is a low base state which is a state of normal ease of a ball entering, and a high base state which is a state in which the ease of a ball entering is higher than that in the low base state,
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
a period during which the mode setting cannot be performed is provided in the high base state;
A pinball game machine characterized in that if a power outage and power restoration occurs during the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state, and thereafter a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state may be different from the mode set before the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state, whereas if a power outage does not occur during the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state and thereafter a transition from the high base state to the low base state, the mode set in the low base state is the same as the mode set before the occurrence of the impossible period in the high base state.

[19th aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect can be executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to notify in advance that the game is scheduled to end;
Further provided is a transfer instruction means for receiving an operation by a player to instruct the transfer of the stored ball number information to an external unit,
When the stored ball number information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball number transfer sound can be output to indicate or notify the transfer of the stored ball number information;
The special effect can be executed while the ball number transfer sound is being output,
If the suppression notification effect is executed during the execution of the special effect while the ball number transfer sound is being output, the execution of the special effect is interrupted, but the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted,
When the advance notification effect is executed during the execution of the special effect while the ball number transfer sound is being output, the execution of the special effect is not interrupted and the output of the ball number transfer sound is not interrupted either.

[Twentieth Aspect]
a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
Based on the advance information, a specific effect suggesting the expected probability of transition to a special game related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information can be executed by a pattern change prior to the pattern change related to the reservation corresponding to the advance information,
The mode relating to the execution frequency of the specific effect has a first mode and a second mode, and the mode setting of whether to set the first mode or the second mode can be executed in response to an operation by a player,
Further provided is a transfer instruction means for receiving an operation by a player to instruct the transfer of the stored ball number information to an external unit,
When the stored ball number information is transferred by operating the transfer instruction means, a ball number transfer sound can be output to indicate or notify the transfer of the stored ball number information;
The predetermined effect content can be changed by a first operation by the player,
The volume can be adjusted by a second operation performed by the player,
The mode setting can be executed by a third operation by the player,
The volume adjustment can be performed even during the output of the ball number transfer sound, and a setting screen for the volume adjustment can also be displayed.
A pinball game machine characterized in that the mode setting can be executed even while the ball number transfer sound is being output, and a setting screen for the mode setting can also be displayed.

20: Large prize slot, 60: Performance display device, 80: Game board, 81: Play area, 220: Win/lose determination means, 230: Variation pattern determination means, 240: Hold control means, 260: Special game control means, 303: Performance determination means, 305: Performance display control means.

Claims (1)

a game board on which a game area is formed;
A start winning hole is provided at a predetermined position in the game area, and the entry of a game ball triggers a lottery;
A large winning hole that allows or makes it easy for game balls to enter when opened;
A winning/loose determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game, which is more advantageous to the player than a normal game, is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning hole;
A pattern display device that displays a variable pattern to indicate the result of the pass/fail judgment;
A variation pattern determination means for selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns in which the variation display process of the pattern is determined;
a reserve control means for storing lottery values corresponding to new balls entering the start winning slot as reserves up to a predetermined number when a pattern variation corresponding to a previous ball entering the start winning slot is displayed when a new ball enters the start winning slot;
a special game control means for enabling a special game accompanied by opening of a big prize opening to be executed when the result of the win/loss determination by the win/loss determination means is a predetermined result;
a performance display device that displays performance content;
A performance determination means for determining performance content to be displayed on the performance display device;
a performance display control means for displaying the performance content determined by the performance determination means on the performance display device;
The effect display control means causes the effect display device to variably display decorative patterns in response to the variably displayed patterns on the pattern display device,
The decorative patterns include normal decorative patterns and simplified decorative patterns that are displayed in a smaller size than the normal decorative patterns,
The variable display of the simple decorative pattern includes a periodic display of a unit display pattern in which the pattern combination changes according to a predetermined rule,
When a new ball enters the starting winning hole, advance information regarding a lottery value corresponding to the new ball is transmitted to the effect determination means;
When a reservation corresponding to a new ball entering the starting winning hole occurs, a reservation image corresponding to the reservation can be displayed.
The number of reserved items stored by the reservation control means can be displayed at a predetermined position as a reservation number display separately from the reservation image,
The effect image display device includes at least one or more first images belonging to a first image group and one or more second images belonging to a second image group,
A special effect is executed in which a special first image obtained by deforming the first image in a predetermined manner is displayed, and the special effect has a stationary display period in which the predetermined special first image is displayed in a stationary state for a time longer than the time during which the simple decorative pattern displays one cycle of the unit display pattern ,
When specific information, which is information regarding the difference between the number of awarded prize balls and the number of used balls, reaches a predetermined specified value, a suppression notification effect can be executed to notify the end of the game.
In a special situation where there is a specific reserve that is a reserve related to a variation pattern that can execute the special effect, and the difference between the specific information and the predetermined specified value is one ball away, if there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined winning ball without a power outage before the specific reserve is consumed, the special effect will not be executed after the winning ball, but if there is a power outage and a power recovery before the specific reserve is consumed, and there are two or more winning balls for a predetermined winning ball, the special effect may be executed after the winning ball,
If it is a predetermined situation before the execution of the suppression notification effect, a predetermined standby effect indicating that the game is on standby can be executed, and while the predetermined standby effect is being executed in the predetermined situation, the special effect is not executed but the hold number display can be executed,
After the suppression notification effect is executed, none of the predetermined waiting effect, the special effect, and the hold number display is executed,
When the specific information reaches a specific specified value different from the predetermined specified value, a pre-notification effect is executed to suggest or notify that the specific specified value has been reached or the difference number required to reach the predetermined specified value;
When the specific information reaches the predetermined value during the execution of the special effect and the suppression notification effect is executed, the special effect is ended ,
The suppression notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, and the special effect is not newly executed during the execution of the suppression notification effect,
The advance notification effect is not subject to transformation in the special effect, but the special effect can be newly executed during the execution of the advance notification effect,
The pinball game machine is characterized in that the advance notification effect and the special effect can be executed simultaneously, while the advance notification effect is displayed in front of the special effect.